Adobe InDesign CC – Advanced Training

1. Introduction: Hi there, my name is Dan. I'm an Adobe Certified Instructor... and Adobe Certified Expert in InDesign. I was named MAX Master at Adobe Max this year... which is Adobe's big conference they have every year. Now this course is about the advanced features in InDesign. We're going to talk about productivity, speedy work flow techniques. So, this is not for people brand new to InDesign. It's for people that already have the fundamentals. If you are okay placing images, working with text... then this is the course that's going to take you to the next level. Now even if you consider yourself a pretty heavy InDesign user... I promise you, this course is going to blow your InDesign mind. We'll learn advanced font tricks using Typekit and OpenType fonts... as well as font grouping and font pairing. You'll master color features like the Color Theme tool and Color modes... as well as techniques for professional proofing of colors for print. We'll set them as defaults like fonts, colors... and turning the integrated hyphenation off once and for all. We'll explore tricks for creating, aligning, and distributing shapes... as well as more advanced drawing tricks. Even tricks on how to magic up more background, or completely remove it. And what we'll learn in Advanced InDesign course... we will have tactics to control our paragraphs fully. Fun tricks like expanding text boxes... splitting and spanning columns. We'll become a Styles Master using Nested Styles... Grep Styles, Next Styles, Advanced Object Styles. Your work is going to become... super amazing, super fast, super fluid. We'll make beautiful charts and graphs in InDesign. You'll finally learn all the pros and cons... for all the various digital distribution methods... including things like Interactive PDFs, Epubs... and amazing new Publish Online. You become a master of long text heavy documents... as well as interactive forms, and scripts. There is just so much we cover. I want to cover it all here in the intro, but there's just not enough time... so for a detailed list... go through the video courses, that will outline everything that we cover. So if you are one of those people... who knows there's a better, faster way to work in InDesign... follow me, we'll go from... good at InDesign to super amazing at InDesign. Excited. InDesign's awesome. 2. Getting Started with the Adobe InDesign CC Advanced Course: All right, so time to get started. The main thing is to download the exercise files. So, there will be a link on the page here somewhere... to download those exercise files. The other thing to do is... I have what's called the completed files. That just means, on every video you'll see a link... and it will just be where I'm up to, end of that video. So the InDesign documents, the INDD file, so you can download it. If yours isn't working, just compare mine and yours. That's it, let's get into the videos. 3. Adjusting your workspace for maximum amazingness: Hi there, welcome to the Workspace video. We're going to start with just some housekeeping... to make sure we're all on the same page. Then we're going to move into some more advanced workspace features. So hang around for that, there's some gems in there. To start with, we're going to make sure... we've got our units and increments all the same. And you do it up here. On a Mac, it's under 'InDesign CC', 'Preferences', and go to 'Units'. If you're on a PC, it's under 'Edit'... and down the bottom here, 'Preferences', and 'Units'. So find here. The other thing to note, if you're changing your default units... from say millimeters, or picas, or inches... and you need to do it with no files open. If I have the file open and do it, it will change just for that document... and as soon as I close it down, and open up a new document... you go back to the default... and that can be really annoying. So nothing open, and let's go to our 'Units & Increments'. Now depending on where you are in the world... you might be on picas... it's an old school style from newspaper days. I never used picas, so I'm always switching mine to millimeters... because I'm in Europe most of the time... but if I've got clients in US, I'm switching it to inches. We're going to use inches for this course... just because most of the people watching these videos are based in US. So that's all you need to do. Click 'OK'. We never change the Stroke, it's always done in Points. So we're going to click 'OK'. Now that will change the default forever. The other thing I'd like you to do, is if we go to 'File', 'Open'... I'd like you to go to 'Exercise Files'... and in '01 Spring Flyer'-- if you haven't downloaded the exercise files... there's a link on the page here somewhere. I want you to open up the 'indd' file, the '01 Spring Flyer'. If you're using an older version of InDesign, and playing along... a lot of that stuff will still work... but you might have to use the 'idml' file. This will allow all the versions of InDesign, pre CC2018... to open them up, and work fine. If you're in CC2018 or above... just use the indd files. Let's click 'Open'. Hi everyone, I've paused myself quickly here... just to add a little update... about the new version of InDesign, just before we get started. So InDesign has changed one little thing here... that might be a little confusing, so I'll address it now. So in the very next part of this video... I'm going to ask you to go up to here... to go to 'Window', and go to 'Workspace'... and I'm going to say, go to 'Essentials', and then 'Reset Essentials'. The new update, what they've done is they've shifted Essentials... and they've renamed it called Essentials Classic. So that's the one I want you to go for. If throughout this course I say... go to 'Workspace' and click on 'Essentials'... actually, go to 'Essentials Classic', please. So that's it, not too big a deal... but it's easy to get it out of the way here earlier on... all right, carry on with the course. Now first thing is, I'm going to go to up the top here. This is going to change my workspace. So I'm going to make sure the tick is on 'Essentials'... and I'm going to click 'Reset Essentials'. That means everyone's going to look the same. The other thing I'm going to do is, see this little pop-up menu here? This little Chevrons. I'm going to pop mine out, and have this open for the entire class. It's up to you, it doesn't matter... but that's the way I'm going to work through this course. If you're on a PC, I'm pretty sure it's up here on the left. If you can't find it, the exact same thing is here. 'Window', 'Workspace', and you can see here, 'Essentials', same thing. So that's the boring housekeeping stuff out of the way. Let's look at some more advanced workspace features. And it's to do with this Pasteboard area here. This kind of like lighter gray in the background. Now a lot of people, me included... I like to kind of copy things, move it over here... and start working on like alternate layouts... but there's not a lot of room in here, watch this. If I start making a couple of versions... and if I start dragging it up, look, there's just no room there... there's definitely no room at the top. By default, only gives you a tiny Pasteboard area. If you're like me, and in Illustrator, it has a ginomous Pasteboard area... you end up doing lots of work, kind of all over the place. So we can adjust that here in InDesign as well. Now there's two ways to do it, per document. If I got this document open, I can say... just this document, 'Preferences', go to 'Guides & Pasteboard'. And down the bottom here is where the defaults are. So, mine is 8.5"x1". It's got this 18", and over here, by maybe 5". Click 'OK'. You'll see, it has a much bigger Pasteboard area. Some people love a big Pasteboard area, some people don't. One of the other things though... if you make it really, really big, say it is 15" on the vertical... if you have another page, they're actually quite physically far apart. It's not a big deal, but that's just something to be considered. Now though, if I open up a new document, any random document... you'll notice, my Pasteboard area is back to the teeny tiny size. To get around that, have nothing open, I'm going to close both of these back up. Close, close... And have nothing open, and if I change my settings now... it will change forever. So you can go in here, change it up to a bigger size. I'll leave mine as default, just to match my students' when they come into class. So we're going to leave that there. Before we get out of here though, I'd like to show you... under 'General', this thing here, 'Show "Start" Workspace'. This is the new workspace in 2018... where it kind of shows you the documents you've been working on. Some people don't like that... they want to see all the panels like it was before. You can just turn that off there, click 'OK'. And it means, when it starts up, it goes to this view. But that's totally up to you, it annoys lots of people. Under 'Preferences' again, we're going to go to-- I'm going to turn that back on. I've grown to like it, but I know a lot of people don't. One of the other things people don't like working with is Interface. Over here, you can click through, and just change it back to old school InDesign. Up to you. I'm going to go to this default here of this Medium Dark. Let's click 'OK'. Next thing we can do to make your starting a job a lot smoother and a lot faster... is to adjust the default pages... because whenever you go to 'file', 'New', 'Document'... you've got 'Print'... and you've got some defaults. So US Letter has defaults... but there might be things in here... like you might always be using two columns... and the margins, you might be changing. So you might have things you do every single time, and you're like... "Man, every time I have to do that." So what you can do, to change this by default, is go to 'Close', 'File'... come down to 'Document Presets', and click on 'Define'. We're going to double click the 'Default'. And I'm going to be working under 'Print', and pick your 'Page Size'. You might be A4 or Letter, whatever you want to adjust. And in here, you might be saying, I'm using Landscape all the time. Nobody is using Landscape the whole time... but down here as well, 'Columns', I want two columns... and I want to 'Gutter' that, so it's kind of nice and full, like that. What I tend to do as well, is 'Margins', I break this little link here... so that, down the bottom... I always have like a thicker piece down the bottom of my margins. Contains the page numbering and the document title. Say you're always working, and you need to have your Bleed... you could type in '0.125'. Cool thing about that now, is if I click 'OK', click 'OK'... and when I go to a new document, and I pick 'Print'... 'US Letter' now, you can see down here, I've got two columns. My Margins are set, 1" there, and my Bleed is all set for me. You might have two versions, okay? And you can have more than one, under 'File', 'File Definitions'... and you can click on 'Define', and you can just create your own. So you might create a new one... you can call this 'Letter Alternative1', or 'Letter for specific client'. And it will appear in your new documents. You might be in charge of a larger studio... and you can grab your default, and save it. Save it on to the network drive... and people can come into the same option, and load it in. So you've got some consistency across documents. Before we go out, I'm going to edit mine, and put it back to normal. So I'm going to go change this, and we'll cut this out, and I'll see you in a sec. One last thing to make your life a little easier in InDesign is the Pages panel. So let's open up any old document, I'll open up my 'Spring Flyer' again. In my Pages panel here... I'm actually going to push that all out so I can see everything... and in the Burger menu in the top here... you'll notice, if I actually add a bunch of new pages... they kind of stack vertically, and that's fine... but it would be lot more better use of space... if they're kind of stacked side by side. You can do that easily, under the Burger menu... then go to 'View Pages', and go to 'Horizontally'. It just means they stack side by side. Especially if you've got a nice big screen, you can have this out... and you can see, you can have actually quite a few on the screen at one time... rather than have to scroll up and down. The other nice thing you can do is you can go to the Flyout menu here... and you can go to the 'Panel options', and these thumbnails are quite small. You can adjust them, to say Large or Extra Large... depending on your preference. There's Jumbo as well. Just makes some of the details a little easier to know which page to jump into. One thing though, if I go to 'Essentials', and 'Reset Essentials'... it's going to remove that. It will stay for all the new documents now, but if you ever reset it... it will go back to default. You can get around that by going into here, and just creating your own new workspace. I'm going to call mine 'Dan'. It just means that, it's going to look like this... and if I need to reset it, I can go to 'Reset Dan'... and it's going to stay the same. So I hope you found some useful paths in getting set up. I know that's boring, you came for some more exciting advanced InDesign. Let's move on to the next video now. Bring on the fonts. 4. Setting The Default Font Size For New Documents Adobe InDesign : So every time you draw a new text box... Type tool, draw a text box... it defaults to Myriad Pro, 12 points. With no space after, and hyphenation turned on by default. I never use Myriad Pro, and I'm never at 12 points. So how do we change the defaults? Trick is, just close down the document you have open, so you got nothing open. You need to switch from this kind of 'Start' work space at the top here... to any of these other ones, maybe use 'Essentials'. Make sure you're on your Type tool. And any changes you make up here now... will be the default for any new documents. So let's say, most of my work gets done in Roboto. So I'm going to pick Roboto Lite. And it's going to be 10 points. And in paragraph, down here, I want to turn hyphenation off. I dislike hyphenation, and I'm sick of turning it off. With that done, if I open up a new document now... I'll have this plain old empty document. Grab my Type tool, grab the Type box... fiddle with Place Holder text. And it's Roboto Lite, and it's10 points. And there's no hyphens. Thank you very much, InDesign, and goodbye, Myriad. All right, next font feature. 5. Special features for Typekit & Open Type Fonts : Hey there, in this video we're going to look at Typekit and OpenType fonts... and how awesome they are, because they let us do things like this... where this is a font, we've downloaded free from Typekit... but because it's an OpenType font, it allows us to do things like this. You can see, the S, there's an alternative S with a bit of a softer edge. You can see this G here, it's different from the one at the top. This A is kind of more like we draw hand drawn. This L, look at the descender. And also you can go bananas, and just throw them all in, and make a mess. Let's go now into InDesign to learn how to make that beautiful fonts... or like this one, a beautiful mess. First up, let's make a new document. We're going to use US Half Letter. So we're going to go to 'Print', and we'll go down to 'Letter-Half'. If you can't see some of these options... you can see 'View all presets', it will drop down some other ones. I'm going to use 'Letter-Half', and I'm going to make it 'Portrait'. I'm going to set the margins to '0'... and Bleed at '0', at that is all that's going to be good. I'm going to turn off 'Facing Pages'. Click 'Create'. Let's bring in an image, so let's go to 'File', 'Place'. And I want to find, in 'Exercise Files', under '01 Spring'... There's one called 'Modern kitchen white yellow background'. And I'm going to drag it from the top, all the way across. It's going to be a little bit bigger than I need. I'll use the Black Arrow just to lift it up, so it's there. I'm going to zoom out a little bit. I'm going to work in my Pasteboard area over here. I'm going to grab the Type tool, drag out a nice big box, and type in 'Spring Sale'. Now, Typekit... Typekit is a service provided by Adobe, it's free, well kind of free. It's part of your Creative Cloud license... so if you're paying for a license, you've got this. You've got access to it. To get to it all you need to do is have your Type tool... on your 'Character Formatting Controls', and up here, where you pick fonts... let's go and pick 'Add fonts from Typekit'. And this is where you end up. Typekit is just fonts, there's commercial use. They're just really nice fonts. You can get fonts from free sites, and that's fine... but Typekit has some really kind of versatile fonts... and OpenType fonts, which we're going to... explore the kind of benefits for in a second. Now when it comes to Typekit not everybody can use it. Mainly because of things like Firewalls in bigger companies. So when I'm teaching, students... about 80% of them can do Typekit fine... but there are 20% other people working at big large corporations... who don't allow these kind of font syncing thing to work. So if you can't make yours work, talk to your IT department... and they'll probably tell you, "No, you can't do it." But for the people that can, you want to go to 'Browse'... and along the top here, you can type in, you can see, I can type in anything I like. Get a sense of the font before you start working. Over here on the right, there's a nice way of saying... "Actually, I want only the Script fonts please, or the hand drawn fonts." Just a really nice way of reordering and finding the fonts you want. So the one I want, I know I want Lust. I'm going to use 'Lust'. And you can click on 'Sync'. I've already synced mine. What will happen is, it will take probably 30 seconds to a minute... and then the fonts will just start working in InDesign. There's nothing else you need to do. It's a really cool little system. So let's jump back into InDesign. So, I'm going to select my text, and up here, I'm going to pick 'Lust'. And I'll pick this 'Lust Regular'. I'm going to make mine a lot bigger. '72'. 72's too big. Enough that I can see both of those words side by side. Now, why did I pick a Typekit font? It's because it's an OpenType font. How do I know it's an OpenType font? It's because, pretty much all of them that I've got from Typekit are OpenType fonts. And OpenType fonts are just a kind of more complex fonts. If I go to my font menu here. So if I grab my Type tool, and I drop down all my fonts... see these ones that say 'TT' next to them? These are fonts, but they're quite simple. They don't have these ligatures and glyphs... that I want to show you, and impress you with next. So if you are picking a font... try and pick ones that either have an 'O' or a 'TK' next to them, for Typekit. These are OpenType fonts as well. You might notice, on your computer, you might have Helvetica... and then, another Helvetica NT, or NQ, or something called Pro. Often that will be the difference between that font as a Truetype font... or that font as an OpenType font. They look exactly the same for that kind of letters and numbers... but it's when it gets to these glyphs and ligatures that it will change. So what I want to do is, first of all I want to make it white for no reason. And grab my Black Arrow. Now, if you can't see this little O down the bottom here... you can go to 'InDesign', 'Preferences', and go to 'Advanced Type'. And down the bottom here, there's these two little check boxes you can turn on. If you get sick of that little O, you can turn them off here as well. So turn those both on. I'm going to click 'OK'. Now why are these great... and why do I love them, and get a bit excited by them... is that the person that designed this font made some decisions. They decided that the A's going to be this kind of like... the A that nobody draws. Same with the G, nobody writes their Gs like that, you might. They normally do kind of a loop and a dangly bit. Okay, dangly bit's not the technical word, but a descender that goes down. But also, potentially, the font designer has made some options for you to pick from. And they're called Stylistic Sets. You can find them down here, with that little O. Click on them with the Black Arrow. You can see, if I click on this first one... Awesome, huh! So it's changed out these three. So those were decisions that this font designer has made. A second option for them all. If I turn them on and off, you can see, the A, the S, and the G, all change. If I turn that off, you can see this one. He's probably seen some people designing a flyer... and all these kind of like curls, and loops... and descenders, all linked together... and he's like, "Man, they spend ages with the Pen tool." Often no, they've just gone through, and found a good OpenType font... with some good ligatures, and switched them out. You can see, these are bunched in here. So this is doing it for every single thing in this box. Ooh, some cool swatches. So you can do it individually. So I can just highlight this S here... and you'll see, it pops out at the bottom, the options for it. There's only one for the S, let's look at the L. There's quite a few options for this one. I want those, what do I want? Not that one. This is where I spend far too long, kind of going through, and deciding... which bits we're going to use. I might switch that G out to the alternative to that. You just kind of work your way through, and decide... what you'd like to do, and how far you want to customize this thing. Awesome! I hope you get access to the Typekit, even if you don't... just go and check, the font that you might be using already for work... or for a job, or one that you just like might already be an OpenType font... and there might be some Stylistic Sets. Not all fonts have them. Also, the exciting ones are either hand drawn... or there's more kind of like title display fonts. Let's have the Body Copy ones. You can skip on to the next video now. What I'm going to do is just kind of... design, not even design, I'm just going to lay this about there. I'm going to add a rectangle so it can be seen. And I push it to the back. The easiest way to do that is with your Black Arrow... is hold 'Command' and the first of the square brackets '['... which is often next to P on your keyboard. Or if you're on a PC, hold down the 'Control'... first square bracket '[', and they'll just move it down one place. And I might lower the opacity a little bit as well. All right, let's save this one. For this course, I'm going to create a folder on my desktop, new folder... and I'm going to put everything in here. It's going to be 'InDesign Advanced Course Work'. This one's going to be 'Spring Flyer v1'. All right, on to some more font awesomeness. 6. Where to get great free fonts for use in InDesign: So we've already looked at Typekit. So we're asked, where do you get great fonts from? Fontsquirrel is a nice place... but my favorite place, where not all people have heard of, is Google Fonts. So fonts.google.com You come into here. You can do the same thing as before, you can delete this, and say 'Spring Sale'. And it will give you a bit of a demo of it. Now, just like Typekit, you can decide I only want to look at Display fonts. You can see there, the Abril Fatface is a lot like Lust. The font that I want is Roboto. It's a really common body copy font. That, Source Sans, and Open Sans... are probably the most commonly used at the moment. But it's a bit nicer than say Arial or Helvetica. Some of you might be gasping at the Helvetica comment... but Roboto is quite nice. I'm going to type in Roboto. And I'm going to download it to-- so I want the Roboto, just the regular one. I'll hit '+'. And I want the Roboto Slab, it's kind of a nice chunky one, and click this. So what this is meant to be used for is for website fonts... but there isn't a cool option that not many people know about. If I click on this 'Families Selected'... first of all, it will look like this, click on 'Customize'... and you can go, say, I want... the Slab, I want all three sizes, please. And for Roboto, you can go through, and just tick them all. I want all of these guys to use. Clickety click. And once you've got them all... at the top here there's this little mysterious button. It's the download button, click on this... and it would just download those fonts to use on your computer. They are TrueType fonts, not OpenType fonts. We looked at OpenType fonts earlier, right? OpenType has extra awesomeness. So these are just regular TrueType fonts... but in this case, Roboto's going to be really good for us. Now, if you don't have access to download them... they are in your exercise files. Where are they? There they are. 'Exercise Files', in '01 Spring Flyer'. 'Roboto', you can just open them up. See these TrueType fonts, you just double click on each of them. Actually you can click on all of them, and double click them all at once. And they'll install. It's the same thing on a PC, just double click any of those fonts... and they'll install, and they'll be ready to go in InDesign, no need to restart it. So Roboto's going to be the font we use throughout this course. You can totally use any font you like. You even have Helvetica, but I thought Google fonts would be a good mention. One of the perk for using Google Fonts over other fonts is that... if you do design a brand, and it's going to be used on a website... if you use Google Fonts... it's going to be easy to have that font on their website... as well as their printed material, so it's kind of like a dual use... whereas fonts through TypeKit, some of them, not all of them... need to be licensed specifically and separately... for use on websites. So before we go, let's go and use our Roboto in InDesign. I'm going to grab the Rectangle tool and draw a box that sits over here. I'll get it so it actually lines up. My Color panel here, I'm just going to drop down so it's more of a dark grayish. And I'm going to grab the Type tool. I click and drag the box down here. Paste in my text, select it all, make sure it's Roboto. Move it up here. And I'm going to have to use Roboto, probably the Bold version... so it can be seen, like kind of tease and cease. Font selected, I'm going to use 'Paper'. And I'm probably going to make it all caps, this double tease at the top here. Black Arrow. All the way down, I like it in Bold. You can carry on now to the next video. I am going to go and play with fonts, decide on sizes. You my friend, meet me in the next video for some more font amazing stuff. See you there. 7. Mastering your fonts in Adobe InDesign CC : Okay, things you didn't know about your Font menu. I'm going to grab the Type tool, drag out a Type box, paste some stuff in. I can't see it... because I've got my Preview on, switch it back to Normal. Hit the 'W' key. Then we'll make this a little bigger, so we can all see it... using one of the shortcuts I use all the time. It's, select all the text, and hold down 'Command Shift'... and then the greater than '>' key, or the full stop, period '.' key. The comma ',' key next to it goes down, and that goes up. If you're on a PC, that is 'Control Shift', and use those same two keys. So I've got my text, actually I'm going to select that with the whole box. Now I go back to my Type tool... and up the top here, I'm going to drop this down. There's been some additions to InDesign that people haven't noticed. And one of my favorites is, let's say I pick 'Lust' for this... and I go back in there, see this wavy line there? Somehow, magically, if I click on this... InDesign will cut down the fonts on your machine, the ones you have installed... and try and find ones that are very similar. You can see, pretty amazing. Like it's picked the other Lust ones, but it's also picked ones that... you can see here, Carina Pro. Very similar. It's just really handy, if you're like... "Oh I like this font, but I wish I had something similar, but different." You got to make sure you turn it off again... otherwise your font list is pretty small. Another thing to help speed up is that, let's say you're working in a company... and you use these same fonts over and over again. Instead of having to scroll through your list to find them all... you can hit this little star '♪' system. Let's say that I use Roboto a lot... Roboto Slab. And I've been using Lust. Let's say I need Helvetica as well. So down here, somewhere, Helvetica. There it is there, into the star one. What's really nice about once you start them is that... say you're working on your document... let's say, now, I can go back into my Font menu... and I can just turn on-- see this option here, and it just has my stars. So instead of having that ginomous list... I can click on here, and just go to my Type tool, and say... "Actually I just want one of these guys." You can pick from the drop down list as well, to pick my 'Thin' option. So super handy, but remember, you can turn it off... otherwise your font list will go on forever. Be just these five. Another option, I don't use it very much, you can show just the Typekit ones. These ones that are being downloaded from Typekit. Often this will kind of indicate the ones that are bit more special... because you've spent some time downloading them, can be useful. But the super useful one is this filter. Now for me, I keep many-- every time I get a new MacBook Pro, I'm like... "Okay, this time I'm going to go through... and put all my fonts into some sort of groups." Hand writing, Display, Slab Serif, all that sort of stuff. It never happens. But now InDesign has added magic in this filter here. You can go through, and somehow, for the fonts in your machine... it went through and went, "Let's look at these Script fonts." And it put them all in one big group. I don't know how it did it, but it's magic. Same thing at the top here, I've got my Slab Serifs all together. All my hand written fonts. Just needs to be one for-- I feel like I got a lot of fonts that are... like animal shaped like letters, cactuses, or Christmas decorations. It's decorative, but it has none of my characters fonts. Let's go back to hand written fonts, and I want this one to be... I'm going to use 'Felt Marker', actually I really don't like Felt Marker. I'm going to use 'Market OT'. Just like the rest of them, you got to turn them on... otherwise you'll be stuck with this list. So turn it off, go back to 'All Classes'. And we're back to our full list. All right, I hope you found something awesome... in that little font drop down list. I know, I use it a lot, especially 'Favorites'. Let's get on to the next bit of font greatness. 8. What the font font guess in Adobe InDesign CC: So there's two ways to make this work. Neither of them are in InDesign. So, you're going to have to jump to either Typekit or Photoshop, I'll show you both. I'm going to use Photoshop. So in Photoshop, let's all go to 'Open'... and I want you to go to 'Exercise Files'. Go to '01 Spring Flyer', and there's 'Font Match 1'. Now this is just a JPEG. It could be a PDF, we don't have the font. Just want to know what that font is, maybe this one in the middle here. Grab the Selection tool, and draw a box around the font you want to pick. And then go up to 'Type', there's one in here called 'Match Font'. If you've got an earlier version of Photoshop... maybe 2015, this is not going to work. But you can see here, I selected it, it just goes off, and picks it. I know that it's Roboto Slab, because I originally picked this font... but there's no physical way that Photoshop can actually pick. It's actually just going and checking in its database... and seeing, and trying to match the font style. You can see here, there's my Roboto Slab Lite... it even picked the weight, so good. Actually I think it was Roboto Slab 100 that I used. But it gives you some other options as well. How good is it? It's pretty good. If it's a photograph that you've taken with your cell phone... I find that's less useful... but if it's just a JPEG you've pulled off the internet... or an image from a website, that seems to work pretty well. So let's hit 'Cancel', and let's look at another version of picking a font. Let's jump to the Typekit website. So if we go to Typekit, and just go to the actual home page, typekit.com... or click on this little icon here. All the way back to the beginning, outside of Browse... there's this little option here. So, I can grab the 'Font Match 2', click, hold, and drag it. Give it a sec, I'll show you this, show you what it looks like. That's what it looks like, just a little snapshot. It's a JPEG, so there's no kind of like editable text. There's bits and pieces all over the place. So, in Typekit... it's kind of gone through, and guessed the font. Actually I want to pick this one up here, not that font, I'm looking for this guy. So grab as much of it as you can. You might have to tidy things up in Photoshop, maybe to delete... a background, or to make it a little easier for you to guess. So 'Select a single line of text', 'Next step'. It tries to guess the words. So you can help it, you can see, it didn't get 'Healing'... because of this little flourish at the top here. So I'm going to type in 'Healing' to help it out. Pretty good recognition though, let's click 'Next step'. You can see here, it's picked Lust. I know it's Lust, you know it's Lust, because we've all started using it. But it's gone through and picked Lust. Any other option it's given us? Lots of Lust, there's another one here, that's very close. And it's one that can be sent from Typekit, which is cool. Click 'Sync', and it will download. You can see, some of these ones are paid ones... and some of them can be synced Why can some be synced, and some paid? This one here, Lust Display Italic is part of your Typekit account... whereas this one is not. It's still Lust, but a different font... and you can go off and purchase it if you need it. So there's two ways of deciding how to pick fonts. Now there are a couple of other services, like WhatTheFont. Go to myfonts.com/whatthefont It's pretty much exactly like Typekit. The last option is to use your cell phone. There is an option, there's an app that Adobe has, it's called Adobe Capture. Let's jump in here now, and take a look at it. So here I'm on my phone, I've got an Android phone. This app, the Adobe Capture one is available both on iPhone and Android. I'm going to open it up. There's a bunch of different options in here... we're going to stick to Type for the moment... because that's the topic we're in. and hit the little '+' button down the bottom right. Now, this is me. What it's looking for is, you to find a bit of sample text. I'm using my business card. Why? Because I know the fonts, so I know if it gets it right or not. And line it up. What I found is-- that's looking right, but I'm turning that-- down the bottom left there, there is the turning the flash on. Click the button. Awesome! So it's got it, now you need to kind of help it. Say, by dragging these corners here, not him, by dragging these corners here. I'm not going to grab both of them... because-- they're the same font but different weights. I'm not going to try and confuse on purpose, I guess. I pick this one. Kick back, relax, and it picked the total right one. Embraces me. You can see, Museo Sans around it, it even picked the weight correctly. It gives you other options. There's lots of them, you can see, some of them are pretty close, right? Even though they're different fonts, they're very, very similar. So where this gets even better is, you can click on 'Edit' on the top right... and you can play around with font size. You can go through and decide on... can you see, there's the Font Style, which is basically the weight. You can decide on all the different weights you can play around with. You can play around with the tracking. Leading, actually that's what I was doing there. Tracking, you can track it in, track it out. What you're kind of doing now is you're building... a Character Style that you can use in InDesign. So let's have a look at-- Let's change the text, and just look at a sample bit of text. There, now my Leading is being mixed up. I like you here now. So you can play around with this. You get the idea, right? It recognizes fonts. What's really magical is the arrow in the top right. Once I click on this one, I can create a Character Style, and give it a name. This one's going to be-- let's just say I'm going to use this for my Maynooth furniture... because I love it. And I'm going to use it for, I don't know, Headings. Can't think of anything. And save it to... My Library, actually I'm going to save it to my Maynooth Furniture one. Click 'Save', and it's going to appear in InDesign. Magic! Then I can start using it. There's a Character Style. Too good, okay. That's going to be it for picking fonts. Yes, we had a couple of different ways of doing it. I love this phone version, especially if you're out and about... and you're like, "Oh, I love this one." "I'm just going to appropriate or steal ideas from other people." All right, let's get on to the next video. 9. How to pick beautiful font pairings in Adobe InDesign CC : In this video, we're going to look at Font Pairing. Basically just two fonts... the Heading, the Body Copy, they work well together... they're different fonts... we're going to work with Typekit font pairings, and Google font pairings. Just to break out of using the exact same fonts over and over again... we'll give you some tools to go find some nice new stuff. So let's say you are like me... and you end up using the same two fonts for everything. You just need to kind of escape that. Or say you are a little bit new to InDesign... and you just want to know what looks good together. Easiest way is using the term called Font Parings. So just go to Google, and type in 'Font pairings'. And decide on, like I'm going to use Typekit. The cool thing about this is, I just switched to Images... and this gives you an idea-- because we've used Typekit... it's going to be fonts you'll have access to... you don't have to go off and try work out what the font is. You can just go through here and... let's click on any of these ones. And you can start to see... this person here, this is just a really nice way... of kind of looking at it, and going... "Actually, I like that combination." "I think I like this one." So you can go into Typekit now, download Gibson... and whatever that one's called. And start using it in your designs. So that's a nice easy one. You can do the exact same thing obviously for Google fonts. Nice kind of pairings. You can find something you like. I like that. Just Open Sans Condensed, and Lora as the Body copy. Now another really cool place is something called justmytype.co What you can do is come down here and look at Typekit pairings. Click on it. Now the one thing you have to do... is you have to wait a long time for this page to load... because there's so many fonts, fonts on a website take a long time to load. You need to give this... literally walk away and give it like one to five minutes to load. It would just load with probably Times New Roman... and till it's downloaded the font, you'll be like, "No, it's not really good." But now what you can do is... you can kind of see a really nice version of all of these as well. The Typekit fonts... sort of same thing as looking at the images. But it gives you actually direct links to these font Typekit. Just some really nice stuff in here as well. So that is Font Pairing. So that Dan does not keep using Museo and Roboto... and Lust over and over again. 10. Free icons using Adobe Market in InDesign CC : So, to get our free icons... we need to use the Adobe Creative Cloud app. Now on a Mac, it's up the top here... you can see this little Creative Cloud icon. Click on that, if you're on a PC, it's in the bottom right of your desktop. And you'll find a similar looking icon. You can't find it either of those places... you might have to go to your applications on your machine... and try find the Creative Cloud app, then open it up. Inside of here, jump to 'Assets'... and we're going to work in 'Market'. Now Market is the place where we've got lots of commercial use... free to use in your designs icons, mainly icons. There's some graphics and texts, some UI design in here as well. This little thing goes on forever, so you'll have to use the Search icon. What we're looking for is like a tag, or a price tag. You can see, there's a lot of tags you can pick from. So go through, find the one that you want to use. I'm going to use this first one here. I click on it. One thing you can do when you're clicking on the icons in here... the ones you want to use... if you find a SVG version, a Scalable Vector Graphic... they're probably the best to use. Why? It's that they're Vector... and all it just means is that you get to easily change the shape and the colors. If it's a JPEG or a PNG, you've got to do stuff in Photoshop. It becomes a little harder to do. So, it's a SVG, I'm going to click 'Download'. I'm going to create a library. You probably, depending on if you're using libraries already... you might just have one called My Library, I'm going to create one. Create a library called-- this one's for a company called Maynooth Furniture. And that's one we'll do a lot of work with. I'm going to click 'Return'. Did it download it to it? Not sure, I'm going to click on it again. And close that back up. Now in my CC Libraries panel, if you can't find it... it's under 'Window', 'CC Libraries'. And I want to change it from 'My Library'... to this new one that I've made called 'Maynooth Furniture'. And there's my tag. I can drag it out, and the only problem... with dragging this particular one out, it's ginomous. Whoever made it and put it up to the Adobe Market... you can see, it's the giant tag. So, maybe it might be a little easier... if you right click it over here, and say 'Place Linked'. And you get a little place ?? or you can just drag it out and give it a size. It's way too big to start with. That's an okay size, I'm going to shrink it down, and rotate it around. So it's kind of-- I'm going to drag it over here, rotate it around. It's kind of there. Now what I want to do is, I want to put some text on it. I want to put back text on this. We might have to change the color. There's not an easy way of changing color in InDesign. It's not really a job for InDesign to kind of get in the SVG... and change the colors of it, or the shape. It's really a job for Illustrator. It's easy to do, all you got to do is double click it over here... and it will open up in either Photoshop or Illustrator... whatever it was made in, and this one was made in Illustrator. And the easy thing to do, is you grab the White Arrow... click on any color you want to change... And in here you can use-- I'm going to go to 'Properties'... and I'm going to go to 'Fill', and pick a random color for the moment. Hit 'Save'. You'll notice, in My Libraries here, it's updated. If I jump into InDesign, you'll see, it's updated. Over here, this one hasn’t updated. You go to your 'Links' panel, and do nothing. Just found that it got updated. So you don't have to do anything, don't go to the Links panel. It's a nice easy connection. Now if I make a change in here, save it... it updates in InDesign. So that's the Creative Cloud Market option. There's just so much in here. You'll find loads of icons, I use it quite a bit... for UI Web Design options. So if you're doing kind of more design for digital... some really nice stuff in here as well... and they're free, commercial use. And often, these things are editable. You'll be able to open them up in Photoshop, Illustrator, or InDesign... and be able to kind of change the text, and fonts, and colors. There's lots of good stuff in here. So that's the Assets Market in the Adobe Creative Cloud app. Before we go I'm just going to kind of bring this to the front. Same shortcut as earlier... 'Command Shift', and use the second square bracket ']'... next to the P key, it's kind of the second one across. It will bring it all the way to the front. Or right click, and go 'Arrange', and say 'Bring to front'. I'm just going to rotate him around. Get him to line up here. This is where you can go off to the next video... because I'm just going to put a few returns in, play around with this. And get it so it all kind of fits. I'm going to select all of this, and I want to lower the Leading as well. A nice little shortcut is hold down the 'Option' key on a Mac... or the 'Alt' key on a PC... and use your down arrow. That will make it bigger, I want the opposite of that, use 'up'. Up would decrease the Leading automatically. Or you could do it obviously in your Character, and there it is there. That's your Leading. I've got them nicely together. That looks good to me. Before we go as well, remember, we've got OpenType fonts. This one here, font that I even use... Type tool, this one's called 'Market OT'. Is it in Typekit? It is. Market OT, it's a Typekit font, you can download it as well. And because it's OpenType, click down here. You can say, 'Stylistic Sets', 'Set 8'. Can you see the ends? Change to be a bit more clear. I think I like that... where it's a lot clearer. A little scribbly, but probably a little easier to understand. And we've got a little tag off there. I'll definitely go to the next video now. See you. 11. How to use the Color Theme Tool in Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to use the Color Theme Tool... to steal colors from an image, and then get to reuse it throughout the document. Going from the random green that we picked... to some colors that actually start matching the background. So first up we'll start with the Color Theme tool. Now the Color Theme tool is kind of hidden over here. You might be on your Eye Dropper tool... so just click and hold it down to make sure... you're on this top option here called the Color Theme tool. Now what it does is, you can click anywhere on your page... doesn't really matter where, actually. Click over here. You'll notice that InDesign goes through... and picks five color swatches from your images. And why do we do this? It's so that we can start matching colors. This green in here doesn't really match the colors in the background. Just kind of randomly picked it from Illustrator earlier on. Now what I want to do is, actually pick colors that match this background. Let that lead the color themes for this flyer. You'll notice though that even though I clicked on my image... it actually picked the green from this tag... so it doesn't matter where you click in your page... it grabs all the colors from the entire page. So what I'm going to do is, I'm going to click off... and actually delete this tag, actually I'm going to cut it... so I've got it in my clipboard, so I can paste it back in. Now if I go to that Color Theme tool, and click anywhere... you'll notice that I get colors, but they exclude that green color now. Great! So if I like these four colors what I can do is... I can click on this, add it to my swatches. Here's my Swatch panel down here. Or I can add it to my Creative Cloud library, which is open over here. What you can also do is, see this little triangle here, this little arrow? Click on that, and you can go through and pick versions of that. It's defaulted to 'Colorful', but we can switch to 'Dark', okay, 'Deep'... and 'Muted', they all look very similar. I'm going to be using the 'Colorful' ones in this option. And what I'm going to do is add them to my swatches over here. You can see, over here it's created... a color group with these colors inside of it. So what I'm going to do is... actually I might add all of these to my library. I'm going to show you what I'm going to do, I'm going to paste that across. So that little option there, adds them to the library. There's the four colors from my Color Theme tool. Next thing I want to do is I want to use it to recolor this tag. So I'm going to... paste my tag back in, remember, I cut it before. So I'm going to paste it back in place, so I need to move it down one. So 'Command [' on a Mac... or 'Control [' just to send it backwards. I'm going to double click it over here in my library. It's going to open up Illustrator. Here it is, in Illustrator, and because I'm using my libraries... the Color Swatch has come along, which is really handy. So I'm going to select it, go over here, and pick one of these. Probably this one for my tag, hit 'Save'. Close it down, back into InDesign. Give it a second, it updates there, and eventually will update over here. Next thing I can do with the Color Theme tool... I can actually just use it like an Eye Dropper. I can click on this color... and actually say, I want you to be that orange color. Click on the text. Click on that background bit there, I can say, I want that to be there. I want you to be that color. You can kind of move your way around the document. Now we only have a couple of squares to color. So that's going to be it for me. 12. Using Colour Modes In Adobe InDesign CC : Hey there, in this video we're going to look at Color Modes in InDesign. What are Color Modes? Basically it's how these colors interact with the background colors. So this black here isn't just transparent. It's doing something a little bit nicer with the background. You can see, this orange box here... or this orange circle has a nice kind of interaction... with the background as well. These are called Color Modes. Let's go and look at how to make those now. Color Modes are kind of an advanced thing. Mostly done in Photoshop, but you can do it here in InDesign... and I'll show you what they do. Let's grab the Ellipse tool. I'm going to click, hold, and drag out a big Ellipse. If you hold 'Shift' while you're dragging it... it makes a perfect circle. If you hold down the 'Option' key on a Mac, as well... so 'Shift Option', or if you're on a PC, it's 'Shift Alt'. You can drag from the center, that can be kind of handy. I'm going to drag this up here, and I'm going to put it-- I'm just making kind of a background thing. I'm going to send it all the way to the back. And then move it in so it's just above my image there. Now I'm going to pick one of the colors, I'll pick this orange here. And Color Modes are in 'fx'. I want to go to 'Transparency', that's the one I use the most. You can go to 'Object', 'Effects'... a long way, and go to 'Transparency', it doesn't matter. You get to the same place, and what we're looking for... is this one here called 'Blending Modes'. 'Normal' is what it is by default. We'll just go look at some of the other options in here. 'Multiply' often gives us kind of the thing we're looking for. And that's what I'm looking for... just some sort of connection with the background... because if you just go to 'Normal', and lower the opacity... it's kind of like washed out kind of color. Whereas if you use one of these Blending Modes... you can get some more interesting connections with that background color. Now, 'Multiply' is not the only one. Go through the range and see what you might want to do. You can see, there's some interesting effects. I'm just doing it because I want a different effect. And we got a 'Hard Light', let's go crazy. So that is Blending Modes. We'll use it quite a bit in this course. The other thing I want to do is... this thing here, maybe this image is just a bit too bright. So I'm going to grab the Rectangle tool, and I'm going to use another Color Mode. The one I use the most is 'Multiply'... so I'm going to put a big rectangle over the top of this. I'm going to fill it with Black through the top here, click on 'Black'. And I'm going to send it to the back again, bring it forward one. So it's just above my image... and I'm going to go back to that Transparency mode. We're going to use 'Multiply'. I'm going to lower the Opacity down a little bit. So we get this kind of like, nice, I don't know... darkening the background, that's all I'm doing. That's it for Color Modes, let's look at the next color trick. 13. Importing Colors & Setting Default Colors in Adobe InDesign CC : Hey there, in this video we're going to do a couple of things. We are going to import existing colors from other documents. We're also going to bring in brand colors from other brand companies... and put them all together in our Swatches panel as groups. We'll also change the default colors forever... so that whenever you make a new document, you'll have colors ready to go. Also, show you how to clean them up at the end as well. All right, let's get started with that. So next color trick is going to be... let's say that we got a document, this document here. We need to bring in the Maynooth Furniture brand colors. We don't have them in here. We can start creating them by having this little new color swatch here. Double clicking this, and typing it in... if we know the CMYK colors. That's fine... but let's say we already have done that work in another document... you just want to pull it in. It's easy to do. So in your Swatches panel, it's under 'Window', 'Color', you'll find 'Swatches'. Go to the little hamburger menu here, click on that, and go to 'Load Swatches'. Now there is a fancy way of exporting specifically just swatches. It's called an ASE file. It's an Adobe Swatch Exchange file... but nobody does that. There's an easier way to do it at least. You can actually point it in InDesign file, that has them. So this is just an old article that we've made. I know it already has the brand colors I need in there. I just need to steal them from it. So all you do is click on the 'indd' file, click 'Open'. You'll see there, it looked in it, and it found all of these colors. You have purple, pink, green, and yellow. So that is an easy way to just steal colors and pull them through. Now the only trouble with this, is if I open up a new document... and go to 'Document, I click 'OK', 'Create'. You can see, it's gone back to my defaults. So there isn't the Maynooth Furniture colors in there anymore. So the way to get that in there for good... let's say that you're working for Maynooth Furniture... and you just want them in there permanently. So what you can do is, like lots of things in InDesign... change the default, just have nothing open. Back to the screen, go from 'Start' to 'Essentials'... to kind of open it back to life. And in my Swatches panel here, do the exact same thing, just go 'Load Swatches'. Pick the InDesign file, click 'OK'. You can see, there they are. What happens now is, if I go to 'File', 'New', and open up any old document... you'll notice that there they all are, ready to be used. Quick, simple, easy, awesome. Another little thing we can do is... I'm going to change the defaults. Let's say that-- I'm going to close this all down. Let's say that I am a freelancer... which I am, I do lots of work with different clients. Maynooth Furniture's maybe just one of my clients, I've got lots of them. So what I'd like to do, is I'd actually like to... put them in a bit of group, and bring in lots of other ones. So, you can put them in color groups. So I'm going to click all of these... click the first one, hold 'Shift', grab the last one. And you see down the bottom here... this little folder, they call them Color Groups. Look like a folder, act like a folder. Now I can double click this, and say you are 'Maynooth Furniture'. Twirl it up, and I've got those colors ready to go... whenever I start a new document. Let's bring in some other clients. So let's go to the Flyout menu, let's 'Load Swatches'... and let's have a look at brand colors for FedX. Here they all are, I'll grab you guys. Put them in a color group, and we've got FedX as well. I want you to do the last one by yourself, there's another one there for Google. So go through and put them into a group, and I'll see you here in a second. And we're back, and there's Google loaded. There's one condition to kind of consider when you're working with this... is that if I-- you see, I've got Maynooth, FedX, and Google in there. If I go to my old document I was just working on... this one here... because this was created before I was working through all of those projects... you can see in here, they don't have the default. So it doesn't update them through every document... it's every new document you work on. So there are some drawbacks. It's not going to kind of throw it into every existing document. Just on every single new document. So handy, know it's as handy as it could be. A way to get around this is just to make a document. So if I make a document here... so this document, untitled, it's got all of these in here. And I can just save this on to my server somewhere, for sharing it... or I'm just going to put mine on my 'Desktop'... in 'InDesign Advanced Coursework'. I'm going to call this one... 'Dan's Brand Colors'. Close it down, and he doesn't do anything other than... he has those guys, we can do this exact same thing. Back in my flyer here, I can say, actually, go to here, 'Load Swatches'... and let's find 'Desktop', you, 'Dan's Brand Colors'. I'm just using him just to bring through all my colors. That's his only job page in the world, blank page, but he has these swatches. So you're sick of swatches? Not finished yet, I got a little bit more to go. I want to show you some other cool stuff. So I'm going to close this down, and save it. With nothing else open, there's a couple of things we can do. Is that, these guys... these guys are the ugliest color mixes ever. They're just like-- the green, you'll never use, the red, that's not quite nice. 100% yellow. These colors here, you don't like them, and you never use them. I'm going to use the Magenta. It's kind of the color that I use for warning, and for stuff. But let's say I'm never going to use them, if I delete them from here... this little thrash can, that's deleting them forever. Every time I make a new document, I'll just have these brand colors. I'm not going to now, because as a trainer... I need to have these colors in here whenever I start a class. So you can delete them, and they're gone forever. Can you delete registration? Registration is one of those weird ones, you should never use it. If you're not sure what Registration Black is, it's all the colors. It's 100% black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you're not too sure what that is either, just don't use them, use black. Registration should be in there, but you can't delete these guys in brackets. One last thing I'd like you to do, it's not the last thing... but it's just another thing, let's have a look at that file we're working on. Is that, sometimes you get to the end of the job, and you're like... "Man, it's just tough in here." There might be lots of different unnamed colors... and it's just really hard to work on. What you can do is, there's a nice option in here, so have nothing selected... Black Arrow, just click in the background, nothing selected. Go into here, and there's an option here saying 'Select All Unused'. This is really nice, so 'Select All Unused'. It goes through everything in the document that hasn't been used... and you can just bin it... and you're like, "Ugh." Then you realize what the hang is Cyan. That got selected. Actually I'm not sure, I can go to Separations panel... which we'll look at in a little bit. It's gone through and ripped out everything we don't need. And I have no idea where that Cyan swatch is. 14. Finding great colours using Adobe Color for use in Adobe InDesign CC : So the next color treat we'll look at is this one here... which is color.adobe.com You might have used it before. If you haven't, you'll know that 'Create' creates. Interesting. I like 'Explore'. And it just allows me to look at colors... just nice mixes of colors... nice five color swatches for a project. I definitely have the habit of using... the exact same colors for every single project. So this is a way of me starting a new job, starting on a new client... and going, "Actually, I'm going to do something different." At the top here, you can play around with 'Most Popular' this month, or 'All Time'. And you can decide, "Oh man, I'm liking this one." And you can either download it, there is an asc file, and load it... using the same method we just used to load Google and Fedex. Or you can just-- this one's easy. As long as you're logged in, you can see my smiley face there. I'm logged into color.adobe.com And I can click on 'Save', and it will say-- actually I want to load this into Maynooth Furniture. Hit 'Save', and hopefully, in a second... it will appear in Maynooth Furniture. Let's have a little look, there he is there. And I can start using it. That is color.adobe.com I am going to delete this, because I don't actually want it. Good bye. 15. Appearance Of Black & Proofing Colours : Hey there, in this video we're going to look at Prepressing. Looking at why colors look like this in InDesign... but look like this when they print. Where did my colors go? I'll toggle it back and forth, so you can check them out. Good, bad... Let's go and check that out now in InDesign. So what's happening, it's basically just the difference... between how your computer screen or your laptop screen shows you colors. It uses something called RGB. And your printer uses a different set of colors. It uses CMYK. Unfortunately CMYK can't reach the same kind of richness as RGB. The big difference is that your screen has electricity running through all of that. It has like lightning forced out of it with electronics. So it can achieve some really kind of bright colors, and rich blacks... but CMYK, which is your printer that sits next to you on your desktop... or you send it off to a commercial printer, they use the same set of colors... it doesn't get to use any electricity. Gets to use just plain old white paper, so there's not the same colors in there. So there's nothing really you can do about it. What you can do is you can prepare yourself to proof it before it goes out. To do it, it's very easy, you go to 'View'... and just turn on 'Proof Colors'. And watch... just kind of washes out. Some colors are affected more than others. You saw at the beginning there in the intro, I toggled it back and forth... and you saw, it was really obvious when we toggled it... but often, like this thing here, it will print just fine. I wouldn't be too worried about any sort of big changes... but it's handy to check if there are big changes... because some documents do have it. So I'm going to open up a file, you can do it too. Go 'File', 'Open', 'Exercise Files, and '01 Spring'. Go to the one that says 'Proofing Colors', open that up. So in here, I've got some colors that I know do badly. We're going to check out how badly they are, prepare yourselves. Let's go to 'View'. So go to 'Proof Colors', hold on. Unfortunately this is the way CMYK's going to display. It's not exactly the way your screen is. It's going to try and just replicate it as good as it can... but on, off. All of these colors have a really rich color. Depth, you've got to be prepared for losing when it goes out to CMYK. There's kind of some things you can do to get around it... using something called Pantone colors... but we're getting into higher costs, and some trickier setup... but that's something to look into... potentially if you want to kind of keep a really strong, rich brand color. And another thing you can do is, we're just using... under 'View', we're using the default. So Proof Colors turns this setup on and off. We're using just the generic document's CMYK. What you can do is, your printer can send you settings... for their specific printer. They might be using some sort of Heidelberg 71243B... some sort of set up file they can send it to. What you can do is go to 'Custom', and you can load it into there. And when you pick it, go into 'Custom', pick the settings that they've sent you... and when you turn 'Proof Colors' on... it's going to match their machine a little bit better. We talked about CMYK as being four colors... but some printers use more than four colors. And you can use six, eight, and ten colors to get some closer representation of RGB. So maybe we can chart it in... say I can have the proof set ups that I could use for InDesign... till we really kind of match it. One thing before we go, we'll just talk about Rich Blacks real quick. So what happens in InDesign is that-- I'm going to grab this guy here, and switch him to black. So that's what black looks like. If I switch it to 'Proof Setup'... you're going to notice that-- we all know that when we draw something black... and we try and print it, it does this. It goes just a little bit gray and washed out. A way to get around that is to create what's called Rich Black. Now Rich Black is just 100% Cyan. You add a few other colors just to kind of back it up. So imagine grabbing... you've got four colors lying in front of you and you paint them... you've got 1/10 of Cyan, which is this fellow... 1/10 of magenta, 1/10 of yellow, and 1/10 of black. So those are the colors that a printer uses... but what you can do is you can actually... mix a little bit of these together with the black... and it still looks black, but gives... that kind of a rich feeling, it's called Rich Black. Now there's no absolute 100% Rich Black formula. Some people-- let's say I'm going to mix a Rich Black. So I'm going to create a new swatch. I'm going to double click it. I'm going to call this one, instead of black, copy... I'm going to call this one Rich Black. Some people just add a little bit of Cyan. 20% Cyan, and if I click 'OK', you'll notice it got a bit darker there. Let's turn the preview on and off. Can you see, it's just a-- might be hard to see on the video, but it's just a little bit darker. Some people just use that as the Rich Black. I prefer-- I guess the big thing is there's no... like 100% complete definition of what it should be. I like to use 20, 20, 20. And that gives me, bit more ink on the page... but also gives me a bit more of a Rich Black. You don't want to go too high. You don't want to put it at 100, 100, 100, 100. Why? Because then the inks all go on top of each other. They start bleeding around the edges and getting bigger... plus, often the pages start sticking together. Not sure if you've ever done it... you've printed a couple of photographs back to back... or right after each other, and they start sticking... because that has too strong a black mix. The best thing is to ask your printer. Another thing you can do with Rich Black is, say you want a bit more of, kind of-- I'm going to go to 60, with the yellow. That will give kind of a warmer black. And if you do the opposite, and go with... say 60 in here, you'll get a midnight kind of a black. So talk to your printer about what you're trying to do. The other thing to consider for Rich Black... it should never be done with small type. So if I grab my Type tool, and draw out small Type... and I decide that instead of black, I'm going to use Rich Black. Select it all, Rich Black. The only trouble with this is that when it prints... it's so small and so delicate that-- it's actually running through a printer. Imagine, with the paper running through... the ink goes on, so the black goes on, nice and sharp. Then they put some Cyan on it, and they try to line it up... and it lines up pretty good. And they put it along the top, so it gets a bit darker... and they try again with the yellow, and then the magenta. If there's any small movement in the printers... especially the big commercial ones... they vibrate all over the place. Your Type's going to look a bit blurry, so don't use Rich Black ever for Type. Just deal with solid black. Click on 'T', and click on 'Solid Black'. So Rich Black is bad for type... but if your Type's getting large, and it's kind of Slab Serif... a bit chunky type... then you can, kind of above, like 18, you'll probably handle a Rich Black... but talk to your printer, they might just go... "No way, our printer wiggles around too much for that." But big boxes like this, great. Big chunky bits of Type, you might be using for kind of like Hero Text... Definitely, icons, that will work too... but small type, no good for Rich Blacks. And basically that's the reason everyone tells you not to use this registration. I wish you could delete it, you can't... because what that does is, it goes... can you see, it goes really black, that's awesome... but if I use Registration Black, it will stick together. It will print, especially the Type. We talked about it a second ago... if I do that for registration, it's really going to be bad. It's going to be so much ink on the page, these little Type's going to bleed. So don't use Rich Black, you know, we can't delete it. Just needs to stay there. So, before we finish, go 'View', turn 'Proof Colors' back on... and if you are just working digitally... and you're going out by email, or website... or publish online, or epub, it doesn't matter. You're going to be printing in RGB, and not actually printing it all. You're just going to be saving it as a PDF, so don't sweat that stuff... but definitely give it a check before you send it to the printer... to see if there's any kind of horrible changes... like we have in front of us here with those color bars. All right, I hope you learnt something there. Let's get on to the next video. 16. Draw lot of shapes at once InDesign Gridify Live Distribute : Hi there, in this video we're going to do cool things with Gridify... where we drag out as one image... no, no, it's a couple of images, all at once, all the same size. Plus things like this, where I draw a line, and I grab it... and I drag it down, and I make loads of versions in between. I'm not sure what I'm doing there... but let's learn how to do that... plus a few other cool little tricks here in InDesign. So first thing is, create a blank document. I've got no margins, I've got US Letter, Half Letter. And I've got a Landscape, any shape you like. We're going to make it-- I've saved it as 'Roar Cycles Catalog'. So use the Gridify tool, you pick any shape. So, rectangle, ellipse, or polygon, anything you want. Start dragging out with your mouse. Keep your mouse held down, so don't let go like that. Hold it down, and before you let go, use your up arrow, then the right arrow. And it will just keep adding circles. Going back the other way, so left and down to get rid of them. Let's have a little practice with how many we need. You can drag out loads of them, then just keep dragging out with your mouse. Hold 'Shift' if you want them to be perfect circles. And let go when you're ready. You'll have lots of little circles, or squares, or stars. I'm going to delete those, I'm going to grab the Rectangle tool, and do something. So I'm going to drag it out, then tap right twice, and up once. So I've got kind of a group of six. Now, see these spaces in between them, you can adjust as well. All you need to do is hold down, on a Mac, the 'Command' key... or on a PC, the 'Control' key. I'm having a little go at my mouse. I'm also holding down the 'Command' or 'Control' key, and use the up arrow. You'll see, it places these spaces more there in the middle. And down arrow gets rid of them, just keep tapping the down arrow. It's a bit of finger gymnastics, and you're like... "Ah, this is really very easy." Maybe not. It's cool. Gridify is awesome. Left and right does the gaps horizontally. I mean vertically. So you can do a nice kind of grid like. I'm going to delete that, draw out another one. Another thing you can do is, I'm going to make the same kind of cube shapes. I'm going to switch to this one here, the Gap tool. The tool you never use, the fourth tool down. Its job is, and you can see... I can click, and drag, and it starts adjusting... the space in between different boxes. So it's just a really handy way of keeping the exact same measurements... but moving things around. You can also hold down a couple of keys to get some other tricks. I'll hold down the 'Shift' key, and it will just move one of these. Another key is, hold down the 'Alt' key on a PC, or 'Option' key on a Mac. You can see, it kind of changes it to moving a huge kind of connecting chunk. Another shortcut is, hold down the 'Command' key on a Mac... or 'Control' key on a PC. You can see, I can close them up, or open them up. So couple of little shortcuts. You'll never remember exactly... but smash away at the keys when you got the Gap tool... and it's really easy to kind of eventually find the one you want. It's really good and handy for margins. Say you've got some logos all lined up... you just need to push the margins away a little bit... you can see, I can kind of do that. Holding different keys gives me different effects. They all look at the same effect. I can grab all of these, and just kind of move them up. That is the Gap tool used with the Gridify tool. Another thing you can use with the Gridify tool - I'm going to select all these and delete them. - is we can deal with text boxes, which is handy. Grab the text box, start dragging out... and I drag it all the way across, and use my right arrow... just like with the Rectangle tool, I get boxes... but these guys are linked text boxes. So if I go to 'Type', and go to 'Fill with Placeholder Text', genius. So it's worked with shapes, and it's worked with text. What if we could work with images? And it totally does. And this is probably its best use. I'm not sure why I waited till the end to show you... but go to 'Exercise Files', go to '02'... and go to image 1 to 6. I clicked on the first image here. Hold 'Shift', click on the sixth one, and it selects them all. So with them all selected-- A little side note before we do the main event trick... is that, can you see, 6 is in the brackets there. If I use my arrow keys to tap along, just use your right arrow. It will toggle through the images. If I click on right-- for some reason, mine doesn't update, it used to, there it goes, it updates. It's a bit weird. Hit down. Yours will. Mine used to work, mine's stopped working. So just use your left and right arrows. You can just decide on which image to drop in first. That's why that's quite useful. So if yours is working, mine is not... here it is, it switches out. Got to give my mouse a wiggle for no reason. So that's one thing. What I'd like to do is drag out, and I click and drag out... but before I let go, we’re going to do our Gridify tool. Exactly like we did before. This one's got a fixed height and width... because that's where the images came from... but if I use the right arrow, you can see, I can do my kind of like, up... up one, across two to get my images here. I can hold down 'Command', and use up and down... to change the spacing between them if I wanted to... but that's going to work for me. I'm going to do something that looks like that. That is a super quick and easy way just to dump them all in the page. They're all the same size, which is great. Rather than trying to import them all... and scale them all down to yellow, or change them all separately. One thing I might do though is... they kind of fit in there, but they've got... this kind of white area around the outside. With them all selected, right click any of them. If you're on a Mac, hold down 'Control', and click any of them... if you don't want to right click, and go to 'Fitting'... this is the one we want, 'Fit Frame to Content'. So that shortcut there, not a sexy shortcut... but it's one of the ones that I use quite often. Watch this, when I hit it, it just wraps the frame around the box. So that's just a really quick way I guess to make them snap to the edges. That particular one, just as a side note, works for text boxes as well. So say you're drawing something, and this is my title. I find all this area around here I don't need. That exact same shortcut, 'Command-Option-C'... will just wrap the text box around that, which is handy. And if you're on a PC, that's 'Control-Alt-C'. Or just, right click, go to 'Fitting'... and 'Fit Frame to Content' will work there. Awesome! Next part of that kind of whole shifting things around... Gap tool, Gridify thing is... let's go to Page 2, and there's something called 'Live Distribute'. So, let's draw out a rectangle, I'm going to use Gridify... to make it into say, this many of them. And what I'd like to do is... let's say I want to kind of adjust the spacing between them all. I got a couple of options, I could kind of drag them out... then drag you out to be the same distance... and Smart Guides will try to automatically, you see... goes, "Ah, magic, you mean these sizes?" See the little green arrows match the sizes up... but then you got to stretch the top ones out... and you want to kind of disperse them perfectly. So, with them all selected-- the shortcuts are a little hard to remember, it's a weird shortcut. So you start dragging... and that's not what I want. I just want big gaps to get that go, right? So if I start dragging... if I hold down the 'space bar' after I started dragging... so I'm holding, dragging with my mouse, then hold 'space bar'... Cool, huh! So it's my little squares, and I just get to play with the space in between. I'm going to undo. Same with the bottom, remember, drag first, while I'm dragging, holding 'space bar'... it will kind of separate them out. Great for the bottom right as well, so start dragging... and then hold 'space bar'... and you can kind of Live Distribute all of these guys here, hold 'Shift'... and it will kind of lock the height and width. It's just really a nice way of opening up... gaps and-- it could be text boxes, it could be images, anything you like. Live Distribute. If you hold 'space bar' first, then start dragging... you end up moving this around, or going into... like the zoom preview thing... so make sure, drag first, then hit 'space bar'. Another thing we're going to do... in this kind of super fantabulous drawing modes... is I'm going to-- actually I don't want these big boxes... I want you guys to be on actually Page 1. So I'm going to go to Page 1 now, here you go, Page 1, zoom in. And we're going to do some lines, grab the Line tool. And I'm going to make sure my Stroke is set to 'black'. And I'm going to have the Fill set to 'none'. So I'm going to have a 2pt Stroke... so it's just going to draw a line like that. So what I'm going to draw is-- I'm going to hold 'Shift' while I'm dragging, gives me a straight line. And another thing I'm going to do is, I'm going to duplicate all of that. So I'm going to grab my Black Arrow, and you may, or may not know this already. If you hold 'Alt' key on a PC, or 'Option' key on a Mac while you're dragging... it will give you a duplicate. If you just drag it, obviously, without that key, just moves it around... but if you hold 'Alt' while you're dragging, gives you another version. This is what brings us into this next cool little trick. Is, if I do that... I'm holding 'Alt' to drag it, but I haven't let go of my mouse yet. So I haven't let go. Use your up arrow, like Gridify. There's one in the middle there. It's all hard to see I guess in this video because it's really faint. They go into these weird line, don't worry about all those lines. I need to kind of like, I'm pressing 'up' loads. And I just get loads to join them too. Let go of the mouse, and there's a really easy way... instead of like, maybe step and repeat... or-- what is it called in here? It's called... it's called 'Step and Repeat', you might have done it in Illustrator. So super handy, super useful. I'm going to draw out a box. Same thing, I'm going to give it a Fill color. An ugly fill color. Hold down 'Alt', drag it across. And before I let go of my mouse, 'up' key, and it joins the two. I can hit the right key as well. And it gives me kind of a like a Gridify thing going on of that object. Don’t use that one so much, but... play around with it, drag it out... holding 'Alt'', or 'Option' on a Mac... and use the up key, and maybe the right key. You'll get lots of multiples of it to fill in the gap. So that's going to be it for our super fantastic drawing techniques. I'm now going to follow on with our little tutorial. It's going to be a bit of a production video. So you can continue watching, or skip to the next one... because we're going to import some images, and build out our Home Page. We want to actually end up with something nice. I'm going to go to 'File', 'Place'... and I'm going to go to '02 Drawing', find 'Cover Image'. Drag this one out from this edge... to this edge. It's a little big, so I'm going to grab my Black Arrow. If you're bored already, you can move on. So I've got this, I want to use my Line tool trick. So I'm going to drag a line that goes-- holding 'Shift', so it's a perfect line. I'm going to fill mine with actually white. It's going to be '2 pts'. I'm going to drag it so it's kind of in the middle of the document. Something like that. Holding 'Alt' down on a PC, 'Option' on a Mac... to drag it down to the bottom. Before I let go of the mouse, I'm going to use my up arrow... because I want this kind of stripy. I want to say, kind of a line, go on. Maybe a bit past there. Great! I'll lower the opacity of all of these guys. I just want this kind of stripy line thing going in the background. Why are we doing it? It's mainly so I have an excuse to use that little line trick. I'm going to bring in a logo. So nothing selected, bring in the 'logo.ai'. I'll drag it out so it will be in the middle here. And on page 2, I want to kind of tidy this up. I'm going to grab my Type tool. This is going to be my 'Bike Catalog'. I never get to spell this right. I'm going to change the color because I want to put this in the background. So I'm going to drag this, I'm going to grab the Eye Dropper tool. So instead of the Color Theme tool which we've used... the Eye Dropper tool just steals colors. You can steal it from images. I'm going to steal it from this kind of color here. So put it around my Stroke. See this little arrow here? He toggles between being the pink on the Stroke, to the pink now... bringing in the Fill, that's what I want. So I want you. And do I want anything else? I'm not sure. Let's do a slashy thing. So I'm going to copy and paste this. I'm totally now just trying to make it look okay. I'm going to rotate it around. Hit the 'W' key. W key is the preview key. Just gets filled with all the background stuff. We've already done that. And I'm going to grab him, bring my Fill to the front. And over here, I'm going to switch it to a slightly darker color. Often it's easier to go to CMYK to switch this around... because you can just drag that case out a little bit. I'm going to select both of them, send them to the back, then hit the 'W' key again. That's what I'm kind of trying to do. That Fill's always got a white Stroke around the outside. It's just a bit small. Yes, it's not attached to any of these. You could be bored. The dog in the background. This is such an amazing video. All right, 'Bike Catalog'. Doing it, just finishing some basics. All right. That's not that good. So that's going to be it for this video. Finally getting to the next one where we're going to... do some cool stuff with Strokes and Arrows, and stuff. Let's go do that one. 17. How to make arrows in Adobe InDesign CC: Hey there, in this video we're going to look at Arrow Heads... and some more advanced Stroke things. It's not super exciting... but we only didn't know how to make arrows... and there's some little tricks you can use to help your work flow. All right, I'm on page 3... and let's look at Arrow Heads first, so I've got the Line tool. I'll drag out a line, I'm going to make it a bit thicker. I'll make sure my Stroke is at black. And I've got a thickness of '5 pt'. Now the Stroke panel might look like this... where it's quite small, you can only change the weight. You can double click this little tab here, and it gets ginormous... and get a lot more options, and this is what we're looking for. So the first one is this 'Start/End'. Basically, this is easy where you get your Arrow Heads. So depending on how you've drawn your line... so Start is where I first started drawing, so I want the opposite way. So I want you to be there, the barbed end one. It's not the one I like. I'm just going to have the-- I just want the triangle. And the start, I might do-- It's like an Austin Powers male symbol thing. One of those. Now one of the things, and the new things in 2018 is that... when you scaled it up... you end up getting kind of... disproportionately sized ends and beginnings. You can see, like that, it's joined and almost completed that. This Stroke is the same around the outside... but now what you can do is, see this Scale, it's kind of a new thing. So I am going to scale this end bit up. You can see here, I can kind of raise it up... and I can make it nice and big there to kind of match everything else there. So that's a new feature. It's not really a feature, but it's something we've all been missing. One of the little tricks I did there was... can you see, I'm making it smaller by clicking it... and it's just going down 1% at a time, slowly. If I hold 'Shift' and click that exact same option... can you see, it does it in multiples of 10. So I find this, just really handy thing for anything. If you want to raise the weight of this... if you want to do it in big chunks, hold 'Shift'. Any sort of option here with a number... if I want to make this go up by 1%... I just click it, but if I hold 'Shift' and click it... it goes up by multiples of 10. It's looking kind of cool there. I think I like it. One of the other things for Strokes that's useful... is I'm going to zoom in on this thing here... like this one, what I want to show you is... it's a little hard to see, maybe I'll change the Stroke to black, so it's easier. Maybe a bit of contrast, there it is. You can see, my line here, it's actually this rectangle I drew... it's actually the center of it, so if I draw a rectangle... when I let go, watch the black line, it straddles it either side. It's a little hard to see, but, can you see? It's actually going left and right of this. That can be a bit of a pain... because you're trying to get things to line up... but they're lining up to the center bit here. So what you can do, with it selected... you've got options over here to align Stroke. By default it's left and right... but here, I can go actually on the inside, or all the way round to the outside... or just straddling this center. Another thing you might look at is the unfortunately named Butt cap. So if I draw a line here, and I make it nice and thick. It's got what's called a Butt cap, which means, it's just... if I grab the line again, can you see, it just gets the end... and then completely butts up at the end of the end point. So that's what these one's here for. You probably won't use this third one, but the second one here, the Round Cap... kind of adds-- it's just a different style of line. And this end one here is kind of a Block Cap. It goes all the way around that side here, and then there's the Butt Cap. One last thing you can do is... if I put an Arrow Head on this one, I'm going to go, you, Arrow Head... can you see, it used the end of the line as the tip of the Arrow Head. That might not be what you need. You might want to go through, and say, see you here. It's using the edge of the line, watch this... it kind of uses the end of the line to start the Arrow Head. So it depends on what you need. Just know that you got a few little options. Getting a bit nerdy, and a bit boring. Let's get on to the next video. I love the next one. It's fun, let's make that flowery thing in the next video. 18. How to draw complex flowers in Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to to look... to make this floral kind of curly, twisty patterned thing. At the end we'll also look at how to change the colors... you can pick different colors to use... to get it to fit with your project. All right, let's go and learn how to do that now in InDesign. To make that kind of pretty flower looking thing... we're going to start with the Polygon tool. So, click and hold down the Rectangle tool... or the Ellipse tool, and find the Polygon tool. First thing we need to do is, if you click once... it will tell you how many sides, and the Star Inset. The Star Inset is, 50% is kind of your traditional shape of star. If I delete that, click once... and then if I change it to say something like 5%... it just gives me kind of like dulled edges. So decide on what kind of shape you want, it doesn't matter. They all have that kind of different feel for this design. I'm going to change out my Fill color, set to a Gradient. So I'm going to drag it out. A cool little trick while you're dragging out... and you want to kind of play around with the star a little bit... add more sides to it. If I use the up and down arrow... by themselves, it does Gridify... which is kind of cool, but not what I want. So while I'm dragging out, if you tap the 'space bar'... tap it once, that's it, nothing happens. Now use your up and down, well, up and right. So right and left does the Star Inset... and the up and down does how many stars you got. So it's totally up to you to see what you want. So just pick a-- it doesn't really matter, they all have different looks. So, how many stars do I want? I practiced with about six, that looked good. What I'm going to also do is hold 'Shift', so that it's a perfect height and width. The other thing to know is your reference point needs to be in the center... so that when it rotates in a second, it rotates from the center around. Next thing is, we need a Gradient... I'm going to use 'No Stroke'; thank you very much. And my Gradient, go to 'Window', 'Color', and go to 'Gradient'. I'm going to pick 'Linear'. Make sure, if it doesn't fill it, like it did here-- it's actually put a Gradient around the Stroke. You can kind of see it there... see it's light on this side, dark on this side. So what I'm going to do is make sure I'm going to turn that back to 'None'. And just make sure that you're identifying your Fill. To do it, can you see over here, either your color... or this panel here, just click on that kind of Fill swatch... just to make sure it's at the front. And in here, I'm going to pick Linear, actually no, I want 'Radial'. And we want the inside color to be a bit darker than the outside. So click on the 'White House'... and pick a color from this color well down the bottom here. But I want it to be like a darkish color, it's up to you. This end over here... mine's picked CMYK, yours has probably gone to the Gray Scale slider. To change it to look like mine... click on the 'Black House', and click in here, and switch to 'CMYK'. Then pick another color. Just make sure it's lighter than that first color. If you get it wrong, you can click on this, toggle them back and forth. Up to you. Next thing I want to do is, I would-- you can do a spiky star, looks quite cool, I'm going to do slightly curved edges. So I'm going to go to 'Object'... with it selected, so I'll make sure, let's grab the Black Arrow... make sure the star is selected, go to 'Object'... then go down to 'Corner Options'. And we can kind of give it... instead of square edges, we can give it rounded ones. You can do some fun stuff with some of these other ones as well. They all have different kind of end result. You can increase them up to make them more bendy, to a point. Close to a certain point if this doesn't get to be more round. It's up to you, I'm going to go with that. Looks good. Keep going, Dan, Okay. The next thing I want to do is make it quite big. How big? Just make it a bit bigger than your page. I'd like to make it really big, but it's a little hard to work on. So we're just going to make it about that sort of size. I'm going to try and see if it can be in the middle. It doesn't have to be. So the next trick is, the kind of rotation, and repeating bit. So to do it, we need to find... over here, on our Tool bar here, underneath the scissors... click and hold down, yours might be set to the Rotation tool... or the Free Transform tool, pick these guys. So we're going to do Rotate first, this has to go first, rotate. Then, once you've picked it, double click it. What it does is, it allows you to type in the Rotation we're going to use. I'm going to use 15°. Instead of clicking on OK, click on 'Copy'. You'll notice it makes a duplicate of it as it's rotating. Next thing we're going to do is open up the Scale tool, and double click that... and decide on how much smaller we want this. I've just picked 90%... and instead of clicking Copy, we're going to click the word 'OK'. Great! So that's the hard work done. Next thing we want to do is Step & Repeat... and InDesign-- I've got that Star selected still. I've got 'Object'... 'Transform Again', and then there's this one here, 'Transform Sequence Again'. So it's going to transform, not just what I did last time, which is Scale... it's going to do the whole sequence, which is Rotation and Scale. You can see there, it's got a handy shortcut. It's got that shortcut that nobody remembers... that one's the 'Option' key on a Mac... and the 'Command' key, '4'. So 'Option-Command-4'. I'm not sure what it's on a PC, sorry, but just check it, it will be in there. So I'm going to hold it... and just keep on clicking, I'm clicking the mouse... until it gets down to our cool little floral spiral thing. I'm going to grab the Black Arrow, and hit the 'W' key. So I can kind of see without all the blue lines around the outside... but that's an interesting shape. And depending on your settings... everyone's going to look slightly different... they'll be slightly different colors. What I might do is scale this up, so it covers the whole background. And, that is our weird floral pattern. So that felt like the end... and I did, I stopped the video, and then I was like... "Man, I don't like that color." I picked on washed out colors... so I was like, "I'm going to change it"... and I go, "Hey, I will show you one nice little change to colors." We could go back to the beginning, and change the Gradient... but there's a nice trick we can do, we can grab the Rectangle tool. I'm going to have a Fill of None, actually a Stroke of 'None'... and a Fill of whatever color you want to change it to. I've got our colors from Maynooth Furniture, that we're using. You can just mix your own color, I'm going to use the Green. And I'm going to drag a box that covers the whole thing. It's kind of harking back to some of the stuff we did before, remember Color Modes? So this color on top is set to Normal. We can change it by going to 'Effects', and 'Transparency'. And what I'd like to do is go from Normal, and play around with these. Multiply, not very exciting. I had a little play around with this. And in this case, Color Burn works, not exactly how I want. Color Burn, watch this, I wanted to change it to Green... but Color Burn does a really nice thing, makes it a lot more rich. Can you see, with that off, with this kind of green switched to Color Burn... kind of gives it a really kind of strength to it. But this is not exactly what I wanted, I wanted to change the color... so I'm going to go back to 'Transparency'... and instead of Color Burn, 'Hue', in this case works. So you might have to play around with the top color to decide which you want. Watch this. With him selected, I can go through now and decide... actually I want to see what it looks like in pink. And I want to see what it looks like in orange, and green, and all sorts of stuff. Transparency Mode set to Hue will give you... the option to go off and adjust the color. Maybe get it close to a brand color that you might need to match. All right, now I'm actually finished with this video. Bye now. 19. How text boxes can auto expand in Adobe InDesign CC with Auto size : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at Auto Expanding text boxes... we've all had this problem, where we've got a title, we've duplicated it... we're going to put in another one... but it is just 'Chairs & Benches'. It doesn't fit, and you grab this, and drag that out... or link it to another fixed box. Drama. Imagine though, you could transform this box... so when I paste into it... look at it, magically gets bigger, and smaller. It's called the Auto Size for text frames. Let's go and learn how to do that now in InDesign. First up we're going to be starting... a new project that we're going to be working on. Let's go to 'New Document', and then switch from 'Print' to 'Web'... because this is going to end up being an interactive document. It's going to have animations... and it's going to go out to some cool places for interactivity. Basically what that changes is the dimensions. We're going to be working in pixels instead of inches or centimeters. Size wise, we're going to make ours kind of full HD. So a kind of a normal, typical presentation... from a data projector type size. So it would be really common to have neither of these sizes... it's 1920x1080. That will be a really common, just kind of like screen size. We're going to use Landscape. Pages wise, we'll leave it at '1' at the moment. 'Columns', I want to use 4 in this case... and the 'Gutter, I want to get right up to something big, like 55. The 'Margins', we get it quite big as well, 150 pixels all the way around. We don't use 'Bleed and Slug'. Let's hit 'Create'. Let's save it, and we'll stick it on to our desktop... in the folder we've created, 'InDesign Advanced Coursework'. This one's going to be called 'Interactive Magazine'. So first thing I want to do for our text boxes is... on page 1 I'm going to drag a text box that goes across two columns. And this one's going to be for Tables. I'm going to make it a lot bigger, using my shortcut, 'Command-Shift->'. Made it quite big, and I'm using Roboto Lite. And as a demonstration for this kind of auto text sizing... I'm going to make that text box kind of fit... relatively proportionately to the word 'Tables'. I'm going to duplicate this page... and show you a little shortcut while we're doing it. I can make a new page, and just copy and paste it across... but if I grab this page, and drag it down to this little new page icon... it makes a duplicate of it, exactly the same... so page 1 and page 2 look the same. But in here, I want to put in a longer title. So this one's going to be 'Chairs & Benches'. The trouble with it is that it didn't fill out... and that's always a problem in InDesign, right? It's that you're forever kind of dragging these out... and making them bigger, and making them smaller. Imagine if there was a way to automatically size them. You can totally do that. Now with your Black Arrow, have your text box selected. Go up to 'Object', and go to one called 'Text Frame Options'. And in here, there's this third option here called 'Auto-Size'. By default it is off, what we're going to do is do it by width only... and we're going to push it from the left hand side. You kind of see those arrows... it's going to push left rather than expand both sides. I'm using my hands to describe this, you can't see my hands. We're going to go from the left, and push right. Let's click 'OK', and what that just means now is that when I start typing... it gets bigger along with it. It's just a really handy trick... to turn on for especially titles like this, where you don't want them... you know, you don't have different sizes... so I'm going to duplicate it again to our third option. And it's going to get smaller as well as wider. This one here is 'Shelves'. And we'll do one more, and this one's going to be... 'Bedside Tables'. So Auto Text Frames work, both width and height. So if you've got a text box here, and you want it to get bigger and smaller... depending on the text, if I go 'Type', and I go to 'Fill with Placeholder Text'... and I make it smaller. I want to make another box, and it just needs to be smaller. It's over set, and all you have to do is, the exact same path. 'Text Frame Options', 'Auto-Size', and do 'Height Only'. I never use height and width, it does some weird stuff. I'm going to push from the top... and I'm going to click 'OK'... and you'll see, as I add more text, I'm going to copy and paste that. Gets bigger and smaller, deleting it gets smaller. Awesome! Let's get on to the next video. Before we do that actually, there you go, don't need you. All right, now the next video. 20. Placeholder text alternatives in Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... switching out our generic Lorem Ipsum Placeholder text... for something a little bit more useful for other languages, like this. And some not very useful Placeholder text, like this Cat Ipsum. Let's go make Cat Ipsum right now. So, Placeholder text alternatives. We're going to grab the Type tool, and draw a box on our page. I'm going to keep it 2 columns there. Zoom in a little bit. I'm going to fill it with Placeholder text. Under 'Type', 'Fill with Placeholder Text'. Remember, by default, this fills it with... Roman letters, it's kind of Latin... it's all mixed up, doesn't make sense, it's just good there as place holder. But let's say we're working with a client with a different language. We can-- so I've undone that. I'm going to go to 'Type', and if I hold down 'Command' key on a Mac... or the 'Control' key on a PC before clicking this button here... you get this kind of little option to pick different kinds of language. It's not so much language, it's more the alphabet to be used. So if you need to be using the Cyrillic alphabet, click 'OK'. You can see there, it's a place holder text, same sort of thing... mixed up, unusable, unreadable... but it's a good place holder text for that language. And you'll see there, there's Japanese, and Chinese, and Arabic. There's a bunch of different ones in there, so just hold down the 'Command' key. So that's some sort of practical use... but the next thing I'm going to show you is totally impractical. It's kind of fun, I guess, it depends. We're going to replace our Lorem Ipsum with something else. Now in terms of Lipsum, there is lots of different options. I've jumped to Cat Ipsum... but you will find Hip Hop Ipsum, Star Wars Ipsum. Whatever you want, it's going to be mixed up, just place holder text. This one here, I'm going to decide on... I just want 300 paragraphs, that sounds good. Click 'Make Muffins', it should be useful. I've got some place holder text now... and it's kind of just mixed up gibberish. You can find all sorts of other alternatives. I'm going to copy it... and to make this work as your default... I'm going to open up 'Text Edit' on my Mac. So Text Edit on a Mac, or Notepad on a PC. You'll have to dig through the applications folder to find them. First thing you need to do is placing the text. Then on Notepad you just save this document as Placeholder.txt On a Mac there's one more step. You need to go to 'Format', and go to 'Make Plain Text'. It's just kind of removes all the formating. Then you save it, and just make sure it's called Placeholder.txt That's the rules, and it has to be holder, not hold. So it has to be called this. Save it, and where do you save it? I'm just going to save mine to my work folder for the moment. And where does it go? This needs to go in the InDesign application folder. So on a Mac, it's pretty easy to find. If you've got it down here in your doc, you can right click it... and go up to 'Options', and there's one that says... "Show me InDesign in a folder, please," and they'll find this out. In here it is, that's the application folder for InDesign. This is all the guts of the program. If you just move it into there... so, Placeholder text, dump it in there, and that's all you need to do. I'll leave that in your exercise files, so you don't have to make it. If you do want to have just a play with it, and see if it works. So I've put it in there, Placeholder.txt, now if I go to InDesign... open it up, and if I go to 'Type'... 'Fill with Placeholder Text', nothing happens. I don't have to hold anything down, you can see, I have Cat Ipsum. And that's, I know is a little ridiculous... in terms of, I don't know, I like that style of stuff. So you might be working with a client that-- you might find a practical use for that, where you've got some... like Placeholder text that is really useful for you and your client... and you can go off and find some stuff. As long as you call that file Placeholder.txt... it will just become the default for InDesign. If you want to get rid of that... all you need to do is go into here, and just delete it... and InDesign will go back to the default. Before we finish this one up... I want to create a Body Copy Paragraph style. So I'm going to select all of the text. I use five clicks. So, one, two, gives you the word, one, two, three, gives you the line... one, two, three, four, gives you the paragraph. And if you do it five times, you get everything... including the overset text. I'm not sure if that's a useful shortcut, clicking five times. It's a bit of-- I use it loads, but you can just use 'Edit', 'Select All'... or 'Control A' on a PC, or 'Command A' on a Mac. With it all selected, because this is going to be an interactive document... we're going to break our rules in terms of font sizes. I'm going to go up to something like 24... and under 'Paragraph' I'm going to have some space after, I'm going to have 19. Just kind of works for my interactive document that we're making. And I'm going to select it all. Five clicks... and I'm going to create a Paragraph style, so under 'Window'... under 'Styles', go to 'Paragraph Styles'... and in here I'm going to create a new option. Double click 'Paragraph Style 1'... and this one is going to be called 'MF Interactive Body Copy'. Let's click 'OK'. I'm now just going to drag this panel up, out of the way here. Great! So that's going to be it for this video. We learned how to change... the Lorem Ipsum Placeholder text to a different alphabet. We also learned useless stuff on how to change it to Cat Ipsum. All right, let's get on to the next video... where we do some more practical InDesign amazingness. All right, see you there. 21. How To Add Paragraph Borders & Shading In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to put lines around paragraphs... and put ugly corner effects on it as well, just because. Now why is it great? It's because when I hit 'Paste', look, it comes along... it gets bigger and smaller, and if I select this one... I've turned it into a Paragraph Style... so I get to reuse it over and over again, gets better. There's a few other options here, we do lines around the outside... we also do some shading, another naff corner that I've added. Page 3, we get to do this as well. You can see, if I add more... this little side thing happens. It's just an adjustment of that shading... and the last bit of shading awesomeness. Let's have a little look, runs off the page. So let's go and look now how to make... these borders and shading in Adobe InDesign. So to add our borders around the outside... we are going to select a Paragraph... actually just have your cursor flashing anywhere in the first paragraph. Mine's quite a big first paragraph. Not sure why I like that. Because it's Lorem Ipsum, a Placeholder text... I can just kind of break it there. So I'm going to use just this first chunk here. Cursor flashing anywhere inside of it... and along the top here, doesn't matter whether you're on Character or Paragraph... all the way on this side is the Hamburger menu, click on that one. And hiding in here is one called 'Paragraph Borders and Shading'. This is the one that's going to add our magic. Let's make sure our preview's on. And let's turn border on, we'll start with borders. It's pretty easy, border around the outside... You're going to have to add some Padding around this, so watch this. So you're going to be using, down here, the Offset. So if I increase the offset, because they're all linked... they're going to go out all different directions. So, make it bigger. I'm going to have to play around with Space After. I can't control that now, but that's kind of what I want to do. And you can unlink these, and play around... like say the right hand side, maybe. And a little bit. So that controls how far away from the paragraph it is. I'm going to pick a color from my list, I'm going to use 'MF Pink'. And I'm going to play around with one of these borders. Up to you, I'm going to use the bottom right... so I'm going to unlink them... because I just want the bottom right. You can kind of see that icon there, indicates bottom right. I might have to play around with them. I'm going to use 'Fancy'. Nothing really happens, we're going to increase the Pixel number. You can see, on my Option over here, it's getting just a little bit bigger. So, that is it, that's lines around the outside, using borders. Let's finish up this Paragraph Style... and look at some of the other options. I'm going to click 'OK'. Now you can see, the space here, it needs to be changed. So there's a couple of things we're going to do for First Paragraph. I'm going to select it all, then I'm going to say... actually I'd like my character color... to be the MF Pink as well. And I want the Space After to be more, so I'm going to go to my Character. I'm going to go Paragraph actually... and I'm going to increase this up. Can you see, it's just pushing that bottom paragraph away. So I'm going to set this as the Paragraph Style. So I'm going to go to 'New Style'. I'm going to double click 'Paragraph Style 1'. This one is going to be called... 'MF First Paragraph', I might just call it 'First Para'. Now, when you are working with Paragraph Styles... there's this thing called 'Based On'. So what it's doing is it's using the Paragraph Style... that have already had it as it's kind of base... and on top of that it's going to add some stuff. Basically what it's going to do is... add the pink, the border around the outside, and the space after... but it's relying on the font from MF Interactive Body Copy. Now that happens by default, and that often gets people lost... when they later on delete one Paragraph Style... and that affects other ones. So when you know what you're doing, it's great. It's kind of you're basing it on top of another one, that can get confusing. Normally, unless you're working on a really big document... I would just have, based on no Paragraph Style. So it's just a stand-alone, does everything itself... and includes the font, includes the color. Don't have to worry when I delete-- Paragraph Style, is it connected to another Paragraph Style... what's going to happen, what are the consequences? So I just kind of leave every time, based on no Paragraph Style. Let's click 'OK'. Now because it's part of the Paragraph Style... let's say, this paragraph here... the cursor flashing inside, let's just test it... 'My First Paragraph', you can see, does the same thing. Adds a line around the outside. So I'm going to undo that. Let's look at doing one of the other options. So I'm going to go up to page 2, zoom out... I'm going to hit 'W' key so I'm not in preview. Grab the Type tool, drag out a Text box. Fill it with Placeholder text. Select it all. And because I've got my Interactive Body Copy... it should be able to easily apply it. Great! So cursor flashing in this first paragraph... and let's look at Shading. So the border is obviously the line around the outside. So cursor flashing in the first paragraph, up to our Stripy Line... I've got my Type tool selected. And in here, I'm going to go to 'Paragraph Borders and Shading'. And it's Shading in this case that I'm going to use. What I'll do is turn Shading 'on', make sure the preview is on. By default it's at 20% black, I'm going to switch that out for 'MF Pink' at '100%'. Again, I'm going to play around with the Offsets... until I get something I like. I'm going to play around with that bottom corner again, unlink it. I'll use 'Rounded' corner down the bottom. Let's move it out of the way so we can see. I'm going to increase this up so it's kind of like, I don't know. It's a popular thing to do. Great! Let's click 'OK'... and we'll make a Paragraph Style out of this one. Actually we'll just change the font color. Awesome! So that's how to do the shading of a paragraph. I might also just, to make it look a little nicer, just do my Space After. Just to push that first paragraph afterwards, down a bit. Now another thing people do is, there's another kind of use. If I go to page 3, let's have another little go at doing shading. So on page 3, I'm going to grab my Type tool. I'm going to grab the Type box, fill it with Placeholder text. Select it all, and I've enclosed my Paragraph Styles. I'm going to open them up. And, Body Copy. It's kind of an ugly first paragraph there, so I'm going to make my own. So with my cursor flashing in the first paragraph... we're going to do one that just kind of lines up on the side here. So what we'll do is we'll go to-- make sure you're in your Type tool... you've clicked in your first paragraph... go to the Hamburger menu. And we're going to go to 'Paragraph Borders & Shading'. And what we'll do is, we'll do 'Shading', turn it on. We're going to use a huge negative on the offsets. So let's break the link, on the right hand side, I want to go down. You can get it to do a negative, I want to keep going negative. Now, what you'll notice is that it goes down 1 pixel. Remember that shortcut we did earlier? If you hold down 'Shift', and click it, it goes down in big chunks of 10. Hopefully now, can you start to see? It's going down on that side there. You might just type it in, I'm clicking away. I might go up on the left, a couple... and down even further, and it's just like a visual side marker now... not kind of covering it. So you might use this instead of doing that whole paragraph. I'm going to use the 'Yellow'... and I'm going to set it to '100%', I'm going to click 'OK'. What's really nice about this, and I guess we have a really-- You could have drawn a box next to it. If I add more text, let's say I copy this... and just paste it a couple of times. Can you see, it comes along for the ride. The Paragraph Style is nice and updatable... and kind of adjusts to fit the first paragraph... no matter how big or small it is. Click on the Black Arrow, hit 'W'... and you can see there, just a nice clear indication of the first paragraph... or it might be a quote, or a factorial... Some sort of pricing data, or something you have as part of your copy. You can use this as kind of your cue to find that on the page. There's only one more option, page 4... I should have copied and pasted this Paragraph Text... but I'm not, you're going to watch me one more time. In there, 'Fill with Placeholder Text'... and select it all. Click Body Copy, and let's have our cursor flashing in this first paragraph here. We're going to get this to kind of run off the side, it looks kind of cool. You can do it for Titles or first paragraphs. So we're going to have our cursor flashing, let's go to our Hamburger menu. Let's look at 'Paragraph Borders & Shading'. Let's go to 'Shading'. Let's click on 'Shading'. And let's pick 'Green'. Crank it up to '100%'. And down here where it says 'Offsets', we're going to break that link. And the right, we'll keep, fine, it's the left... we're going to get into negatives now. I'm going to hold 'Shift', so it runs off, actually not negatives... positives, but holding Shift sort of runs off to the edge here. It's just that, I guess, they're a nice way of-- just a nice thing to have, it kind of runs off the edge, just a nice visual thing. I'm going to have a little bit Offset at the top... and the bottom. And probably a little bit to the right as well. Let's click 'OK', and I'm going to switch off the Font color. 'Character', type, 'Paper'. It's just that kind of effect. Close it down. All right, so those are three different options. We did borders to start with, then we've just done... variations of the shading to give you different looks. And the benefit is, is that you can add it as part of your Style... and when that paragraph gets bigger or smaller, it adjusts to match. All right, that is it for this video. Let's go and do some more paragraph awesomeness next. 22. Paragraph vs Single Line Composer in Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, have you ever wondered... why sometimes you can see this letter here, or these words here? This 'si'. Totally has enough room to fit up here. It's because by default InDesign uses something called Paragraph Composer. So if you are a real stickler about getting your lines to break right... and you're trying, and you're like, "Why is he up here?" And you're trying to use soft returns and line breaks... to try and fix it, or non-breaking... it's because by default it's doing this... because it's trying to balance the entire paragraph. Not specifically every line. You can turn this on and off. So with it selected, we're going to go to our Type tool. Up here, in our Burger menu... doesn't matter if you're a character or a paragraph, let's click on it. And we've got these options here... 'Paragraph Composer' and 'Single-line Composer'. We won't use these two here, the world ready ones These are for other languages. If you are dealing with... like Arabic, Hebrew, or Japanese... you might be using these because there are... lots of other special things that need to happen... but if you're just dealing with the English language... or at least languages that are based on the Roman alphabet... you can toggle between these two. So we're going to keep an eye on our little 'si'... and we're going to click on 'Single-line Composer'. Nothing much is going to change, a few of them did. See, he came up now. So it's trying to balance this thing line by line. Kind of like typically how you would imagine it works. Now you as a designer get to go through... and you could now be using break characters... to kind of force that down, and do it yourself... but by default, InDesign wants to do it for you... and balance out that whole paragraph. It's up to you. Now if you prefer to stay on 'Single-line Composer'... you can go to your 'Preferences', and change it in there. Now that's changed it for this one paragraph. If you want to change that by default... you can go to your 'Preferences'. So go to 'InDesign', 'Preferences', 'Advanced Type'. If you're on a PC, it's under 'Edit', 'Preferences', 'Advanced Type'. Down the bottom here, the 'Default Composer'... switch it to single line, and it will be like that forever. Single-line Composer versus Paragraph Composer... I'm unsure, sometimes I hate it when it... tries to force letters where I don't want it... Other times, I like that the paragraphs are all nicely balanced. You might have a stronger view than me, and you can change it as necessary. All right, that is it for your Composer. 23. How to make paragraphs span 2 columns in Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... the secrets of splitting and spanning columns... where we take this first paragraph that I really want to cross over both columns... and these guys down the bottom here... I want them to be in separate little columns, within a column. We can do that simply and easily within InDesign like this. So this one spans, this one splits... it's all just one text box, not lots of text boxes all hacked together. Let's go and learn how to do that now in InDesign. First thing we need to do is... we've got a single text box here, I'm on page 4. Our text box spans both these two columns. I want to split it to match our column guides down the back there. To do it with the Black Arrow... have it selected, and along here... you should be able to see the number of columns. I'm going to have two. We're going to match the gutter... which is the space between the columns... that we did earlier on, and it was 54 pixels. So It'll match up. This kind of shows you-- I'm going to hit 'W' to show the preview. I want my first paragraph actually to span... both of these columns, and the text to suck underneath. You can do it easily, grab the Type tool, click anywhere in this first paragraph. And along the top here, we need to go from 'Character' to 'Paragraph'. Then along on the right, quite far along... you need to find this little guy, looks like a, I don't know... bridge or the outer trail on for something. And we're going to go from 'None'... and we're going to 'Span All'. And, it goes and spans that whole column. That's really handy... especially if you're being in the past just putting him in his own text box. Now you don't have to, you can flow along with the rest of the text. That can also be kept in a Paragraph style, make it super easy to use. So that is how to span columns. Let's look at how to split columns. I'm going to go to our 'Exercise Files'. I want you to go into '03 Magazine', and double click 'Magazine Text'. What we'll do is we'll copy this out. This little chunk here, 'Wood Types', I'm going to copy it. I'm going to jump back into InDesign. And I'm going to make a space for it, about there. I'm going to paste it in. Now, what I'd like to is, this 'Wood Types'... I'm actually just going to make it bold, because it's going to be my heading. There's these six options down the bottom here. I would like them to be kind of side by side, in a nice set of columns. Now I could copy and paste these out into another separate text box... split that into three columns, then try and paste it back in... as an in line graphic, and it will work... but it's not as easy as this option. So with all three of them selected with the Type tool, switch to 'Paragraph'. And in the same place we were a second ago... instead of spanning, we're going to split two. So it's going to split these column into two parts. So we've got kind of two mini columns within another column. Super useful, super quick. I'm going to add bullet points while I'm here. You can see, it's just a really nice quick easy way... to add those columns rather than jumping out to another text box... or trying to play around with tabs. All right, that's going to be it for splitting and spanning columns. Let's get on to the next video. 24. Mastering Justification In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at justification... where it goes right to the edge. We're going to look at what happens... when you get these kind of long gaps... and rivers of holes in the text. And kind of tidy them up, something like this. And what we'll also do is, I'll show you... how to turn on some visual guides like this... so that InDesign can show you... using its yellow highlighter what it feels... is really bad justification... and you can go and make adjustments as necessary. Let's go and learn how to do that now in InDesign. So plain justification's pretty easy. I'm going to grab my Black Arrow, click on this whole text box here, on page 4. Grab my Type tool. And I'm going to switch from 'Character, down to 'Paragraph'. And you've got these options down the bottom here. So you want this kind of first one here. Justified with last line left... otherwise it kind of stretches out the last lines, and goes a bit crazy. So you want this kind of first justification option. Now, in terms of getting a bit pro about justification... there's a couple of things you can do. One is, with this text box selected in the Type tool, is-- I don't like, they're called rivers, right? You can see a big one there. Kind of just a gap that opened up, because it really wants to justify... and you end up with these kind of big gaps everywhere. So there's a couple of little things you can do. I don't really like justification. It looks good in terms of a block of text in a page... but I find that in terms of readability, I don't like it... but you might, it's just a personal preference. So with the text box selected, grab the Type tool. What we're going to do is, over here, in our Hamburger menu... we're going to click on this, and go into 'Justification'... and get a bit nerdy about it. There's not much you can do... but I find the best thing we can do... to kind of avoid these kind of rivers here... is to play along with letter spacing. Some people might gasp at adjusting the space between letters... but I'm okay with it. So I like to say, actually... you can increase or decrease the letter spacing... by -5% there, and +5% here. And if I click out... watch this, if I turn the preview on and off... so that's it with my little settings... and I find that the rivers disappear, you do though get... can you see, some of these words are just a bit tighter together. It depends on whether you can live with that or not. So it depends on which problem you’re on, I guess. Do you want the words to be a little bit tight, and together... or do you want the words to have like gaps and rivers between them. Both are bad, but it's, I guess, depending on what you want to do. Now it depends on the size of your font as well, and your text. You can play around with letter spacing of... maybe -2 or -10, upto 10. Up to you, play around with letter spacing. I find you can get a little bit of magic happening there. The other thing to do is just make sure that when you are justifying... you use the Paragraph Composer. We looked through that a little earlier, remember. Single line composer will deal with everything line by line. And what you'll find is it can look a bit weird in one place... and look great in another... whereas if it's on Paragraph Composer... it kind of balances the entire paragraph... and there's a little give and take between the lines. Another thing you can do if you're justifying... you get a bit blind to that after a while, you're just looking at justification-- trying to find the gaps, and it gets a bit weird. There's a nice little kind of visual cue you can use from InDesign... to show you if there's any bad rivers, or just kind of like bad spacing going on. And you can do it, up under your 'Preferences'... remember, on a PC, it's under 'Edit'. Then come down to 'Preferences'... and we're going to go down to 'H&J'... we're going to go to 'Composition'. And in here, we're going to turn on this one called... 'H&J Violations'. And all it means is... the J in here, is justification, and the H is hyphenation. We haven't covered hyphenation yet. But violations just means, anything that it thinks is a bit weird. Now I've turned it on, and I can't see anything, it's because I'm in preview mode. So I'm going to have my Black Arrow selected, and tap 'W'. You can see in here, it's kind of highlighted... the words that it thinks have gone bad. Weirdly, it has some really obvious spacing in them. Now we're using quite large fonts, so some of these characters are quite big. So that H&J violations just kind of shows you visually... where things have been changed quite a bit, this line here, perfect. This line here, it's light yellow, so it's only had a light change... whereas some of these ones here have had big changes... so they've opened up, and opened up the gaps in here... so there's quite a bit going on. That just helps you, say, okay... that's just a visual cue to help you see where there might be problems. You can go back into your justification settings and play around with them... to try and get the dark yellows down as far as you can. Now you probably don't want this on by default... so it will be on all the time now. We're going to go back into 'Preferences'... turn it off, then move back to our next video. So 'Preferences', 'Composition', let's turn 'H&J Violations' off. Let's click 'OK', and the yellowness goes away. All right, on to the next video. 25. Mastering hyphenation options using Adobe InDesign CC : Hey there, in this video we're going to talk... about the exciting world of Hyphenation. You might love it, you might hate it... but you need to understand how to make some changes to it. To make it really work for you if you are using it. What I've done is I've written this word in here, 'Alexandria'. Why? Because I wanted a really long name. I got a person's name. I'm going to click on the Text box, go to Type tool. And under 'Paragraph' here, I can pick the one that says 'Hyphenate'. Yours might be on by default, I've turned mine off in an earlier video. You can see, by default, it does some weird things... like hyphenating here, it hyphenated our name, which is bad. Also here, it hyphenated the last word of my paragraph... which just is really bad as well. It does all those sorts of weird stuff. So let's look at how to control hyphenation. So I am going to go up to here. Under 'Paragraph' in the Burger menu, in the top right. I'm going to click on that one. I'm going to go down to 'Hyphenation'. In here, they're really weird... default's down the bottom, these are always turned on. You can say, hyphenate capitalized words, and turn that off. You'll see, Alexandria now is on its own line. And obviously, lots of capitalized words are going to be... like terrible words to hyphenate, it's going to be business names and... countries, and first names, last names, so turn that off. Hyphenate last words, that's what this guy is. It's like, last word on a paragraph, he's like... "Yes, hyphenate that by default." Terrible idea. 'Hyphenate across Columns' is another one, can you see down the bottom here? This line here ends, and then hyphenates to the next column... which in our case is the next page, that's a bad idea as well. So, turning those three off... will help your hyphenation at least be a little bit better... if you want to do it by default. So turn all these off by default, I'm going to click 'OK'. I'm going to save it, and close everything that I've got open. And to change it by default, we did this in an earlier video... but I just want to double check. So go from 'Start' to 'Essentials'. Grab the Type tool. Make sure you're on, actually either one of these, 'Paragraph' or 'Character'. Go out to the Burger menu, and do the changes in here. Now if I turn this on, and turn these off... and click 'OK', that will then be the default forever. I don't want to do that, just because as a trainer... I need to kind of keep my version of InDesign close to what my students have... but that's how to go and kind of take control of hyphenation. Now there are going to be special instances where you want a bit more control. So let me open up the document again. So back in here, I'm going to try and make it do something. I'm going to keep typing in the word 'Furniture'. And the first one, I put in-- so keep typing Furniture close to the end of the lines, till it hyphenates. I want to show you a couple of tricks, I'm going to select the word Furniture. Let's just say it's a particular word that we use quite commonly... and it hyphenates all the time. When we changed our capitalized words... don't hyphenate, obviously it's not going to apply... to the word Furniture, because it's in lower case. So with it selected, we can go up to 'Edit'... and let's go to 'Spelling', and go to 'User Dictionary'. Now because I had it selected, there it is there, Furniture. And if I click show me 'Hyphenation'... this is the default hyphenation for this word Furniture. I'll move mine down so I can kind of see. So it's breaking in either this option or this option. And the way InDesign works is it kind of has a priority system... so what you can say is actually-- one tilde means this wave here, this says... the priority will be here... but if it doesn't work for you in InDesign, this is your second priority. So it's kind of like this, first up, second up. You might say, actually, just like, you get no option here. I want you to break there, across, after 'fur'. So you delete the other two, and you click 'Add'... you'll notice the background here... it went and changed, and broke exactly where I told it to. So if you've got words that you use quite commonly... and it breaks really weird... and you're like, "Man, I wish it didn't do that"... you can add it to your User Dictionary... and click on 'Hyphenate', and just tell it where to break. In our case, you've got to be careful... because our hyphenation is created in a new word, we've got 'fur'. So, maybe my hyphenation. Just an example, but that's not a good one. Let's say I never want 'Furniture' to break. You can't just do that. First of all I need to delete this one. So there's where I've gone wrong, I'm going to remove you. but up here, if you put the tilde '~' at the beginning... that tells InDesign, never hyphenate this word, if I click on 'Add'... you'll notice that it doesn't hyphenate. So if you've got some words that hyphenate, that are lower case... and you don't want them to... just add them to your User Dictionary, put the tilde '~' in front... click 'Add', and that would then never ever hyphenate. All right, let's click on 'Done'. One thing you can do in there, is that once you've done this, you don't-- the User Dictionary is not something you have to change the defaults for... like we've done previously, where we closed everything down and changed it. This User Dictionary will apply to all documents from now on. And what you can do is you can export this one... to share with other people, maybe other colleagues... or another computer that you're using so that you don't have to redo it twice. So somebody creates a great dictionary... you can see in mine, I've got a few extra words I've added to my dictionary... like Bitmap, and Blocky, and color. Spelt the other way, css, csv. Just so that the Spell Checker doesn’t keep asking for it. The cool thing about it, once I've done it... I can export it and send to somebody else... and they can go into the same setting, and click on 'Import'. Now another thing that's kind of related to hyphenation is this. Let's say that you have two words, I'm typing in 'Oak tables'. So Oak Tables there didn't break. I'm trying to stick in a few times where it breaks. Tables, there it is there. Let's say that I like Oak tables... and I never want them to be on separate lines. So I don't want it to break. There's a nice quick and easy way to say... instead of using weird Shift-returns, and trying to break lines... you just select both words. Then the long way, is under 'Window', and go to 'Type & Tables'... and open your Character panel. And in here, in the fly-out menu on the right... there's something called 'No Break'. It just means that, that word we've highlighted won't break. It's all done for every document in every instance of our tables. It's just a great way of... going through and just kind of highlighting things, and say... actually I don't want these two words, say these two words, I don't want to break. For whatever reason, say, please don't break these two... and leave the sucking up or pushing down to the next line. Now the quicker way to do it is, if I undo both of these... 'Oak Table' selected, see how it opened up the Character menu... as you use the Quick Select. So it's 'Command Return' on a Mac... or 'Control Return' on a PC, and just type in 'No b'. 'No B' brings up no break. You can click on it there, I find that's a really quick, easy way to do it. So, these two words here, 'Command Return', 'No B', 'Return'. It just kind of forces them individually to not break. And that will be a much better way than doing potentially a soft return... which is the 'Shift Return', you're never allowed to do that. All right, so that's kind of taking control of hyphenation. Let's look at Optical Margin Alignment in the next video. That will help us a little bit more with hyphenation... and then we can get off this super exciting topic, onto something new. 26. Optical margin alignment in Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at Optical margin alignment. Let's first figure out how to turn it on and off... and we'll describe what it does then. So go to 'Window', and let's go down to 'Type & Tables'... and there's one there called 'Story'. This little Story panel just has this one little setting in it. What I'm going to do, with my Black Arrow... is click on this block of text here, the Story. And at the moment, if I turn on my W key, so I can see my columns... you can see, nothing escapes the edges of this column. All the way down here, and all the way down this side, everything lines up. But visually, if I turn the W off... you can kind of see, it kind of ducks in a little bit. Even though, technically it lines up perfectly, visually it doesn't quite. That's what this does, so with it selected, if I turn it on... and turn it off, can you see... kind of just pushes out. Let's turn the 'W' key back on. See the hyphens in there, kind of poking out a little bit to the right. Same with these bullets here... watch the bullets, I'll turn that on and off. See the bullet, just kind of hang out a little bit more. It just gives you a bit more of a visual lining up... rather than a technical pixel by pixel one. So it's great for justified lines. It's also really good for say, headings. Let's say that... B doesn't really work, if I use a W, a Y, or a V... anything that has this kind of like big, see this big negative space here? Kind of visually, technically, kind of lines up... but it just, it ends up with this big kind of like... I don't know, gap here, so with it selected... I'm going to turn 'Optical Margin Alignment' on. And you can see, the Y hangs out quite a bit now. Now what you might have to do, depending on the size of your text... you might have to increase this up and down to get more of a stronger feel. So, you go quite low, or quite high... it will change, depending on the font size you've used. So try and match the font sizes. It's about 90, so I'll create mine all the way up to 72. Down the bottom here, with it on, it should be about 12. Whatever you've got your body copy font to. It also works great for things like rotation. Say you've got some cool quotes around the place... if I add this quote here, you'll notice that, I zoom in... can you see, the quote hangs off the edge as well. So Ys, Ws, Vs, quotation marks, bullets, hyphens... all kind of benefit by using this Optical margin alignment. And what you could do is, you could just make... a part of your body copy paragraph style... which will get included automatically if you use it. And this is a simple thing to do, if this kind of stuff worries you. If it doesn't, don't worry about it... and let's move on to the next video. 27. The secret power of Keep Options in Adobe InDesign CC: Hey there, in this video we're going to look at Keep Options in InDesign. Now Keep Options are our magical potions that does things like this. If I've got this Heading now, I'm going to apply this Paragraph Style that I've made. With the Keep Option, that says... whenever this is applied, you be on the next column. It's super handy to get some Paragraph Styles to start on a next page... maybe Chapter Headings. And in our case, it's the Sub Headings... so it makes sure it jumps to the next column. We can also use it to make sure that... the heading is always connected to the first paragraph... and not broken across pages or columns. There's lots of things we can do with Keep Options. Let's go and look at those now in InDesign. The first thing we need to do is we need to create a Paragraph Style. That's where the Keep Options are created, they're made in here. So what I'm going to do is, just after this first paragraph here... I'm going to create a Sub Heading called... 'Cube Storage'. And I'm going to make it a Sub Heading Paragraph Style. So I'm just going to make it bold, make it a chunk bigger. And I'm going to make it 'MF Green'. Now I'm going to turn it into a Paragraph Style. So 'New' Paragraph Style, double click 'Paragraph Style 1'. This one's going to be called 'MF Sub Heading'. I don't want it to be based on another Paragraph Style. I just wanted to replace with nothing. I'll have all styles in for you there. Let's click 'OK'. So we've created a Paragraph Style, and we've applied it to this. Now, what I'd like to do is prevent things like this. So whenever I'm doing my notes, like longer notes... and I kind of add text up here on another page... or up here in this other paragraph. So I'm going to add some text, and copy and paste this. And I paste it, paste it... and you start to see, I end up with this title. It's kind of by himself, he should be over there with that first paragraph. He shouldn't be just hanging here by himself. I want him to automatically, when he gets close to the bottom there... wherever the paragraph goes on to the next line... I want him to jump across and be on the next line there. It might be easier just to show you, so, I'm going to click off... have nothing selected, with my Black Arrow, I'm going to double click 'Sub Heading'. And in here I'm going to go down to the 'Keep Options'. So I want to keep it with, how many lines, probably... what would look nice, if it's a really long paragraph... maybe I want it to, maybe just one, two, three... So maybe about four lines. I'm happy if it's back over on this one, if there's four lines or more... I want it just to kind of jump across. Maybe three lines might be better... because I could be happy with 'Cube Storage' being over on this column... if there was the Heading, plus three lines. Actually I wouldn't. I want it just to push to the top of the next column. It's a lot easier for people to read and find titles... if they go at the top of the column. So let's see how it works, let's click 'OK'. So if there is three lines, if I delete a couple of lines here, it will move back... but if it doesn't, it will jump to the next one. So it's just a nice way of kind of... encouraging these guys to be in a nice space. Be on their own page if they need to be. Another option to use Keep Options... I'm going to have nothing selected... I'm going to turn off the Keep thing that we just did. So I'm going to say, you can be on its own line, so back to zero. Click 'OK'. So now it's not doing that thing we've done previously... but what it's going to do now, let's say I've a really long Sub Heading. So, 'Cube Storage is a really handy way to store... Whatever it is, so it's a really long Sub Heading. Watch this, if I add some text up here, copy and paste... if I get close to the bottom there, you'll notice it breaks across two lines. So that Paragraph Style allows this to break across lines. So let's say Heading, and we are like, "No way we want that to happen." So what we can do is, nothing selected, open up 'Sub Heading'. And I'll use Keep Options in a slightly different way. We're going to say keep lines together, all lines in that paragraph. So it just means, for this particular style, we're going to say... keep that paragraph all together. So if it gets to the bottom of the column or a page... jump across to the next one. Let's click 'OK'. I'm going to undo that to go back to what it was before. Let's say we've got a different situation, so another use for Keep. Instead of doing the Keep Options where, if it spans a column... we keep it together like we just did. We want actually to say... every time there's a Sub Heading, I want it to go to a new column... regardless of where it is, or a new page. Say it's a Chapter Heading, rather than the Sub Heading... we want to say, whenever this appears, go to its own page... or in our case, I want it to go to the next column. Doesn’t really matter where it is, just go to the next column when you're applied. So, let's have nothing selected again... and just that Paragraph Style... and under 'Keep Options', we're going to use this option... to say start this paragraph 'anywhere'. No, I want to start it on the next column, or the next page. So I want to say, you definitely have to start in the next column. I could say, next page, if I wanted to push this to another page... to go to another page. It can be really useful for those kind of large headings, like Chapter Headings... where you say, actually I just want it to be on its own column... regardless of where it is in the paragraph. So that's it for Keep Options. Really handy, especially when you're dealing... with little headings in the flow of text, like we've got here. Just to make sure they break, and keep together where they should. All right, on to the next video. 28. Advanced Anchored Objects In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at doing Anchored Objects... that aren't in the flow of text, well at least they're on the side here. Watch this, if I add some returns, it flows along... but it's not in that particular text box. I'm going to show you some cool tricks for doing that... plus how to deal with multiple objects, by grouping them. Let's go and do that now in InDesign. So first thing is, let's bring in our Image. So let's go to 'File', 'Place', on page 1 in our Tables page... and I'm going to bring it in from the 'Exercise Files'. '03 Magazine', and there's one in there called 'Image1-Coffee-Table'. I'm going to bring mine in over here. Just a random size. We'll change it in a second. So, I've got this guy here. Now, a normal Anchored Object, all you do is... grab your Black Arrow, cut it, so 'Edit', 'Cut'. Get your cursor where you want it to be, let's say, here. Then you just paste it, so I've used dear old Paste. That means it kind of flows up and down with the text. But I want to do some more advanced stuff. I'm going to put it back over there... and I'm going to do a couple of things, I want to add a Title over here. So this one's going to be called 'Coffee Tables'. I'll use my Paragraph Style, that I prefer. Where are you? 'Styles', created a 'Sub Heading' one. It doesn't work because I did some stuff to it... when we were working with the Keep Options... so I'm going to click off in the background, nothing selected... open up 'Sub Headings', go down to 'Keep'. And I'm going to say, 'Anywhere', so '0', 'Anywhere'. For some reason I've got this Paragraph Shading as well... which we can turn off here, under 'Paragraph Shading'. Turn that off. Okay, cool. So all it wanted was a Heading. But what I'd like to do is, instead of beginning at the flow of text... I want it to be out here, but kind of connected to the flow of text. So that's what we're going to do. The quick easy option is that, see this blue box here? Black Arrow, blue box, what you can do is, you, drag, drag, drag. I want you to flow along there. The cool thing about that, is you can see it's got like a little Anchored Object now. So even though it's not in the flow of text... watch this, if I put in a 'return', it goes along with the text. So even like that, just like that, that's super handy. Especially if you've got diagrams that pop out on the side... that help explain things that are in the text. So that's some more advanced Anchored Objects. What I'm going to do is, I'm going to undo until it is back over here... without it being linked in. I want to show you a couple of other things. Let's say I want to maybe put this inside of a circle. So we're going to kind of use some our options that we used earlier on. Some of the drawing techniques. I'm going to use the Ellipse tool. I'm going to hold 'Shift' to draw out an Ellipse. And with this right at the top of this guy, I'm going to cut the image... and select on my circle, and go to 'Edit', 'Paste into'. It gives me my image inside this circle, which is awesome. Next of all I want an Ellipse. And what I want to do is have No Fill. Actually don't have that circle over here. I have nothing selected, then go to Ellipse and say... No Fill, and like a Stroke of 'MF Green'. It's under 'Maynooth', 'MF'. I'm going to go up to about 6pts, I'm going to draw out an Ellipse. Roughly about that sort of size, maybe increase it up to this size. And I want to stick this together with these two. And I want it to flow along with the text. First of all, I want to align it. So I can see my Align panel over here. You might have to go to 'Window', 'Object', 'Align'... and go, you, and you. So align vertical and horizontal. Watch this, I can't anchor this now. That little blue box isn't there, I can't paste it in, just doesn't work. So if you ever find yourself in this position... where you've got two things, kind of two separate things - I'm going to scale him around for no reason. - you have to group them first, so select both of these, go to 'Object', 'Group'... or 'Command G' on a Mac, or 'Control G' on a PC. Then grab this little blue box, just drag him in. Now that little group will follow along. So the easy thing is grabbing the blue box, and dragging it where you need it to be. And this little extra kind of information... is that if you have got multiple parts, like the image and the circle... they need to be grouped first, then they can flow along with the text. All right, that's it for Anchored Objects. Let's get on to the next video. 29. How To Use Conditional Text In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, welcome to this video, all about Conditional Text. I love Conditional Text. What it is, it allows you to have kind of option A and option B for something. In our case we've got US dollars for this shelf here... and we've got New Zealand dollar price. It allows us to have one InDesign document... but allows us to do this... where I can say, actually I want to... print off a PDF for just New Zealand dollars... and you'll notice that it really flows the text. Unlike layers, we can kind of just turn them on and off... this reflows and kind of flows up to these brackets here. Let's say I want to make another PDF for just US dollars. You could have Euros, Australian dollars, all sorts of dollars. Not just currency, it can be sizes. You might have UK, US sizes, it might be UK, US spelling. One big document, and have two spelling variations. It could be wholesale or retail pricing. It could be other things. I can't think of anything else to use it for at the moment. I'll come up with some more during the course, but you get the basic idea. Let's learn how to do it now in InDesign. So first thing we're going to do is, I'm on page 3... we're going to open up our 'Exercise Files'... and open up '03 Magazine', and open up 'Magazine Text'. I want you to copy this stuff here. So it's the prices for some of my shelves, I'm going to copy it. On the shelves page, we're just kind of like... generate a paragraph where there was none before. Just making a space for it. I'm going to have a full stop and a capital letter. Then I'm just going to paste this in. So this is our US dollar price. What we need to do now is, just afterwards... I'm going to put in a space... and I'm going to put in another price. Now, depending on-- it's up to you, you might pick-- So I'm from New Zealand, I might pick New Zealand dollars. In terms of the actual digit value... it's twice as much as Euros, you can go through and do that. So I'm going to go through and do it for all of these. I'll get Jason or Tayla to speed this up. I'm finished with the addition. That's quite a long time. So what we're going to do now is apply our conditions. So what I'd like to do is, be able to turn the button on and off... so that I can switch between US and New Zealand prices... without having to have two InDesign documents. Let's go to 'Window', 'Type & Tables', 'Conditional Text'. Everything is conditional, I've got nothing selected... I'm going to make two conditions. One is going to be 'US Dollar'. I'm going to make another one, and this one's going to be 'NZ Dollar'. You can see, by default, down the bottom... it's going to have an appearance of a wavy line with red underneath. You can change this to be a Highlight... rather than Underline, you can play around with these. 'Underline', 'Wavy' seems to work fine. So what I'm going to do is grab my Type tool. I'm going to click over them, and drag it across. You'll notice that I grabbed that first space in front of 50. I'm going to zoom in a bit. It's just because, when this gets removed... there's a space here, before the New Zealand dollars. So this is going to kind of lump forward, and if I don't, and if I just have this... I'm going to be left with two spaces... but I want this, and I want you to be US Dollars. Then I want you to be New Zealand Dollars, including that space. I'll say 'New Zealand Dollars'. So there's a couple of things here, you're not seeing the wavy underline... so I'm going to go back to my Black Arrow... click in the background, hit 'W' key to come out of preview mode. Now you can see them down the bottom there. Another thing to be careful of is... say here, I want you, and I want you to be US Dollars... and I want all of this. I don't want to get this space after here... this little space afterwards... because this will suck into the return... that breaks the line down to here. We'll look at it, I'll do this one by accident... I'll leave that in there so we got an example. So don't do that. US Dollars, so grab all of it, but not that. And we want New Zealand Dollars, okay, I'll get it to speed it up again. Go forth. So that is all the magic done. I got nothing selected in the background... now what we can do is turn the eyeball off the US Dollars... and watch the NZ Dollar flow. Awesome! So that's the big thing with Conditional Text... is that, even that thing that I broke didn't actually break. I didn't actually grab that, actually put in a return. Just happens sometimes. Actually, if I turn any of those off... yes, that works, that's what works. So, if I turn New Zealand Dollars off... because I've got that return included into it... that return breaks this line... but without it, this line tries to sneak up, watch. Oops, no, that one. So if we end up with this... where one line kind of end up jumping up when it shouldn't... you might just have to make sure, and go-- actually, see this bit here? You are Unconditional. Now hopefully, click off... and I turn the Dollars off, and you off, it's fine. That was a long winded explanation, I hope you caught that. So the big difference doing that, and say, maybe using the Layers panel... you can turn things on and off in the layers. The reason we're not doing that is because we want this text to reflow. We want, where the US Dollars was, we want the NZ Dollars... to kind of suck up, and flow into there. Now where I find this really useful... obviously, where it's great, retail, wholesale prices versus UK, US sizings... currency values, I've done this lots in them. One of the big uses for it was, when I was doing some-- setting up some templates for some... it was really boring work, it was insurance agencies. They underwrote a whole lot of banks... but they all had the exact same policy wording. So, banks in New Zealand, so there were BNZ... had a policy wording that was exactly the same as... Westpac, ANZ, all these other banks... so what we did is, we'd update one document in InDesign... and what we did, is where it said... "Hey, we the bank, BNZ... hereby... I don't know, insurance speak. And all we did is highlight the word BNZ, and switch it out... and have Westpac next to it, next to ANZ, next to all these other banks... and then I could just turn them on and off... and we could do text in the midst of this... big, ugly, heavy going policy wording... and then when we're ready to print, we just turn that one on, that one off... and go to 'File', 'Export PDF'... and it would be all in that right bank's wording. The same here, we turn it on and off for the other option... then go 'File', 'Print', and that just means we have one InDesign document. That looked after lots of different varieties of banks. Another use for it for me... is I have teacher training notes and student training notes... it's the same InDesign document... but I have like, "Hey, this is what you should do in InDesign"... and then at the end I have like a little teacher's note, and say... "Teachers only, specific"... like "Now is a good time to insert a clever joke about InDesign here." And I'll highlight it, and make it "Teacher's only" note. So when I'm printing the teacher notes... they get all the lame jokes that I came up with... but the students just get the regular old notes. We just got one file to deal with. So that is Conditional Text. I hope I explained myself well in this one. Wow, I hope you'll watch this one, but I feel it's okay. All right, so let's jump into the next video. 30. How To Create Pie Charts & Bar Graphs In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to learn how to do... Pie charts, Line charts, and Bar graphs... and all sorts of awesome charting type things, well, kind of. You can't really do them in InDesign... so I'm going to show you all the tricks and techniques... to create them, and bring them into these. All right, let's get on with it. So the bad news is that InDesign doesn't make graphs itself... so we have to use something else... and there's kind of three main ways of doing it. One is with Illustrator, one is with Excel... and one of them is using a font, like Chart work. Now this is not going to be a detailed explanation of how to use all of them... because I guess Illustrator is a separate program, so is Excel... but I want to show you how quick and easy it can be to use those options. So I'm going to make a new page, page 5 here. Let's look at Illustrator. Illustrator has a Graphing tool, it's down here on the left. And you got all the different kinds of graphs. Potentially, we're going to do our Column graph. And all you do is drag out the size you want it to be. Then you fill this data sheet in, it's kind of like using Excel. So in here I might say, '40' is the first one. You can copy and paste this from Excel. I'm just making a random chart here. And when you've got the bits you want... click on that little tick, and you've got a Column chart. You can grab your White Arrow, and click on just this first part... and say, I want to pick you, so we select on our White Arrow here. Click on this first option, go to 'Properties'... and in here, the Fill is going to be 'Maynooth Green'. I can go through and just color out... change the fonts, change the colors in here. Get ready. And all I need to do is copy and paste it. Now if I copy it with this little data sheet open... if I copy and try paste it into InDesign, it just doesn't come. Doesn’t work, so you close him down... then just select it, go to 'Edit', 'Copy'... then 'Edit', 'Paste' in here, and you get it. Cool thing about doing it from Illustrator... is that I can go to my 'Object', and I can 'Ungroup' them. And they all become like separate pieces... and I can go through here, and change the font... and make some adjustments, and kind of work over there. It's nice and editable in InDesign. Now we're not going to go through every feature in Illustrator. I've got an Illustrator course, go check that out. It will go through all the different Illustrator parts. So say Illustrator is not your thing, and you've been sent stuff in Excel. So let's look at that. I've got a sheet you can open up here, called 'Chart Data'... and I've made a little graph in here. Now this is not going to work unless it's in Excel. Google Sheets doesn't work this way. So I've made a little chart in here. Basically all you do is, select all the data you want in your sheet... go to 'Insert', and then here there's options for different graphs. I've picked, in this case, this first 'Line' graph. It just generates it. Now, it's not going to be editable in InDesign. So what you need to do is, in here I'm going to go and pick 'Home'... and I'm going to pick the 'Font' in here. So I've got to do this stuff-- what did I pick? Arial Hebrew, it's probably not what I want. I'll just pick 'Regular Arial'. So you can click on here, double click the 'Line'... you can go and choose 'Format'. Again, this is not going to be like a full... how to use Graphing Tool in Excel. I've got a course on that. So I've got a full on Excel course if you want to jump into that one. Now you can do some basic formating in here, probably without any help. Now just click the outside, copy it, paste it into InDesign. The nice thing about it is that it is Vector. So when I scale it up, it's not going to pixelate. You see, if I zoom in, it's all still lovely Vector Graphics. So whichever way you'd like to use, out of those two... either Excel, or Illustrator, those are great ways. I'm going to show you this third option, because it's quite useful. I'm just going to drag him off to the side here. So, this is a font based way. So this actually can be done in InDesign. You don't have to go to any other product, but you do need a paid font. And the fonts are about US $25. Where do you get them from? You can buy them from lots of places. Currently TypeKit doesn't sell them... so you're going to have to go to somewhere else. I use myfonts.com quite often. And what you're looking for is one called Chartwell. So I found Chartwell here, it's got a big gallery... of kinds of things you can do with it. It's pretty impressive, some really nice graphs. Now, you can buy, under 'Buying Choices'... you can buy the entire font family. And that's seven different fonts, it's Bar charts, Line charts, the works... for about 120, I think it's about the same in US dollars, mine's in Euros. What I wanted though, just underneath, you can buy 'Individual Styles'. So I've just purchased 'Pie charts', and I bought it. There are added VAT for me, so it added up to about €30... I think it's still an okay price for what it does. So, in InDesign now... you download it, and install it, like any other font. Now the way this works, is it works on Ligatures. If I draw out a Type box-- zoom in. So where it works is, you need to have numbers that add up to 100. Let's say I've got this, this, plus this. As long as they equal 100, it's going to work. The other thing you need to do is, every font, wherever your number group... needs to be a different color... so I'm going to pick a bit of green, I'll use pink... and I'll use yellow, so I've got three different colors. Now what we need to do is change the Stylistic set. So with the Black Arrow, down the bottom, I've got this little O down the bottom. Now I get to switch it from-- actually it's not going to work at all. First of all we need to select the font, and make it 'Chartwell', not Roboto. 'Chartwell Pies', there it is there. Yours might already be downloaded as a Pie chart... but if yours is like mine, and it hasn't... now I can click on this O down the bottom... and click on 'Stylistic Set 1'. Ready, steady... I'm amazed. I love that it just works that easily. If you can't see any of this down the bottom here... you can turn this on by default... by going to 'InDesign', 'Preferences', 'Advanced Type'. If you're on a PC, it's under 'Edit', Preferences', 'Advanced Type'. And you can turn on both of these two options down the bottom. That will give you this little ribbon type icon down the bottom... or you can go to 'Command T' on a Mac, or 'Control T' on a PC... and in here is the option, under 'OpenType'... and you can go to 'Stylistic Sets', and turn it on there. Up to you. So with it on, it's made up a chart... and you can see, these slices are made out of the colors. Now it's a bit small. So I can grab my font tool-- it's based on the font size. So I'm going to hold down 'Shift', and just raise it up a bit. So that is how to use the chart. I want to turn that off and show you a couple of options. I think it's pretty clever though. You can obviously, let's say I want another slice... and this one's going to go down to 40. Then I'm going to add another slice that's 10. This one's going to be purple. So it's easy to add slices. There he is there. Another thing you can do is you can add a letter to the end. Now the letters adds a little disc to the middle. So if I type in a lower case 'a'... and I'm just going to make it black in this instance. It should be white, but I want it black so you can see it. Now I'll turn it back on. You can see, it's made a little black disc in the middle. So that's what the letter does. Basically the letter, the lower case a is the smallest dot... and the capital Z is the biggest dot you can make. So it goes, lower case a-z, that gives you half the way... and then, upper case A-Z gets you the rest of the way. If that doesn't make sense, let's put in an upper case M... and I'm going to make it white... or 'Paper'. Turn it on, so that's going to give me... probably the thing I want, see that disc here? So sizing wise, lower case a-z gets you that half way... and then upper case A, all the way through to Z... gives you the rest of the space, getting bigger. I picked M, which is kind of in the middle there. So that is the CC Chart. It works just as easy... with the Line and Bar graph, and the Rows chart. There's some awesome things if you want to get the whole library. Now two last things I want to show you, is that... turning this Stylistic set on and off is not bad, not a big drama. You can use the Story Editor. I rarely use the Story Editor. It's under 'Edit', and there's one called the 'Story Editor'. Basically this is for people-- it's kind of like InCopy. It just means that I see the text without any of the formating. It's just plain text editing. The cool thing about it is that I can switch this one out... let's say this one has to be 15 now... and I'll add those other 15 here, 55, you can see... it's just maybe an easier way to work using this option up the top here. Let's say I get rid of this center here. I'm going to close that down now. Let's say I want kind of a Pie chart pushed out. By default I can't do that, so what I'm going to do is... I'm going to select it with my Black Arrow, then go up to 'Type'... there's one in there called 'Create Outlines'. So it's no longer editable, so you might want a copy of this somewhere. So I can't go back into my Story Editor now, and adjust it. What I can do is I can ungroup it. Now I've got lots of little pieces here I can work with... so I might want some sort of... like slice, kind of pushing out like this... then, some labels to it to say what this exciting slice does. So the rule is... you can't do graphs in InDesign, so you need something else to create them. You can either use Illustrator, Excel, or one of these Chartwell fonts... it's up to you. They all have their pros and cons... and I guess, just use the one you find you've got the most skills in. Either Excel, Illustrator, or you can learn how to use this Chartwell font. All right, let's get on to the next video tutorial. 31. The Pros & Cons Of The Various Interactive Types In InDesign CC : So it's Pros & Cons time. Which interactive delivery system is going to work for you? So there's three to pick from. There's Interactive PDFs... there is going to be something called Publish Online... and then there's going to be EPUB. So those are the kind of three main groups at the moment. They all have pros and cons. So why is an Interactive PDF good? It's great because PDFs are very generic. Unlike in EPUB, you have to have an E-reader. PDFs, pretty much, anybody can open them. It means you get to save them, upload them to your website... people can download Interactive PDFs, which is handy. PDFs are the only format you can have any sort of security. You can add passwords to them, you can email them. And what can you do in them? You can, here's an example here. I can click on this navigation. Easily make kind of a non-linear navigation. You can jump around this document, where you like. If I click on this web link here, it's going to open a website. The same here, I can do it for email. Now if I click on this, it's going to open my email client, with an email ready to go. What they're also really good for... is as replacement for PowerPoint presentations. Say you've got some good skills in InDesign, but you hate PowerPoint... you can use this like PowerPoint... where you can make it-- you can force it load full screen, automatically. And also what you can do is Page Transitions. So I can move back and forth, it's pushing and sliding. You can do all sorts of PowerPoint style Page Transitions. Like that ugly one there called Cone. Now one of the big cons for Interactive PDFs... there's lots of things you can't do. You used to be able to do video... but there's some Flash shockwave problems now... so you can't do video for them. And with these transitions, they only work in full screen... so you can't do this lovely page transitions... when it's kind of in this view here. The other thing is that this requires Acrobat Reader. Most other PDF readers will have things like transitions allowed... and there's some navigation... but not all of them. If somebody has got something installed on their machines... that is opening their PDFs that's just really old, or not very good... you can't guarantee these are going to work. Especially on mobile devices... but it's no big deal, people don't see the transitions... it will still move to the next page, but maybe not as fancy. And if you're going to use this as say a presentation tool... like a PowerPoint presentation... like I do quite a lot of the time... the trouble is that people can't adjust it. Because it's PDF, it's kind of stuck and fixed. Unless the person knows how to use InDesign, they can't adjust it. So be careful if you do decide to go and use this as a PowerPoint presentation. The poor person that you sent off this presentation can't easily update it. So that's what we can and can't do with Interactive PDFs. We'll look at how to actually physically do it in the following video. Now let's look at Publish Online. So Publish Online is-- it's got a really boring name... but it's my most favorite kind of delivery system. We learnt in Interactive PDFs, there's lots of limitations to it... whereas Publish Online has lot more freedom. There are some cons, but let's look at it now. It's this button here you've been avoiding. So once you click it, you upload your interactive InDesign document... to a website basically, you get to view it, let's check what it looks like. So this is what it looks like. I'm going to refresh the page because I want to show you... the sweet animation that can happen. So, that fades in, that slides in... my navigation, although very slow, appears in the page. So let's have a little look. Your navigation can work like in the Interactive PDF... animations can't happen in PDF. Let's scroll down, let's go to some of the more interesting pages. So, some of the other things you can do. First one was, obviously animation. The next one's going to be video, you saw it there. So you can do full on video awesomeness in Publish Online. You can add YouTube videos as well. I'll stop him playing. Let's have a look at some of the other pages. This one's quite cool, they're called Multi State objects... I can click on these, and just toggle through them all. To pick different kind of wood types, I'm going to go to the next page... and this one here, so these animations, see, if I click on this button here... you can have Trigger or Button controlled animations. Let's have a look in the next page. You can have elephants walking across your page, very useful. So that is animations brought in from Adobe Acrobat CC. You can just dump those into your Publish Online. Next thing we're going to look at, is you can have Interactive Maps. I love this. Publish Online has probably the most robust delivery system. All it is, is you give people this link... and you say, "Visit my company newsletter"... and they go to that link, and they can see exactly what I just showed you here. Now, its other pros is that its link can be updated. Say I spot a typo, or I want to add an extra column, or an extra page... I can do that from InDesign, and just update this page here... and it just means that I don't have to go and change the link... it just means that the content updates. Probably my most favorite feature is that it has some analytics bit into it. So as part of Publish Online you get a Dashboard... so I can see that this document's been viewed 26 times... the Average Read Time is 13 minutes, the Total Read Time has been 5 hours... and people have been viewing that on Desktop mostly. So that kind of information obviously can't happen with print. And because you are distributing digitally... it's amazing to be able to kind of see this sort of information... to kind of work out whether this works for you as an option. You can come in here and say, nobody's reading it. We'd like people to read it... and you've put a lot of effort into your magazine... but if nobody's reading it, that's fine, but at least you know... and you can start comparing months. So you might have your January and your February edition... and you can kind of see what was... the Total Read Time for both of those compared to each other... what are their cover stories getting read, what pages are getting read? Do I need to make a specific mobile friendly version of it? Now what are the cons? That means that people need to watch this through internet... so they need an internet connection. One of other big cons is that some people don't like that it's hosted by Adobe. This thing here, has to be hosted by Adobe. So that's just the way this works, they make sure it works... but some people don't like it, not on their servers. So that's something that some people can't get around. What you can do though is you can embed it. So that means you can actually grab this code... and make it look like it's from your website. Nobody viewing it will know that it's coming from Adobe... but it will look like it's from your url, so that's the way around that. And I love it, that's why you should do it, that's the main reason. Is that Digital Publishing is like, there was DPS... and there was lots of like-- we're going to do effects with EPUBs and-- nothing's really quite worked yet, and I feel like this is the best solution. Just the web based solution. Its works, it's great, it's easy, uses your InDesign skills... and it looks great. Now the next option is Effects with EPUB. Now Effects with EPUB, we're not going to cover in this course... because it can be its own gigantic project. And I don't like it as a distribution method... because it just requires really specialized E-book readers. Basically you need the Adobe ones, called Content Viewer... and if they don't use that, things don't work. And that's a big kind of drawback for me. I'm like... "Okay, so we've got this fixed with EPUB... so it's great, it looks nice. I can make the animations... but the animations only work in one reader that nobody has." You can force people to download it, and use it. That's totally cool, you can say to the viewers, "You have to do it." Just, I find people won't do it. They'll use the built-in EPUB reader on their laptop... which most laptops don't have, Mac has one built-in called iBooks. So open up in iBooks, but if you've got a Mac, have you ever seen iBooks open? It's kind of a weird thing to have happen, and you're like, "Well, what is this?" So it's all a bit new in-- I don't know, I feel like you'll lose people there. iPads have it built in, iBooks, that's great... and some of the animations works in it... but in terms of Android or PCs... PCs don't have any book reader built in at all... so it means when they try and open it, nothing happens. Also, if it opens up in like an Android tablet... they have E-book readers, but actually I wonder if there's one there by default. So it means that you have to download one... and it just feels like it's a distribution method. Text with EPUBs aren't that great. Sorry, EPUBs, I love you really, but distribution is tough. So, we've got Interactive PDFs which has-- which is great because everyone's got a reader, but there are some limitations. Just basic navigation like this works great... but I think the only real true distribution method at the moment... is the Publish Online. So, check that out on our next videos. Let's get on with it. 32. How To Create An Interactive PDF In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... how to create an Interactive PDF in Adobe InDesign. This one, we're going to create just some basic interactivity. We're going to create a little link that links to a website... and links to an email address. Then we're going to show you how to produce and export an Interactive PDF. Let's give it a test. Click on the little icon, it opens up a website, very exciting. Lots of pictures of me, look at this, I'm there everywhere. Let's go and do that now in InDesign. So we're going to export an Interactive PDF. First we're going to add a bit of interactivity, just some simple stuff... just to make sure, or we can test it works. So what I'm going to do is add a little hyperlink. When it clicks, it goes to a website... and then another one, when it's clicked, it goes to an email. So I'm going to add it to my Master page... so I'm going to double click on our A-Master. So I'm in my Master page, I know I am... because down the bottom left here it says A-Master. I'm going to bring in two icons that I'm going to use as the triggers. You could highlight text, I could just write my email address. "@maynooth". Select that and do it... but I want to do it with two little icons. So let's do that, let's go to 'File', 'Place'... and if we go to our 'Exercise Files'... and in Interactive, so '04 Interactive'... there's two icons that I want, 'icon-email' and 'icon-website'. I'm going to use my cool little Gridify trick. I have two little guys here, they kind of match the same size... I'm going to scale them down. If you haven't done the Gridify video, go and do that one... otherwise just scale him down manually. I want website to be first, then email to be second. I'm going to put them in the bottom right here, and a lot smaller. You could do the exact same thing with maybe Twitter and Facebook icons... so that when they click, they jump out to those things. I'm doing another Master page... just so that, watch this... when I double click page 1, page 2, page 3, they're on all of them. I still feel they're too big, so I'm going to make it a bit small. Holding 'Command' and 'Shift' while I'm scaling them down. And it's 'Control Shift' on a PC, while you're scaling... will do it proportionately. So what we need to do is have one of them selected... and let's go to 'Type', which is kind of weird... and go to 'Hyperlinks & Cross-References', and go to 'New Hyperlink'. And in here, I'm going to say... when this is clicked, I want the link to go to email. And the email address, I'm going to put in, let's say... 'daniel@maynooth.com'. So whatever your email address is. You can add a subject line, it will just pre-fill it out for the user. I'm going to put in like 'Catalog Enquiry', something like that. And that's it, click 'OK'. Let's do it for the website address as well. So with this, it's going to go to my website. It's hard to know what the icon is for a website. Sometimes it's just 'www-- pick the globe, anyway. So, same principle, let's go to 'Type'... and let's go down to 'Hyperlinks', 'New Hyperlink'... and instead of email, it's got an URL. That Maynooth URL I'm using for this course is fictional. It's a fake company I've made through this course. This is my actual site, so I'm going to use this one, bringyourownlaptop.com or you can go to Google.com, just something you can test, that works. I'm going to click 'OK'. So we've added a little bit of interactivity... we're going to add a lot more throughout the following videos, after this one... but let's get the basics done, so hyperlinks, emails... and now we need to produce a PDF that's interactive. So what we need to do now is go to 'File', and let's go to 'Export'. Just like we do for a normal PDF. What we need to do, by default it's set to 'Print'... so 'Adobe PDF (Print)'. What I'd like to do is set it to 'Interactive'... that's basically what we need to do. I'm going to save mine on to my 'Desktop', I'm going to put it in my 'Coursework'. I'll call mine 'Catalog'. Just for the moment, and I hit 'Save'. And in here, you can go through and play around with the defaults... but basically it's ready to go. You can just click on 'Export'. If you want to go into a little bit more details... probably the main thing you're going to go through is 'Compression'. At the moment, mine is set to '300'... so it's going to make the files look really amazing. So you might decide that, actually I don't want it to be so high. And the main way to do this, is under 'Resolution'. 300 is print quality, it's probably not what I need... when we're going out for an Interactive PDF. I pick like 144. Some people go to 72, it really depends on how big it is. You want to keep this as high as you can... but you want to compare that with how big the actual physical file size is. If you are at 300, and it's becoming like a 10MB PDF... then it's not going to be easily emailable, and life becomes tough. So you might have to drop it down to 144... and if then it's still really big... you might have to drop it down to something like 72. Have a little practice with the different resolutions. Just see what does it look like, versus how big it is. I'm going to keep mine at 300. There's nothing much else you need to do in here. I'm going to click on 'Export'. I've got some Overset Text... all that means is that when I'm working on my text boxes here... there's actually more text than the text boxes. Just wanting to say, "Hey, you've got text you can't see on the page." Because it's just demo, I'm not worried about that... but if this was a proper print document... I might have text that's not visible on the page, and that will be bad. I'm going to click 'OK' though, because I'm not worried. Now depending on your computer... most computers will open up Acrobat Pro by default. If you don't, you might have to go to your 'Finder'... or your 'Windows' if you're on a PC... find the file where you've kept it. We called ours 'Catalog.pdf', just double click it there. And once it's opened up in Acrobat or Acrobat Reader... down the bottom here are our two little icons... that appear on all the pages. Hopefully you can click on them, click on the first one. It kind of comes up with a warning, mine didn't come up with a warning... because I've disabled it. Yours is probably going to say... "Hey, this PDF is trying to launch a website." And you click 'OK'. You can see here, it's jumped into Chrome, and it has opened up bringyourownlaptop.com And lots of pictures of me, just what you needed. Let's look at the other one, so email... so when I click on this, it's going to open up your default email clients. And in this case I'm on Mac, so it's MacMail. You can see, it's added the email... and it's added the subject line, and now I can type it in. So it's just a way of kind of helping people email you. So before we move on I'm going to do a little bit of production video... where I just kind of add some graphics and stuff... just to help this tutorial work... when we do Page Transitions, and just to make the document look a little nicer. So you can skip on, you're not going to learn anything too new here. Just kind of a work flow I guess, me doing stuff. So what I would like to do is add a new page in front of page 1. Easiest way is just to click the little 'New Page' icon... and just drag it back and front. So it's at the page no. 1. Basically I just want to import some logos and text, and get working. So I'm going to go to 'File', 'Place'. From '04 Interactive' we're going to bring in 'image1-floating'. I'll click and drag it from one side to the other, and it should match up. I'm also going to grab the Rectangle tool. I'm going to drag in another box. So I'm going to maybe have no-- actually click off in the background. Then grab the Rectangle tool... and say, actually I want you to have 'No Stroke'. And I'll have a 'Black' Fill. And I want to draw out a box that covers the entire thing. I'll lower the opacity, just so I can put some text. Basically just doing it so I can put text over the top of it. So again, click in the background, nothing selected... and we're going to go to 'File', 'Place' again, just bring in the Logo. It's just in the group folder of the 'Exercise Files'. Here's all of these guys, I'm going to bring in 'Option4'. Click out and drag it in the corner here. And I'll put in some text, Type tool. Now with the Type tool, it's always better to draw on the side here... and then bring it in, otherwise if I click in here... you can see, my Black box that I used to kind of tint the background... is being turned into a text box... and it's a bit of a pain, so undo, grab the Type tool, draw it out here... and I'm going to write in here, 'Collection 2019'. Now when I'm working-- so this is-- I'm just going to quickly pick a font. Make something light. Not sure if I could see light, and I'll pick... you are going to be the bold, it's fine, it's going to be the yellow. Now instead of going through and picking font sizes... the Type tool font sizes... often what I do is, select it with the Black Arrow... use our shortcut that we learnt earlier, it's 'Command-Option-C'. That just fits the text box around it. Or 'Control-Option-C' on a Mac. And then I just scale it up, like I scale graphics... hold 'Control' and 'Shift'... till it scale proportionately, and I do that to adjust my font sizes... because I'm not sure what size I need it to be, I'm just kind of looking at it. Tongue out, eye browing, and going... "Hey, I'm at that sort of size." 'W' key, see it in preview. Do some lining up. All right, so that is it, let's get into the next video... where we look at Transitions. 33. How To Add Interactive Page Transitions In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at how to do Page Transitions. So when I click on this, and use my arrow keys... it pushes to the next page, click again, moves to the next page. So I'm using pushes there. This one here, another push, then, oh! Comb, you're not allowed to use Comb, and you're not allowed to use Blinds. Let's have a little look at how to do Page Transitions in InDesign. So the first thing we need to do with Page Transitions... I guess, one of the cons is that... the PDF has to open in full screen for this to work. So, doesn't work for everything. Works really good if you're replacing this-- if you're using interactive PDFs for replacing in PowerPoint presentation... because that will be used in full screen. You can force it to go into full screen... and you can do all your fun Page Transitions. So to do it, let's first of all switch out. At the moment we're on 'Essentials'. We're going to switch to 'Digital Publishing'... actually, let's use 'Interactive for PDF'. What it does is kind of rejects your workspace... just to show you the things you can do in interactive PDFs. And the main one here is Page Transitions. So what I'd like to do is-- be on the page that you want to do the transition to. So we're going to be on page 2... and it's kind of weird, this page, how to get to this page? So I would like it from page 1 to page 2... to maybe push down. So I'm going to go to Page Transitions, I'm going to say, I'd like you to... push down... and what you'll notice is, in your Pages panel... can you see this icon up here? That means that this particular page has a transition. This particular page, on page 3... I want to get to this one by going to push... let's go 'Push Left', to see the difference. Jump to the next page, and you can go through and play with them. You are banned from using Comb. You can see, little icons there. Not for any reason other than I hate Comb. 'Dissolve' works. Some do work, this doesn't. That kind of 3D page turn thing. That only works out of Flash SWF files... and they're just a format you can't use anymore. Fortunately you can use the rest of them... except for Page Turn and Comb, because I don't like it. The main ones would be Dissolve, Fade, and Push. So we'll use Dissolve here, let's see what they look like. So let's go and preview it. Like I said at the beginning... the Page Transitions have-- it has to be at full screen, so let's go 'File', and let's go to 'Export'. Let's have a little look. It's going to be called Catalog still, I'm going to replace the old one. If you've still got it open, like I do, in Acrobat-- I'm going to close this one down. So I'm going to replace it. This is the option you can do. You can say, when this PDF is open, go to full screen. This can be useful, say you're sending it out... to your boss, or your colleagues to use as a PowerPoint presentation, to replace it... when they double click it, it will open up in full screen... and the Transitions will work. Then it's hard work. So let's click 'Export', 'Oversee Text', I'm okay with that. It will load, it's going to say, I'm trying to load in full screen... I'm going to say, yes, it's okay. Cool. So I've got my first page here... and you can use your keys, your arrow keys... or just click once with the mouse, and it will move down. So 'Push Down' is not what I wanted. It's kind of, I think I want to 'Push Up'. Let's click on this one, 'Push Left'. That's kind of what I wanted. I want to push over that way, next one's Dissolve. That's almost terrible, you want Fade, not Dissolve, a bit blocky. So that's how to add Page Transitions... but remember, it only goes out to breaking PDF. So it doesn't work for Publish Online, and it doesn't work for ePub... but it has to be in full screen. So yes, great for presentations. All right, let's jump to the next video. 34. How To Add Navigation To An Interactive PDF In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to make our Navigation. Like this one in the side here, for an interactive PDF. When you click on 'Tables', jumps to the Tables page... and then the Chairs page, and then the Shelves. You know how navigation works... but you might not know how to create it in InDesign... so let's go and learn how to do that now. So to get the navigation to work... I'm going to have the navigation on every page... so it's a good idea to put it on the Master page. So I'm going to go to my 'Pages' panel... I'm going to go to 'A-Master', double click it. And what I want to do is... if I put it in here now, it's going to be at the bottom of my layers... especially on page 1, where I've got that-- whereas this big image here, it's not going to appear on top... it's going to appear below. So on the A-Master, I'm going to go to my Layers panel... and we haven't got any other layers, but Layer 1. I'm going to rename Layer 1, this is going to be called 'Main Content'. That's where everything goes at the moment. I'm going to make a new layer. Double click it, I'm going to call this one 'Navigation'. That's the one I'm going to work on. You just need to make sure it's blue and highlighted. I can close it back in there. Now what I'm going to do is make, kind of a ribbon navigation, like we saw. You can draw any which way you like, I'm going to do it-- I'm going to hit the 'W' key, so I'm not in preview. I'm going to grab the Rectangle tool. And I'll pick a Fill color of 'Maynooth'. I'm going to pickle through all of them, so I'll start with the 'Green'. I'm going to draw out a box, like this. And to get that little ?? in, there's a couple of ways. I'm going to use the method where, where I use the Pen tool. There's one that says 'Add Anchor Point'. Click on that, so I've held down the Pen tool, grabbed 'Add Anchor Point'... I'm going to hover somewhere in the middle, close-ish... so I've got another little Anchor Point. Now to move that little point around I use the White Arrow. So the White Arrow, I'm going to click it once, click off... click it once again, you can see... now this one's red and all the rest of them are white. So you might have to click off, click back on again... just so that one is selected. I'm going to zoom in a little bit. I'm just going to click, hold, and drag it in. Great! I'm going to grab the Type tool. Draw out a box, and this one's going to be called 'Tables'. And I click 'White', 'Paper'. So we've built some sort of navigation, doesn't really matter what. Actually what I might do... just put my Text box in there, and make it centered... so back to the Type tool, make it centered... because I'm going to adjust this for all the front navigation options. Centered might help. So I've got these two, I've selected both of them. I'm going to copy them. Holding the 'Alt' and dragging. You can just copy and paste them. This one's going to be 'Chairs', that's why I did centered. So that will kind of just end up being centered. And I will do a third option, this one is going to be... 'Shelves'. Exciting! Let's do the colors. You are going to be, and these guys are going to go on to the Nav. Nice. Pink. You, be the purple. For this to work properly as well, I need to group these two. So I've selected both of them, Black Arrow, I've gone 'Command G'... or 'Object', 'Group'. 'Command G', or 'Control G' on a PC, just to group them together. Let's have a look at our pages now. Because we're working on our Layers panel... remember, on this top layer, everything should be on top. So what I'm going to do is jump to 'Pages' panel, double click 'Page 1'... There's my Title, close it in, it's in there? So in all the pages I got this navigation. Obviously you can add your navigation anywhere. Now what I want to do is go back to my A-Master, so I double click in here... and let's add the Interactivity term. To do it we need to open up this 'Hyperlinks' panel. If you can't find it in there... just go to 'Window', 'Interactive'... and there's one in there called 'Hyperlinks'. And what I need to do is click on this guy... and in this hyperlink, I want to click on him. Now I want to say, I want you to go to Page. What page? I'm going to get it to go to, I can't remember. Tables, I think is the first page... well my first kind of text page, which is Page 2. Chairs is, I have no idea, I got to recheck. But you get the idea, right? So, this one's Tables, then Chairs, then Shelves. Can do, Dan. All right. So, with you selected, let's open up 'Hyperlinks'. I'm going to say, you go to page 3. And you go to page 4. Awesome! And because it's on the Master page... hopefully it's going to update on all the pages. Now this little feature works both, for interactive PDFs... and also works for Publish Online, and EPUB, which is really handy. So it's kind of those ones that you can do-- it's going to work on all the format you can think of. Let's preview it. So make sure my vision is closed in my Acrobat. So I've closed it down, I'm going to 'File', 'Export'. We'll give it the same name, 'Catalog'. 'Interactive' is the big part, click 'Save', replace the old one. And in here-- I'm going to turn off 'Show Full Screen' because it's annoying. Let's click 'Export'. The one thing you need to do is make sure that-- this is 'Include All'. That's one thing that can get turned off occasionally. So just make sure it's on. Let's click 'Export'. 'Overset text', I'm okay with that. And now, hopefully, Chairs, Tables, Shelves. So navigation and hyperlinks work perfect in interactive PDFs. It doesn't have to be full screen, like our Page Transitions... but it works in all the other formats as well, Publish Online, and EPUB. So that's going to be it for Interactive PDF. There's not a lot you can do that is consistent across lots of readers. So that is the problem with Interactive PDF, just do basic stuff. One of the things we haven't done here is Forms. I know it's kind of interactive... but it's got its own section in this video course, so go check that out. All right, on to the next video. 35. What Is Publish Online In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at what Publish Online is. Basically it takes your InDesign document... you get to add all sorts of interactive features... like I've added some animation to my navigation there, and this logo... plus lots of other things. Then you click on this big button here, it says 'Publish Online'... it publishes online, you click on 'View Document', and this opens. Here is my page, I'm going to reload it. And you're going to watch the logo fade in, and then... I'll wait for the logo to fade in... and then the terrible timing on my navigation... look how slowly that comes in. That is totally my fault... but this is our web hosted solution... so Adobe hosts it, everything works in here, the navigation works... eventually when it loads... bad, Dan... but you can do all sorts of things in here, and it's hosted, people can click on it. You can embed it in your own website. It is probably by far the best option... for distributing InDesign documents, I feel, at the moment. Let's go and learn how to do this... and make terrible timing with my navigation together. Let's go do that. So to make the animation happen... what we're going to do is click on our bit of text from page 1... and we're going to go to our Animation panel. I've switched from 'Interactive PDF' to 'Digital Publishing', along the top here. You might be on 'Essentials', so switch to 'Digital Publishing'. And along here, you can go to 'Animation'. If you can't find any of those, you can go to 'Window', and go to 'Interactive'... and here are all those same panels, I'm going to click on 'Animation'. With it selected, I'm going to say, a 'Preset' please, of a 'Fade In'. And this is going to fade in. Now to preview this, the easiest way is, there's an option down the bottom... that says 'EPUB Interactivity'. Click on this. Now by default it's quite small, it's like this small. It's nice just to grab the bottom left corner... and make it a little bit bigger to see if you can see it. Make sure, on this first option here, preview just the one page... and let's click the 'Play' button, and watch this little-- if I 'Fade In', ready, 'Play', give it a second. As it loads, that thing fades in. So that's one of the perks for using Publish Online, you get to use animation. Now we've done a Fade, let's do one more. I'm going to select on the logo here. I'm going to go to 'Animation', and I'm going to use 'Choose'. And I'll go 'Fly in from-- not the top. I'll use 'Fly in from Right'. And there's one or two things you can change... you can make it take a longer duration. You can get it to play a couple of times, and get it to loop forever. Speed, it's easing in and out by default. I like the way it defaults in. So there's a few other things you get to change... but we'll just leave it as default. And you'll notice this little green line, kind of indicating its animation. If you can't see, you might have the 'W' key selected. And you can't see any of those sort of stuff, so 'W' again. Let's go back to our EPUB Interactivity preview. You've got to keep clicking Play to kind of get it to reset, so watch. Fade in, and this should slide in. Fade in, slide in. Ah, so good! So once you've got your animations working... you can start playing around with the timing. Let's say I want these little navigation bars to start-- I want to get him to slide in, these little tabs here... but maybe one after each other. So what we can do is go to our 'A-Master', just click on 'Tables'. And I'm going to do the same animation. I'm going to get it to slide in from the right. I'm going to do that for all of them. So I'm going to get you and you, you can select more than one. And I'm going to say, you, slide in from the right as well. 'Slide in from the right'. It also has to do with the timing. So I've got these three options here, I'm going to go to 'Timing'. And they're just called group, group, group. That's the first one, that's the second one, that's the third one. It's on this page. It's only looking at what page we have open. This first one here, I'm going to say... you my friend, load, maybe after '1' second. That will give the title time to appear. And the little slide in from the logo. This one here is going to be '1.5'... and then this last one is going to be '2' seconds. Just so there's a bit of staggered loading. Let's give it a preview, so I'm going to go back to 'Page 1'. Go for my EPUB Interactivity. Hit 'Play', kick back, relax, be amazed. You appear, you appear, and then the navigation appears. And the delay, be amazed, with my terrible timing. So you might have to go and speed that timing up. I'll probably do something a lot faster than that. Let's just say that's okay. Now to publish this online you can click this button up here in the top right... or there's another option, 'File', 'Publish Online'. It doesn't matter which one, they end up at the same place. Now what we'll do is we'll just quickly cover this one. So this is going to be 'MF Catalog 2019'. This title actually gets seen by people, so MF is not the best acronym... as you've probably worked out, so 'Maynooth Furniture'. No, I can't spell. So people see this. We'll go through the more advanced stuff later on in the next video... but let's just go through the general stuff, let's just click 'Publish'. So this can take a little while. I'll get the editor to speed it up, and I'll meet you at the other end. So that didn't take very long at all. So what we've got now is a web hosted version of our document. So let's click on 'View Document'. I'm going to refresh this so you can see my amazing timing. He fades in, he slides in, he comes in, and then... oh, my goodness, a million years later these slide in. The cool thing about this is, you get to do these animations... which can't be done in Interactive PDFs, it can be done in EPUB. But what's really nice is that it appears in a website. You can link to this, you can embed it on your sites. We'll go through a few more details, but this is Publish Online... and it's just-- Adobe hosted, it all works. All the interactivity works. Oh, my terrible navigation's on every page. So I might have to fix that. You can use the navigation as long as you're prepared to wait for it, Dan. So, Publish Online is just an Adobe hosted website version... of your InDesign document. And the cool thing about it is, everything just works. So let's go back into InDesign now... and look at all the different things we get to do... inside the Publish Online feature. So it's not just animation, like we did, there's lots more to do. Let's go do it now. 36. How To Publish Your Adobe InDesign Publish Online Documents : So let's go through the publishing a little bit more in depth. Let's go to 'Publish Online'. Couple of things you can do is, I've made some changes. What I want to do is, instead of publishing a new document every time... I can go to 'Update Existing Document'... and I'd like to update that first one that I made. The reason this is good is that I can make changes to a catalog... let's say I find a typo, or I want to change an image out... I can do that, and I don't have to change the link I've given everybody. Other options we can play around with... we can allow people to download a PDF version if they want. So I'm going to have all the interactivity, but it can be handy for people. You can turn this off, so people can't share... or take their own kind of copy of your document... you can keep it a bit more super secret. It makes it harder for people to grab. Let's have a look at some of the advanced features. We can decide on which pages we want. We can decide on what Thumbnail. You can see, it just picked the cover from my Thumbnail. I can choose an image, and replace that... and make one design specifically for being a Thumbnail. And when this thing exports... down here, we can decide on what quality it is. '96' looks great. You can make it HiDPI, which is 144. The file size gets bigger, and it takes a lot longer to download. It's up to you, whether you want a-- basically, you're looking after things like Retina displays... like my MacBook Pro here... but, really uncommon... and I think, taking a long time to download... is more important than looking is, best as it can... on a really limited number, on laptops. So, it's a good standard. That's it for this window, you click 'Publish'... and it's going to update, that's great. What I want to show you now is some of the analytics that are in the background. So back into InDesign, if we go to 'File'... and then go to one that says 'Publish Online Dashboard'. It opens up this website here. This one is for my Publish Online Dashboard. These are all my other publications. And what I really like about them is this Analytics tab. This Analytics tab tells me things like how many times the document's being viewed. How many readers? So you can have a reader who maybe watch it 40 times... and that accounts for the views... but this is specific people, the Average Read Time. Total Read Time. So, what's really handy about this... check that you're looking at hours and minutes, can you see? Sometimes you get a bit confused by the numbers... I do at least, along the top there. What I find that it's really useful for, especially if you're thinking-- we're going to give this a go, this Publish Online. I wonder if it's going to work for our readership... is to do a test, and then you can come back to it... once you've done it, and say, nobody read it... or loads of people are reading it for a long time. So gives you some sort of data and metrics. And you can also compare month to month. The people who read the January one... are not longer than the February newsletter that we did. So it gives you trackable analytics. Now the thing is, when you kind of, maybe send out an email with a link... just give it a second, it takes about 90 minutes to actually refresh. So if you've sent that out, and you're like, "Nobody's reading it"... give it an hour and half or so to just refresh all of this. So it takes a little while for this data to get collected. You can click on, over here, we're on Overview page... you can click on 'Document Trends', and you can actually see... these are the ones I've just been practicing with... you can see, it's only had two views. That can be a bit disappointing. I'm not sure who these two readers are, because it's just me watching it... but it's really useful to kind of see this sort of stuff that-- It's one of the things that I find really hard with the traditional printers. You send things out, and, did they work, did they not work? Really hard to track reliably... but with something like Publish Online, super easy. So that's more advanced publishing. Let's go through and look at all the features... you can do with Publish Online. 37. How To Add Video To Adobe InDesign CC Documents : Hi there, in this tutorial we're going to look at how to add video... like this stuff in the background, that you put in yourself. And we'll look at those guys here where we're doing YouTube video. Hey, it's me, I'm saying "Hi" there. So we're going to add a video from myself... and video from YouTube, and Vimeo. All sorts of video. And we're going to publish it online in our Interactive Catalog. To add those two videos, we'll do our own video first. We're going to go down to our 'Chairs & Benches' page, so page 3. We need to find this Media Tab, if you can't find it over here... go to 'Window', 'Interactive', and go to 'Media'. So in here, I'm going to, this little button down the bottom right here... and we're going to do video... but you can totally do a mp3 file if you just want audio. We're going to go to 'Exercise Files', go to '04 Interactive'. There's only one mp4 in there. I got this from this website here... shared up to PexelsVideo. So videos.pexels.com, I'm probably not saying that right... but there are free commercial use stuff, library stuff in here. Oh, awesome! So I've used some stuff, let's jump back into InDesign. So, 'Video.mp4', let's click 'Open'. And your cursor becomes loaded, what I'm going to do is drag it out... to any odd size... because I want to resize it afterwards. So it's too-- it's not quite how I want it. So I'm going to right click it... and use our 'Fitting'... and this, 'Fit Frame to Content'. So the box is the same size. What I want to do, I want to use it like a... a bit of a graphic in the background, I'll make it nice and big. And I'm going to kind of crop it in, and then maybe... double click the center... and move it across a bit. So we're doing some kind of cropping. Because it's kind of an abstract style video... it's kind of blurred out, I'm okay that it's just kind of cropped in a bit. You might not have the luxury to do that. The other thing to do is, this is on a wrong layer now. It's because, over here, my Layers panel... we were working on that navigation earlier. So it's ended up in the wrong page. What I can do is, with it selected... I can grab this dot, and just drag it down to this layer here... and say, you're now in the main content... because I want the navigation to be above it. Now what I'm going to do, I'm going to clear off... and lock that Navigation layer, so I don't wreck it. So I've got a video here. You've got some basic options. You can go over here and say-- there's a 'Play on Page Load'... that's what I want... because I don't want to control this. If you do want to control this... 'Skin Overall, we'll leave them on just so you can see them. I don't want them, so I'm going to get it to play by itself... otherwise if you don't have controls, it's not going to play. Next thing to do is preview it. There's EPUB Interactivity... you can try, click on the first page, hit 'Play'... and because we're on page 3, it should play page 3. There's my little navigation, slightly appearing over it... and there's my video playing. This will work when I hit 'Publish Online'. Takes a little time to publish online, so I'm going to leave that... but you can see in here. I put the controllers in... watch this, if I roll up over... there's a little Playhead that appears. So you can go and turn those on and off... by closing that down, click on this guy, and go to 'Media'... and with it selected, you can decide, actually I don't want... any kind of play control, just want it to play by itself. The one thing to know about using videos in your page... is that the document can become quite big, and take a long time to load. What you might find easier... is to use, say Vimeo or YouTube videos... rather than your own videos that you floated into here. Both YouTube and Vimeo have great servers all over the place... and they do that lovely buffering thing. You can adjust the quality of them... depending on how fast your internet connection is. So there's some perks for using YouTube... especially if you've got lots of video... you don't want lots of videos bloating out your Page Load... and it taking a very long time. So first of all we need to jump out to YouTube or Vimeo. So in YouTube, find a video... any video, as long as it's got a picture of me in it. Once you've found it... what you're looking for is the 'Share' option down here. And in the Share option, there's one called 'Embed'... and that's the trick that we need. So there's a couple of things we can do in here before we get into InDesign. We came down here to say... wherever we want to have those suggestive videos at the end... I don't want those to appear at the end of my video. Do I want the video title? Can you see along the top there? I'm going to turn that off, I don't like that there. So I'm going to have the player controls to play or pause... that's totally going to be there... and that's the main perks of it. In terms of the height and width... it's harder to change it in InDesign later on. So if you know the height and width you want it to be... you can type it in here. There is a way of adjusting it, and then design afterwards... I'll show you how. Let's click 'Copy', jump back into InDesign... and all you do is go 'Edit', 'Paste', I'm going to use the shortcut. And that little kind of cube appears for a little while... and eventually it turns it into a YouTube video, there it is, cool. So I don't have a space for it here, I should. I was just going to make this text up here, and you're going to be coming down there. You can preview it in your EPUB Interactivity. Go to, on the right page, we're going to hit 'Play'. Give it a second, that's going to play... there's my YouTube clip and it plays in here. Now it doesn't play properly in this little clip here... it does when you publish online. One of the things I want to do before you go... is let's say you want to resize it. If I resize it just like I do in image, to fit... unfortunately it will, when I go back to my EPUB Reader - I've made it that big, watch this, if I hit 'Play'... - it goes back to its original size. So it's kind of coded to be that size. So what I'd like to do is, I'm going to scale that up to the size I want. Here we go, so I want it to be about that sort of size. I'm going to take these dimensions here. So '782' + '445'. And what you do is, right click it, go to 'Edit HTML'... and you need to type these in here, at least be proportionately high. So 782 x 445, click 'OK'. Now, if I go into my EPUB Interactivity preview thing... it should be the right size. So you can either do that in YouTube before you bring it in... or you can right click it like I did, and edit the HTML. If you're using Vimeo, it's the exact same option in Vimeo. So, in Vimeo here... remember you're only allowed to pick videos that have me in them. Then find the video you like, click on 'Share', see this little dart? And in here, you're looking for the same thing, you're looking for Embed. Vimeo has a nice little option, it says 'Show Options'... and you can decide on your height and width here... before you go into InDesign. The same sort of thing, you can 'Auto play' it. Do you need the text, does the video loop? Select all of this, copy it, and just paste it into InDesign. All right buddies, that is using video inside Publish Online in Adobe InDesign. 38. How To Create Interactive Button Triggered Animations In InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... one of the features for Publish Online and EPUB... where we click on a button, get ready, steady... and the address slides down. So Button Controlled Animations... let's look at how to do that now in Adobe InDesign. So one of the really nice features of Publish Online... is kind of interactive buttons. This particular technique will work for EPUB as well, once we get on to that. What I want to do is make that interactive map like we saw at the beginning. So what we'll do is, on our Pages panel, I'll go to my last page, double click it. Click on 'New page', you get a blank page. It's going to say, "Hey, we're messing around with pages". We had some transitions, don't worry about it... because we're not using as Page Transitions... because they only work in interactive PDF, in full screen. So I'm going to go and turn those off in a minute anyway. So page 7, I want my 'W' key to make it look nice, zoom out a little bit. Let's bring in a couple of graphics. I'm going to bring in my-- it's in '04 Interactive', there's one called 'Map1 World'. Click once, so I got a nice big map. Let's bring in the icon as well, so 'Map2 icon'. Click once, and we've got the map for US. I'm going to copy and paste it. Turn it around for the UK, paste it again. And one for New Zealand. Those are the different addresses for Maynooth Furnitures. So let's get the address. It's in the 'Exercise Files' called 'Map3 Addresses'. And just grab the 'UK Store' to start with, I'm going to copy that. And here in InDesign, I'm going to do a little bit of a rectangle. Click the pink. Grab the Type tool, I'm going to hit 'W' so I can see my background. Draw the type out here, paste it in. I want to make it 'Paper'. And I might lower the font size a little, actually just grab my Black Arrow... and just move it into place mode, adjust it over here. Maybe it's the right size already. Here it is, I like it that size. First of all we need this thing to animate... and I'm going to get it to end up about there. So you can see, mine's kind of right there, 'W' key. Somewhere right there. I'm going to have to group these together... because I want them to animate together. So I'm going to go 'Command G', or 'Control G' on a PC. Let's first do our animation, let's go to 'Animation'. Let's give it a name. I left these other ones called Group. That was called Group, Group... That's not very well named. Makes it a little bit hard to animate later on. I'm going to call this one 'UK Address'. The preset that I'd like to give it, is I'd like it to fly in from the top. Let's just have a little preview in EPUB Interactivity. Hit 'Play', wait a second. You can see there, just kind of fades down. Now we need to get it to be triggered by the button... because at the moment it's getting loaded during the page load. So the page comes up in the screen, and then it slides down. I'm going to stop that, and get the button to control it. It's pretty easy, click on the icon that I want to turn into a button. Let's go to 'Buttons', and let's click on 'Type', and it should be a 'Button'. I'll give my button a name, I'm going to call this 'Button UK'. And under here where it says 'Actions'... I would like this option here that says 'Animation'. That says 'SWF/EPUB only', but it works perfect in Publish Online. Let's click 'Animation'. Which animation do I want it to play? I want it to play the UK Address. These other three groups are from these guys that I didn't name... Tables, Chairs, and Shelves. Remember, the slow, sliding in. So I want it to play animation called UK Address. So it's going to kind of work... because if I go down to EPUB Interactivity, and hit 'Play'... it slides down, but if I hit 'Button'... it works, but it's also playing when the page loads. So I'm going to turn that off. I'm going to click on him. Go to 'Animation'. There's an option down here... it says, actually, Animation, it says Events. At the moment it's got two. On page load, which it can load by default... and now there's one called 'On Release'. So when I release that button, it plays. So I'm just going to drop that down, and say... actually I want the Button, but I don't want the Page Load. Now, if I go down to my EPUB Interactivity, hit 'Play'... ready... doesn’t appear until I click this button. Awesome, huh. I like you to go through and practice doing the US. So make a little box, put some Type in it... put the Address Type in it, group it, animate it any way you like... then create the button to get it to load... and then turn off the 'On Page Load'. That could be the worst example of go off and do it. I guess what I want you to do is... just do that again, see if you can do it for the US one. You can replay the video, it's totally up to you... but have a practice on these other two using different bits of animation. One of the other things you might do... this button, it's being triggered - where's my buttons? - is been triggered, something called 'On Release'. It just means it's being clicked, so when it gets clicked... when the mouse is released, or tapped on the screen... only then it's going to work. You could have 'On Roll Over'. That's quite a common one to have as well. So that when I click here, hit 'Play'... I'm not going to click it with my mouse, I'm just going to roll my mouse over. And then it starts doing it. Now I totally lied, it does work when you go to Publish Online or EPUB... but it doesn't work in this little EPUB Interactivity. It totally works when it goes out... but when it's in this tiny little preview window... it's not quite working properly... but it totally does, trust me, when you roll over it. So we've done it with just some text popping in. You could have like another navigation down the side here to pick images... and the images could slide in, do it for images. So you might have to think outside of the box... to work out how you might make this work for you... in terms of communicating information on one page. So let's go and look at some of the other features we can do with Publish Online. 39. How To Make A Multi State Object In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at something called a Multi State Object. And what it means is, I can click on this button... and cycle through all these lovely images. That's a Multi State Object, let's look at how to make that now in InDesign. So let's make that happen, we're going to work... on the Bedside Tables page, it's page 5. So, first of all let's bring in some images we want to toggle through. So we're going to go to 'File', 'Place', or 'Command D' on a Mac. 'Control D' on a PC. And we're going to bring in Wood1, Wood2, and Wood3. You don't have to bring them all together in one go, but that can be handy. Click 'Open'. And I'm going to click once, twice, three times, just clicking on the page. I've got mine relatively the right size... just to save time over this, all trying to crop them, because... I've got them all in the same place, you might not. You might have to line them... you might have to drag them so they all line up on top of each other. So once that's happened... I'm going to select them all by dragging a box over all of them. Then I'm going to line this up kind of underneath here. So that's where I want them to be. So with them all selected still, we're going to go to our 'Object States'. And we're going to click on this little new 'Multi State Object' button. And you can see, those are the three states we get to toggle through. You can see, I can switch through them, like this. So I'm going to have State 1 as my first state. And what I'll do is I'll give this a name. You can have more than one Multi State Object on a page. I'm going to have this one called 'Wood Types'. So now we need a button to control them. And what we're going to do is... we're going to create a button down the bottom here. We're going to drag it like a little colored box here. I'm going to add some Type to it. Maybe Type box, I'm going to say... 'Click for Wood Types'. Probably not my best Button naming. I'm going to make it as well, white, and Paper. So that's going to be my Button. I'm going to group them together. So my Button is either the Type or the Colored box. Now we need to get this thing to work. It's a problem there, a little bit, I want something down a little bit. So to make them work we first need to make them into a button. So click on 'Buttons and Forms', 'Type', it's going to be 'Button'. And what I'd like to do is, we should give it a name. I always call mine button at the beginning. This one's going to be 'Wood Types'. Just, because we end up sometimes with lots of buttons, and not sure who's who. So, under 'Event', mine's going to be, when it's clicked... the action is going to be 'Go to State'. Actually, really 'Go to Next State'. Basically it's just kind of-- whenever it's clicked, it's going to go to the very next state... and the very next state, and the very next state. So it's going to be like a toggle. You could in this case have three buttons... and instead of saying 'Go to Next State', you can say, go to a specific state. So State 1, or State 2. I'm going to delete that. I just wanted to toggle through, go to Next State. If I've confused you, let's just give it a go. So let's go to our 'EPUB Interactivity', hit 'Play'. Now I can click on this button, and it just cycles through them all. Cool, huh! So there's my three different Wood Type options. To make it happen you have two separate things. You have this, which is your Multi State Object... then you have some sort of control. And in our case, it is just this button here. It says, go to the next one, please. One of the options in there was to go to previous. You could have a forward and a back button. So that's it for Multi State Objects. Let's get on to the next video. 40. How To Add Adobe Animate CC To InDesign CC Files : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... how to put in animations... that you've created in Adobe Animate CC. And bring them into InDesign... then publish them through our Publish Online option. Sounds complicated, it's not, just animations in InDesign. All right, let's go and learn how to make that happen now in InDesign. First thing we need to do is, let's create a blank page for it to be on. I'm on page 7, new page. It's okay. So I've got a blank page, we're going to bring in our Animate CC animation. So we've got a file ready to go. So in your 'Exercise Files'... in your folder called '04 Interactive', there's a folder called 'Animate CC'. Open up the 'Elephant.fla'. That will open up the project in Adobe Animate. So this is not going to be how to make animations in Adobe Animate. I've got a full course on how to do this, of course, I do. This is me trying to cross sell it to you. So go check it out, and you can do it... for animations for banner ads, for e-learning... because you can only do real basic animations in InDesign. Remember, our kind of like, sliding from the top, and sliding from the left... whereas Animate, you can make fully interactive, fully immersive animations. I've got this file here, it's already been animated, I'll preview it. Here he is, walking along. So we've got our animation, what we really want to do is... we want to be able to export this in the right format. So back into Animate CC... in Animate CC, what you want to do, is go to 'File'... we want to go to 'Publish Settings'... and there's kind of two things we want to do. We want to turn on this one called 'OAM Package'. That is the file we're going to need to work into InDesign. The exact same file format works when you go into Adobe Muse as well. So if you're doing animations... and you want to go into your web project using Muse... use the same format. The other thing you need to change is, up here, where it says 'JavaScript/HTML'... we need a couple of things on, turn 'Loop Timeline' on... because we want this elephantine one through and loop... and I think that's on by default. The thing that's not on by default... is this one here, it says 'Make Responsive', 'Both'. It just means that when we scale it in InDesign... it's actually going to scale properly... otherwise it just won't scale. So make sure, 'Loop' and 'Make Responsive' both... is turned on, then click this button, 'Publish', not 'OK'. Click on this very important 'Publish' button. Once that's done, you get to click on 'OK'. Let's see the file that's been created. So here in my file, that's the file that got generated. I've got it here for you in your exercise files. You don't have to go and do it, but that's the one we want. So back into InDesign. Here in InDesign, just go to 'File', 'Place'. Find that same folder, find that 'oam' file format. Click 'Open', and you can place him in. Let's preview it here in our EPUB. And there is our little walking elephant. I'll close it down. Now, we've done our walking elephant, it's one of the defaults from Animate. It's not obviously communicating anything useful for our Furniture Place. So what you want to do is, think e-learning... think communicating kind of ideas through animation... rather than just trying to expand the text. It could be some sort of animation that kind of helps communicate how... maybe furniture goes together. You'll have your own ideas for your particular project. So go out, do a bit of Animate CC. If you've done Flash in the past... it's exactly the same as Flash, they've just renamed it... but it works perfectly through Publish Online and EPUB. All you need to do is export it as that oam option. All right, that's it, let's jump into the next video. 41. Adding Maps & Calendars To Interactive Documents In InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at Embed codes. Basically in this one, we're going to look at maps. You can see, I've got a page, it's in Publish Online... and look, it's fully interactive. Cool, huh! So let's look at how to do that now in Adobe InDesign. First thing to do is, I'm on Page A, don't want to make a new page. Not going to worry about the transitions. This is where I'm going to paste my map. So, to get the code that we need, we're going to jump to Google Maps. Find the place, I found-- this just happens to be the place below my office... because my office doesn't have a pin in Google Map, so I just picked him. This is where I get my lunch, so I had lunch today. Information you did not need to know, or you do need to know... is click on 'Share'... and click on this one that says 'Embed Map'. Now I'm going to pick the 'Large' size map. And I'm going to select all this code in here, and hit copy on my keyboard. So 'Command C', or 'Control C' on a PC. Back in here, I'm going to go to 'Object'... and I'm going to going to 'Insert HTML'. I'll 'paste' it in there, click 'OK'. I'll drag it up here. I'll make it nice and big, give it a second. Hopefully... Now it loads. You need to be connected to the net, this may take a while. One, two, three... I'll speed this up. I give up, just waiting for it to work. I'm going to click on 'EPUB Interactivity', hit 'Play', and hope for the best. We got a tiny map, there it is there, we can see him. So, when I'm dragging this out... so it was there, that little gray dot there. So when I drag it out, I need to hold down... the 'Command Shift' key, just to make it bigger. Maybe just the 'Command' key to resize it. Now, hopefully... Let's go to 'EPUB Interactivity'. Hit 'Play'. There's my map. Don't worry if it doesn't load properly in InDesign. It's where the red appears here in EPUB, or double check in your Publish Online. That can be a little tricky sometimes, getting the right sizes, and getting it in. So, to resize it properly, hold down the 'Command' key... rather than you just dragging the edges of it... because it stays in that little box there. So hold down 'Command Shift'... if you want to do it proportionately squared... then check in here, hit 'Play', it's going to be a slightly different size now. So that is how to embed a map on your Publish Online document. Now if you can find anything that has an embed code... like a Twitter feed, or a Facebook feed, you can embed that as well. Google Calendars has a way to embed on sites. So depending on what you're using, have a look, see if it has an Embed. I know Eventbrite Ticketing does it there. I think PayPal has PayPal buttons that can be embedded. There's all sorts of things that can go into your Publish Online document... by just copying and pasting the embed code, that's the key word, look for that. All right, next video. 42. How To Create QR Codes In Adobe InDesign CC: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... how to make this QR code, here in the top left. When it gets used, it's going to open up a website. Awesome! Let's go and learn how to make that now. So to create a QR code, I'm on my page 1... I'm going to go up to 'Object', 'Generate QR Code'. Now, by default it's going to be a web hyperlink... and that's the one that people use the most. You can have it to be an email address. These other ones are a bit weird... if you use a QR code, and it will give you some text. You could use it like, I don't know, a treasure hunt map thing. It could give you text clues, not sure why you would. Hyperlink is probably the most important one. Type in the URL, that it wants to go to. Then pick a color, I'm picking 'Paper' for mine... because I want it to go on this dark background here... but you could pick any color, it works for most colors. When I say most colors, I mean, if I put black on this... it's probably not going to get read by the camera of the cell phone. So black's going to be a nice good contrast. Then you can just drag it out the size you need it to be. Now, give it some test before you go out to print. Just to make sure that it can be read by a QR Code Reader. That's how to do a QR Code, really. You can select on him, and go to 'Object', 'Edit QR Code'... to adjust it if you need to, or change the color. The awkward bit, the QR Code Reader thing that nobody uses. It's up to you, you might find a really good use for this... but the problem with QR Code Readers... or QR Codes in general... is that nobody has a QR Code Reader on their cell phone by default. So people have to download it, and use it that way. Now the trouble is, it's like, I've done it... but I'm a super nerd when it comes to this sort of stuff. I need a QR Code Reader... but it's just not something on by default... so it's not a really good mass use. Now sometimes I put it on things, just for like, it's kind of like... cool person, social proof like... look how cool we are with QR Codes, that nobody's going to use. A Twitter, and Facebook, and YouTube, and a QR Code... I don't know, I find it's kind of part of that... proving how cool you are, and how techy you are... but you've got to, I guess, not rely on it, because I find-- it could be just me, you could be in a different situation... you might love QR Codes... and have a good use for using them... but just make sure you're not 100% relying on it. I'll probably have a web address on there as well. That's going to be the end of interact-- I've kind of shot you down in the last video. I felt like, let's do all this cool Publish Online... and then I kind of shot you down with the QR Code. You might love it, do QR codes. That's going to be it for interactive stuff for the moment. We're going to get into some shortcuts next. Let's go and do that now in Adobe InDesign. Sorry QRs. 43. Keyboard Shortcuts In Adobe InDesign CC That Will Change Your Life : Hi there, this video is going to be... all about super-duper awesome keyboard shortcuts. Now, I'm going to go through them all here... all the ones that I think are amazing. What I'll do is create a shortcut sheet at the end of this course. So there'll be a PDF that you can download. I don't have it yet, so I haven't made it... but you'll be able to jump out to bringyourownlaptop.com then click on this button here that says 'Resources'. So here are all my shortcut sheets for other products. You might be using some of these other ones as well, so download those. There's a PDF you can download as well, and print out. Here is an InDesign one here, that's for my Intro course. It's going to have a few other shortcuts we cover here... but I'm going to make a new one for advanced super-duper people. There's some other InDesign ones down the bottom that I did a long time ago. InDesign one. There's lots of shortcut sheets here under the 'Resources'. Let's go through now, and do them together. Back into InDesign. So the first one I use quite a bit is the 'X' key. So I'm going to click on this guy, I'd like to adjust the Stroke and the Fill. We all know that these little guys here are always too small to click on. The 'X' key just kind of toggles between the two. See, X, X, X, X. So I want the Fill in the front, then the Stroke in the front. So I'm going to have a 'Fill' of red, and a 'Stroke' of yellow. You can see, it's just nice and quick to toggle the X key. That works in Photoshop and Illustrator as well. Another one to do is... I like the back slash '\' key, so I select on him... and the Fill's in the front, I just hit the forward slash '/' key actually. It's where your question mark is normally. Mine's down next to the period or the full stop. So that's your forward slash, and that just says, clear it out. Have no Fill, you, no Fill, you, no Fill. Just a really easy one. To add a Fill, just hit the comma key, and that fills it in with a Fill. You can use the period key as well to add a Gradient... but nobody wants to add a Gradient. So the main one is the forward slash... but if it doesn't have a Fill, you can hit the comma key. All right, let's get into something a little fancier. I felt like that was going to be a really cool first one, maybe it's not. Another one that I use quite a bit, is 'Command J', or 'Control J' on a PC. We'll go to 'page 1', hit 'Enter'. I know it's not really a shortcut... but when you're working with a long document... you're like 'Command J', down to '10', 'Return'. You can turn it into, like a little smooth motion. I find that I use that shortcut quite a bit. It's 'Command J', or 'Control J' on a PC. Another one we've used quite a lot in this course already... is 'Command J', go to page 1, I want to make the font size bigger. So I'm going to make this box that it goes into bigger. Then I just hold down the 'Command Shift', then hit the full stop. So if you're on a PC, it's 'Control-Shift-.' Makes the font bigger. And if you use the comma key, gets smaller. It's actually the greater than '>' and the less than '<' key... but I find they're easy to find when you say period and comma. So that's the font up and down. Leading and Kerning, so let's say I want... this collection here to tighten in a little bit... instead of going up to here, and finding the tracking in here... I can just hold down the 'Option' key on a Mac... or the 'Alt' key on a PC, and just use the left arrow. You can see, just tightens it in. The right arrow opens it up. And you can do it up here later, just via the cursor flashing, the same keys. So 'Option' in and out, or 'Alt' in and out on a PC. Just a bit of a tracking, kerning thing. You can go through and just-- The other one you can do is Leading. So what I'm going to do is break these on to two lines with a 'Return'. What I'm going to do is actually find some text in here. Actually I'll find you on this next page. I'll select these guys, and I could do my Tracking, with left and right... but if I hold 'Option' down... or 'Alt' down on a PC... you can play around with the Leading... without having to go into, down here, and find this one. So left and right is Tracking... and up and down is the Leading. Now that kind of brings me up to one, I kind of said, between these two... like toggling between these two is a real big pain. It's a hard shortcut to remember, but take your time... write it down, practice it the next week, and you'll save a huge amount of time. And it's basically 'Command-Option-7' on a Mac. And you can see, just toggles between them, super useful. On a PC, it's 'Control-Alt-7'. On for whenever I'm on character, when I want to be on paragraph. Whenever I want to be on paragraph, I'm on character. It's always backwards, so I select on here... 'Command-Option-7'... and I can get my space after, I can play around with that. And I want to go back to character, and I've got it up here. You might disagree with that one being a shortcut. I use it all the time, toggling between these two. Let's go to the next one. So the next one is when you're working on documents with Spreads. We probably all know that 'Command 0' will kind of center it. So if you're moving around, you get 'Command 0', just centers the page. Problem is you want to see the whole screen. So what you need to do is hold 'Command-Option-0'. So on a PC, it's 'Control-Option-0'. Just kind of centers the screen. The other thing you might have known, is if you use PgDn... for some reason it just kind of weirdly offsets. It never goes to the next page, it kind of does that, plus a little bit more. So what you can do is, you can hold down 'Option-PgDn'. And it will toggle to the centers of the next word, so good. So if you're on a MacBook Pro, like me, you don't have a PgDn button. So in my case I have to hold down 'Function-Option'... then hit the 'Down' button, or the 'Up' button. Print out the shortcut sheet, write them down... practice them for a little while... if they still don't stick, they were never meant to be... but I find that's a really handy one. Let's jump back into the document we had. Now, let's say I want to bring in some text. I'm going to go down to my page that I'm making. This one here. So I want to bring in some text, so I'm going to go to 'File', 'Place'. And it's some Word document, so I would like to have some-- I want to show the Import option. So I'm going to go to my 'Exercise Files'... I'll open up '03 Magazine', and here's the 'Magazine Text'. But I want to turn this on. We all know, if I turn this on, and then I click 'Open'... I get the options, which is really cool... but then when I go to bring in my image next, I forget to turn it off... and this thing appears, and I'm like... "Ah, I'm going to turn it off. I never remember him." It annoys you for long enough, and eventually go off, and go to 'Place'... and you turn this thing off. What if there was a way to turn it on temporarily? There is. All you need to do is, say, I want to bring in 'Magazine Text'... hold 'Shift' while you click 'Open'... it will give you import options... but it only turns it on for that one single time. So now you can go through and do it, and when you go back to 'File', 'Place'... you can see, it's still turned off. So just hold 'Shift' when you click on your file... click 'Open' to get some extra options. The next one is kind of a selection trick, so let's go up to page 1. Now I've got this kind of structure where I've got a QR Code... underneath the QR Code is a gray box, so a black box... underneath that is an image. It's a bit of a, kind of a rigmarole bit of a thing. To get to the image, I need to drag him off, then select on him. So the trick is, with your Black Arrow selected... is hold down the 'Command' key on a Mac, or 'Control' key on a PC... click this top one, that gives you the gray box... click again, and I got the image. Hit 'Delete'; that's a way of selecting things underneath each other... if there's a pile of stuff on top. So just keep holding the 'Command' key, if I click on him... hold 'Command' key, clicks the black box, then clicks the image... and then eventually comes back to the beginning here. So it just cycles through all the different things to click on. A little side note that works in Photoshop as well, which is super handy. Especially when you've got loads of layers everywhere. Next trick is to do with Master pages. Now, on my Master page on this one, I've got all of these guys, plus this. And it's applied to all the pages... but let's say I want to turn these off on just one of the pages. So let's go down to the last page... and let's say I don't need them on this page... but I can't click on them, or can I? Hold down 'Command Shift' on a Mac, or 'Control Shift' on a PC. Just click on them, they get kind of... ripped off the Master page, and I can say "Goodbye." Same with him, goodbye. These are still part of the Master page, can't click on them. And if I add anything to my Master page, it will still be part of it... but it's a nice trick to uniquely remove things. So let's say you've got page numbers on all the pages... but this is some that just don't need to be there... because there's maybe an ad on it, or something. You can just 'Command Shift', and click on them... or 'Control Shift', click on them, for a PC, and that pulls them out. You could not delete them, you might just change the color of them... or the layer, or something... but it's a great way of dragging them out of the Master page... and making them accessible. Another trick is Power Zoom. Let's go to see them. Let's say we've zoomed in... and we're working on New Zealand, because it's awesome. While you zoom out, what you can do is hold the 'space bar'. So the space bar, remember, is our kind of moving around... but if you hold 'space bar', and you click and hold... it kind of zooms out, and you can kind of go over here. So it kind of goes in and out to the same zoom level, which is quite nice. So I can hold my 'space bar', click and hold the mouse. Comes up, and I want to look in this one, and this one, and this one. So that's Power Zoom, and it's just to do with space bar. You just hold the mouse key down for a long time, and it will zoom out. That particular one works lots better in Photoshop as well. It's useful, and I know it from Photoshop mainly... because when you're retouching, and you're in that close... you can do the exact same thing without having to zoom all the way out... move across, and zoom back in. The next shortcut is kind of temporarily using one of these tools. Let's say we live our life in the Selection tool... that's the one we use the most... but when we want to use our Rectangle Marking tool... which is the M key... so instead of switching to it, drawing it, and then having to switch back to this... what you can do is just hold the 'M' key down... which is the shortcut for this one. You can kind of see in the brackets there. So if I hold down the 'M' key, I can draw my rectangle... and it just snaps back to the last one you're using. 'Type' tool, hold down the 'T'... drag out your Type box, and then let go... and it goes back to the one you were just using, which is this guy. So, 'Zoom' tool, hold down 'Z'... draw a box around stuff, let go, and it jumps back. So just hold it down, the shortcut, while you're using it... and then it will snap back to what you had previously. Now I'm saving this one to the end, because it's the best. It's the most useful one, kind of. Now you got to hold down pretty much all the keys... 'Command-Option-Shift' on a Mac... or 'Control-Alt-Shift' on a PC... and what it does is, watch this. If I hold those down, then click on my 'Object' menu... can you see what it's done? It's alphabetized all of my list. Without it on it just goes into this random, not random, but like... we all kind of spend ages going somewhere, and you're trying to find it... but you know what it's called, you know the first letter... so hold down 'Command-Option-Shift', click on it. And there he is, all in alphabetical lists. I wish this worked on all the Adobe products, but it doesn't. Just kind of like works in InDesign, for some reason. I love it though, it's a cool little shortcut. So that's going to be it for our shortcuts. Short and sweet, I know. Let's go through now using our amazing new keyboard shortcuts... throughout the rest of this InDesign course. 44. How to automatically place lots of text onto multiple pages in InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to do some cool stuff... where we take a lot on bit of text... and you see, my pages over here, there's nothing. I import it, and voilà... it creates lots of pages for me. Auto flows them without you... having to go and do the fun game of linking text boxes. All right, let's go and do that now in this video. So we're going to flow some really long text into an InDesign document... without having to do the painful, linking every text box. So we're going to start with a new document, 'Print', 'Letter'. And we're going to have '2' columns. And that's going to be it, we're going to click 'Create'. So let's bring in our document. Let's go to 'File', 'Place'. And in your '05 Long Documents'... grab a long text, either one of those two. Let's click 'Open'. Now the trick here is that I need to hold down the 'Shift' key... because without it I just drag and drag boxes... but then I'm going to click this box... and link it to this box, and life is tough. So all I need to do is, when I'm placing... undo, till it's placed again. Let's hold down the 'Shift' key, and what you'll notice is... can you see the icon changes to the little wiggly line? And what that means is if I click in the top corner here... it's going to go through, match the columns that I have... and see, magically over here... I've got a bunch of different pages with all the text flow through it. So that might work for you perfectly. What you might find though is I can-- I don't want it to flow in through all the text, because if you do this... I don't have columns, if I delete this guy, 'New document'... 'Print'. 'Letter'. Only one column could create. Bring in the text. I'm not sure why I'm going this long way to show you, but I am. We're here now, hold down 'Shift'. Watch this. Just going to flow like big chunks of text across the page... and that's probably not what you want. So what you can do is, before I place it I'm going to hit 'Esc'. On your Master page, I'm going to double click the 'A-Master'. I'm going to put a couple of boxes on here. I'm going to say, maybe I just want one that is, that size, on this page. And over here, I'm going to copy and paste it. So I've got another version that sits inside here. I'm not sure why I have text boxes sitting down here. Let's just say that I've got some boxes here. It's going to have some Factoids in it. Duplicate it. Now I'm getting off track... but now I've got these guys on the Home page. And what I want to do is link them together. So with my Black Arrow I'm going to click on this box here. And what you can do is, go to 'View', 'Extras', 'Show Text Threads'. And as long as you're not in that preview mode... with 'W', you can kind of see where they're linked. So once you've done that, go back to 'Page 1'. Now bring in your long text, 'File', 'Place', 'Long Text'. Now hold 'Shift', now click inside this box anywhere. And because you've got them on the Master page... you'll notice that all my pages there... kind of match what I did on the Master pages... and flows through nicely. One other option you can do with this, this is called Flowable Text. Hold the 'Shift' key down... there's something next we're going to look at... it's called the Primary Text Frame. I'm going to close this down without saving, even though-- it's been ages designing those, the Master pages. Let's go to 'Create new'. This one's going to be specific... because we're going to use it later on... when we're dealing with something called Books. So we're going to go to 'Print', let's go into the 'US Letter'. We're going to have Columns of '2'. Go to that Gutter at 1/2", it's '0.5'. And we're going to have really big Margins, we're going to have inch all around. And let's click 'Create'. The first thing I want to do is... I'm going to go to my Master page like I did earlier. And I'm going to grab a Text box, and it's going to be... we're going to have a text box... that goes all the way across these two columns. And I'm going to get the columns to match. Remember our shortcuts now, 'Command-Option-7' to change paragraph. We're going to go '2' Columns, with a Gutter of '0.5 inches'. So it should match what I had before. I'm going to grab another copy of it, move it across. Make sure they're linked. Grabbing the Black Arrow, clicking in this box, making those two. And the big difference is going to be something called a Primary Text Frame. So I'm going to click on this first one, and there's this option here that says... I want to make you a Primary Text Frame. Nothing really changes, the icon changes. Both of them change because they're connected. And why are they different? Let's have a little look. Let's go to page 1 and import my text. So, 'File', 'Place', let's bring in my 'Long Text' document. Let's just click on the page here. It gets the Primary Text Frame, you don't have to hit the Shift key. It's not a big advantage, I guess... but it's going to do the same thing. It's going to rechart and grab all the pages I need. And what makes the Primary Text Frame... better than maybe just doing the Autoflow Text? It's got something called Smart Text Reflow. Now why that's useful is, let's say some of our Chapter Headings-- I'm going to find a Chapter Heading here, there's one, 'Oak'. It's on-- let's see if it's on page 3. I want any of these Chapter Headings... they need to start on their own page, and have a slightly different layout. So what I'm going to do is create another Master page. To do it, at the top here, I'm going to say, I would like a 'New Master'. I'm going to call it 'B-Master'. You might have to kind of move this down a little bit, so you can see them all. And on my B-Master, what I'd like to do is... I'm going to-- from A-Master, I'm going to copy-- Double click 'A-Master', I'm going to copy the text box that I made. Paste that on B-Master. And what I'd like to do is-- they're going to start on their own page. And they're going to be about half the size. So I want two of them. I want to do two things, I want to link them. I can do it on the A-Master... and I also want to make them a Primary Text Frame. This is where the magic happens. You might just use Autoflow. Often that's what I'm doing, but if you're doing a book... you'll see the benefits of this now. So let's go to 'Page 3', find 'Oak'. So in front of Oak here... I'm going to say, you my friend, start on its own page... because you are Chapter Header. Where are you? 'Insert Break Character'. You see, it starts on a new page. There he is there. So he's on his own page. But I want it to match the B-Master, I can drag it down... but I want it to match exactly what I'm doing with my B-Master. It's easy to do. On page 4, I've got it selected, right click it... and say 'Apply Master to Page'. And it's still at 'A', not 'B'. And this is where the magic happens. You can see, it's pulled the text box styling from B-Master... and applied it to this. Technically it's called Smart Text Reflow. But really we don't call it that, we just call it the Primary Text Frame... and it means you can create as many Masters as you need. And you can just apply them to different pages... and it will try and reflow the text for you. If you don't use the Primary Text Frame... and just use your standard frame, like we did in the first part... it will not reflow it for you. You'll have to kind of cut and paste it... and try and get it to link back up, which can be a real hassle. You can see again, say this page, moves on. I can say, you my friend... I can apply Master again, and go back... to being A-Master, and it reflows the text. One thing you might do... whether you're doing Primary Text Frame or just the Autoflow... is that it generates pages for you... but it doesn't delete them for you, like Word does. Word has that kind of, like... it gets bigger when it needs to, and gets smaller when it needs to. Let's say that we've kind of got rid of lots of text. I'm going to delete all this. I'm just deleting text. You can see, it just leaves-- that's kind of all pages all by itself. You can make that an option where it deletes empty pages. So you can go to 'InDesign', 'Preferences', go to 'Type'. It's 'Edit', 'Preferences', 'Type' on a PC. And in here there is 'Delete Empty Pages'. It just means that when they start deleting stuff, watch this... it should start deleting pages. There it goes. Deleting all the ones that were empty. Kind of need it together till I get it to check... by deleting or adding something. But yes, that is an option that I don't like on by default. So I'm going to go and turn that back off. Let's go and jump to the next video while I'm doing that. All right, see you then. 45. How To Make A Cross Reference In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, it's time to make a Cross Reference... where we 'See more on page 4', and this '4'... is automatically generated, so if the content moves... this updates automatically. That is a Cross Reference. Let's go learn how to make it. So first thing we need to do is apply a couple of Paragraph Styles. Why? Because Cross References often use Paragraph Styles... to kind of decide where the link goes to. We're going to do that. We're going to cheat by bringing in Paragraph Styles I've already made. So let's go to 'Window'... go down to 'Styles', and open up 'Paragraph Styles'. And in here, we're going to go to the 'Flyout' menu. And in here we're going to go to 'Load Paragraph Styles'. I want to go to '05 Long Documents'... and let's pull the Paragraph Styles... that I've already made in Section 2. Click 'Open'. And I'm going to bring in all of them, and just click 'OK'. You can see, we've got some Styles there. With nothing selected, I'm going to grab 'Normal' and delete it. Normal came through from our Word document, even though I don't want it. First thing I'm going to do is select everything. So, my crazy five clicks... or you can go 'Command A' on a Mac, or 'Control A' on a PC. Select everything on all the pages, and let's apply the Body Copy. Next thing I want to do is apply a few of the Headings. So here's my first one here, '2019 Collection'. Let's apply 'MF Heading'. Now, the fun game is finding the rest of the Headings that I've-- It's like a little find and seek, and hunter game that I made. I'm sorry for this. So let's go and find the other Headings. There is '4'. So 'Oak', 'Ash'. You're just looking for the line that has one thing by itself. There's one Walnut, and one more somewhere. There he is, 'Beech'. So those are my Headings. So, what I'd like to do is, back to our page 1, remember, 'Command-J-1'. And let's say, at the end of this first paragraph here... I'm going to zoom in a little bit, and I'm going to say... 'See more on page-- Actually I'm going to say 'See more on'... and let the Cross Reference put the rest in. So, the little space after there... I'm going to open up my 'Cross References' panel. It's under 'Window', down under 'Type & Tables'. It's called 'Cross References'. I'm going to create a new one. And I'm going to link to a Paragraph. What paragraph? It's going to be one of the paragraphs in my MF Heading. And there they are, all listed here, I'm going to link to Oak in this case. And down here, where it says 'Format'... you can 'Full Paragraph & Page number'. We'll just have a little look. Can you see? It says, ' See more on "Oak" '. That's what it's putting in. It's putting in the Paragraph name, which is Oak... on page 3, and it puts it in little quotes. You might like that, but not the quotes, lot of people don't. Click on the pencil, and you can see here... See the quotes either side of 'Full Para', just delete these two. Click 'OK'. So 'See more on Oak on Page 3'. You might just want the page number though, 'See more on Page 3'. Great! Now if I click 'OK'... that my friends is a Cross Reference. What I'm going to do now is, let's move Oak to another page. If I put in a couple of returns here, can you see... I'm using that Paragraph Style over and over again, 'Heading 1'. So it's using this Heading 1, 'Oak', as my page number. So if I go through, and just keep putting returns in to get to the next page... it's going to actually still think it's on page 3... because I'll use this Paragraph Style all the way through. So what I'm going to do is... make sure when I put in, say-- I want to break this to the next page. I'm going to put it just in this full stop here, I'm going to say... I'm going to say 'Type', 'Break Character'. And I'm going to say 'Page Break'. So it pushes it all the way over to the next page. There he is there. Awesome! So, he should be on the new page now. Let's go up to-- where is he? You can see, it automatically updated, it's now on page 4. So that will follow that around. And that's the way of using Paragraph Styles to do it. Now another way to do a Cross Reference instead of using a Paragraph Style... which, I guess-- I prefer just putting something in called a Text Anchor. And it's just-- it's a little bit more, I guess... simple, you don't have to create Paragraph Styles. So let's go-- on this other paragraph here, we're going to say "See more on page... Actually, I'll get rid of 'page'. So this is going to say, "See more on... So what we need to do is put in something called a Text Anchor. What it's actually called in the Cross References panel... in the flyout here... actually we've got to find a place where it needs to go. We're going to find-- it's poor old 'Ash'. Ashes are unfortunately at the bottom of the column. We're going to ignore that for the moment. So with Ash, I got my cursor flashing just here. I'm going to say 'Cross Reference'. I'm going to put in what's called a 'New Hyperlink Destination'. And what kind of Hyperlink Destination? We looked at pages before, we're going to use this one called Text Anchor. I'm going to call this one 'Ash'. Click 'OK'. And what it is, it's invisible, you can see it If you go to 'Type', and go to 'Show Hidden Characters'... this little Text Anchor in there... he's tiny and hard to see, but it's in there, that little colon. So that's not very helpful, I'll turn those off. But I'll put in my Text Anchor in there. Now what we can do is, back up on page 1, 'Command-J-1'. And where is my Option? Zooming around, there it is. With my cursor flashing, I can insert another Cross Reference... but instead of trying to get a Paragraph, I'm going to go to a Text Anchor. And I've only got one in this page, 'Ash'. And it's on page 7, happy days. Let's click 'OK'. That is the two ways to create a Cross Reference. Actually one more thing that can happen with Cross References, that's quite useful. If I export this as a PDF, but make sure it's an Interactive PDF... I'll put mine on my Desktop. I'm going to put in my 'Desktop', go to my 'Advanced Coursework'. And I'll call this 'Cross Reference Example'. Leave everything by default. And what happens automatically is, you'll see here, "See more on page 4." Because it's an Interactive PDF, when I click on it... it jumps to page 4, same with that second one. "See more on page 7"... and it jumps to page 7. Here he is, 'Ash', we sure should have fixed that. All right, so that is Cross Referencing in InDesign. Let's get on to the next video. 46. How To Create An Index In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to create an index, in InDesign. This beautiful one here tells me, that, chair... the word chair appears on page 2, 4, 9, and 12. I'll show you how to create them automatically... how to update them reasonably automatically... and how to make them as beautiful as this, Pink and Arial. All right, let's get started. So to create an index, super easy. I've made it a little easier for you in this one... unlike my, go and find the headings example in the last video. So what we need to do is open up the Index panel, it's under 'Window'... go down to 'Type & Tables', and open up 'Index'. And we just need to add some parts to the index. What I've done is, on page 1, I've got a few things, like chair. I'm going to select it all. And in here, I'm going to click on this option here... it says 'New Index', click on the little page. And then I'm going to click the word 'Add All'. It's going to go through my whole document, and find all uses of chair. Now you'll see, under 'C', there's Chair... and these are all the pages that it's on. We're going to add a few other options, so let's add Shelf. Add you. Make sure you click on 'Add All'. Adding one is fine, if you want to do it like per word usage... you might have it just too many times in your document... so you can go through with your 'Find & Change'. So you can go through with your 'Edit', 'Find'... and just highlight the words you want to add to the reference... maybe not all of them, and just click 'Add'. I'm going to add all of mine, so we've got Chair, there's one called Table. I'm going to add you, 'Add All', and click 'Done'. And there was one more... I swear there was one more, I can't see a Chair, Shelf, Table. It doesn't matter. So next thing I need to do is decide where I'm going to put it... traditionally at the back. So I'm going to go to my last page. If you don't have a last page, blank page, like I do currently... you can just grab a new page. I'm going to go to page 16 here. I'm going to zoom out so I can see the whole thing, move it to the side. And now you need to generate it, and it's just this option here. It says 'Generate Index', click on that. I'm going to leave all the defaults. Click 'OK'. And I'm going to drag out an index. I'm going to make mine just one column, just because my index is not very big. So one of the things that's generated... obviously it's got my C's... and there's Chair, and they're all out there... like a traditional index. What I'd like to do is change the styles. And what InDesign has done, is it's gone to-- let's click off in the background, so we got nothing selected. Let's go to 'Window'. Let's go to 'Styles', and let's go to 'Paragraph Styles'. You'll notice that it's created a few extra styles for me. So it's created 'Index Level 1'... which is this small type here... the Index Title, which is the big thing at the top here... and the section here, which is the letters here in bold. So what you need to do is, go through, and let's say... I want to change my Index Title, double click on it, and say... actually, 'Basic Character Formats'. I'm going to pick the Arial that I've been using... in this particular document. Font size is a lot smaller, you can see it updating over here. And just go through and update that. Alternatively you can just select it in here. Pick a font, I'm going to pick 'Arial Bold'. My lovely color. And then you can right click this, and say, I'd like to 'Redefine Style'. Either way you like to work. Do the same thing for these guys. So you need to update the style, because, say you do some changes in here... and you're like, "Okay, I'm going to make this Arial... but I'm not going to update the style." 'Arial Italic'. I'm going to do it for all of these. Here's my Eye Dropper, steal the formating. Paint the formating on that. So I've updated it, but not updated the style. What happens is, if I go and move, say, Chair... if I delete Chair from page 1... 'Command-J-1', and I go to 'chair', say goodbye. What I need to do now is go back to my last page, 'Command-J-16'. Now this is a two stage updating process. Don’t know why it's so confusing, but that's why we got this video. What we need to do is, click on this 'Refresh' button, and you're like... "Oh, update preview. Great. Hmm." All it does is update in here... that this no longer has one in there. We don't do it, but it will still have one, as one of the options. So once we've done that though, we're going to have to update this. Why are you updating? So that the contents is easy. This thing here, we need to do something a little weird. You just click on this option here, 'Generate Index'... and you're like, "Why do I make a new one?" But see in here, it's got a little check box... that says 'Replace Existing Index'. And you're like, "Ugh, okay." See, update. It updates, removes that one... but because we didn't update our Paragraph Style... it returns to our Minion. So that's how to update it, and just make sure... that when you do any changes to the styling... you go and-- you can see the little '+' there... you right click it, and say, actually redefine this style for me. What I'll also do is, go into Paragraph Styles... and actually push the padding from the right hand side, let's make an Indent. Now I'm going to 'Redefine Style'. I use Redefine Style all the time, that is a shortcut. It's a bit of a hard one I guess, it's there. It's all buttons plus 'R'. So 'Command-Option-Shift' on a Mac, and 'Control-Alt-Shift' on a PC. I use it a lot anyway, it's a shortcut that I like. Now if I refresh it, it's going to look like that again. So that is how to create an index. Let's get on to the next video. 47. Add Document Name Automatically To The Page In InDesign Using Text Variables: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at Text Variables. In particular, we're going to look at Running Headers... where at the moment it tells me I'm in the section... that belongs to 2019 Collection. And if I get lower, I'm in the Oaks section... because over here it says Oak. It's automatically pulling it up, I'm in Ash now. I am in Walnut, because it says Walnut over here. These are automatically typed together... and that's really helpful for long documents... knowing where we are in this big document. Another good use, is down the bottom here... I've put in the-- let's zoom in. I've put in the name of the file, you can see it up here. And the actual date that this document was last modified. That's going to be, for me, useful, internally to know... have we got the right version in front of us... when we're looking at say a printed document. All right, let's go and learn how to do Text Variables in InDesign. So to create the different options... let's create the first one, the first easy one. We're going to do it to the Master page. Why? It just means that when I add it to the Master pager... it's going to appear on all the pages, and that's what I want. So I'm going to my A-Master, double click it. I know I'm in A-Master because it says right down the bottom here. And what I'm going to do is turn my 'W' key on so I can see stuff. And I'm going to put that down the bottom here. So to start off with it needs a text box, and we're going to put in the file name. It's going to be small down the bottom... that's mainly reference for us in the company. It's not going to be used too much by the clients, I guess. I'm going to put a font size that's not so ginomous. And I'm going to Right Align it so it just kind of bangs up to the side there. It's actually going to be '8 pt'. 8 point's kind of like the lowest. It's that business card size, where you need to squeeze things on. Still legible, but quite hard. Mine get smaller. So with my cursor flashing in a text box, let's go to 'Type'. And go down to 'Text Variables'. We're going to 'Insert Variable'... and you can see there's a bunch of options in here. We're going to put in 'File Name' to get started. You can see, it's taken the name of my file, which is up here in the Tab. And let's put that down the bottom here. What I might also do is put a couple of spaces in. I'm going to put in a pipe '|'. It's that weird key on your keyboard, next to back slash '\'. On my keyboard, it is underneath the Del key, next to the square bracket. You might just put in a hyphen. And I'm going to insert one more 'Type'. So go down to 'Text Variables', and I'm going to put in the 'Modification Date'. So it's going to just put in - I'm going to zoom in a little bit there. Just going to put in whenever I was working on it, and that is today. Near to Christmas, yeah. So this is going to be mine for... just kind of referencing down the bottom here. You might not have this in the Master page... it might be kind of hidden in the inside flap... or on the back page. Just for you and the company to know when this was made... and what version you're kind of dealing with... at least with the modification date. The other option we're going to do is going to be a Running Heading. And because we've put it on the Master page... you can see here, it's on all the pages. I should totally not put that on the Master page, that particular one... but let's go into A-Master, and what I want to do at the top here... is I want a Running Header... because, for the long document, I want to know what section I'm in. Annual Reports, something like that, you want to know where you are. In my documents, have a quick little look, I've got... this Heading here, I've got Oak... Ash, in a terrible place, and Walnut. So I just want to know... when I'm flicking through this document, in the top right, where I am. Am I in the Chairman's Forward? Am I in the Forecasting for 2020? So that kind of thing. So, A-Master, up the top here... I'm going to put mine in a Text box. Just like we did before, but it's not going to be as hidden. It's not going to be that big though. So first of all we need a text box for it to go into. Make it long enough that it's going to fit, so, here we go. Mine's tiny. So to create a Running Heading, you need to find it first. So, let's go to 'Type', and let's go to 'Text Variables'. And let's go to 'Define'. The only one you need to really define in here is the Running Header. So click on it, double click on it. And in here, we're going to say... I'd like it, the Running Header to be based on a Paragraph Style... that I've called Heading 1. So you need a Paragraph Style to start with, which I've already created. I'm going to actually force it to be upper case... so I want it to change the case, please. Because you created it, click 'Done', nothing happens. Now with my cursor flashing in my box, I can go to 'Type', 'Text Variables'. 'Insert Text Variable', and I'm going to insert that 'Running Header'. Now on the Master Page, it just says Running Header... like it does for automatic page numbering. What I'm going to do now is jump to page 1. It says I'm in that part of the collection, scroll down, and I'm in Oak. Now I'm in Ash, now in Walnut, cool, huh? So that is how to add a Running Header. I'm going to style it nice, I'm not, just going to leave it like that. I really want to design it up. I'm using Arial because I know everyone has Arial. And I'm trying not to spend this tutorial series... trying to make everything look pretty. So, you can have a little look through Text Variables. There's a couple of different options in there... but they insert the same way. The creation date of the InDesign document, the file name which we've used. You can click on an image. You can create a box... and InDesign will allow you to pick the different images in that page. You can create 'Last Page Number', 'Modification Date', 'Output Date'. All sorts of awesomeness. They got a pretty benign... Sorry about that word. I know you know them, they got a pretty boring name, Text Variables... but some useful stuff in there. All right, let's get on to the next video. 48. How To Use The Adobe InDesign CC Book Feature : Hi there, in this video we're going to create a Book in InDesign. All a Book does, is I've got three separate documents here. I'm working on them separately with different people. What I'd like to do is join them all up... have the page numbering, or flow through all of them. I'd like all the Styles to match up... but I want to easily grab all of these guys, and just create a PDF... and it will stretch all three together... and go out to the printers... but I get the benefit of working on three separate InDesign documents. That is a Book. Let's go and learn how to do that now in InDesign. So to make a Book... I'm going to-- first of all, this is the file we've been working on. There's two other files we're going to add to this Book. They're separate files, they're in your... Where are they? In '05 Long Documents', there's 'Section 2' and 'Section 3'. So they're separate InDesign documents, and now I want to string them all together. They are separate because we have all decided... that everyone's working on different files together. So, me, is working on this file... Jeff is working on this one, and Susan's working on this one. I don't know where I get those names from... but let's just say, for practical purposes... for our work, we need to separate these documents out. Now the first thing we need to do is, for the document we've been working on... let's go to our Master page, and add some automatic page numbering. I'm just going to add it after the Running Header we've got here... and I'm going to say, page... It's caps, PAGE, then I'm going to go to 'Type'. 'Insert Special Character'. Go to 'Markers', and go to 'Current Page Number', terrible shortcut. So page A, if I go page 1 now, it's going to say 'Page 1', 'Page 3'. So, it's got my page numbering. Same with this document, section 2, you can see, it's got page 1, 3. So it's got automatic page numbering, same with this guy... it says, on the top right here, Page 1. Next thing we're going to do is create a book. So go to 'File', 'New', and go to 'Book'. 'Books' are those buttons you've never clicked, I bet you. And what it does is it creates a file by itself. It's a weird kind of process, right? So you create a new book, and you're like, "I can't get the file name." So I'm going to call mine 'Maynooth Furniture Catalog Book'. Hit 'Save'. And this thing opens, just a panel. And the other weird thing is that it's not connected to anything that's open. So I can close all of these down. 'Close' you down, 'Save' you. So this thing here can-- he's a Lone Ranger, he can work all by himself... with the documents open, or not. What you need to do is add the documents that you want to join up. So, I'm going to click on the '+' button... and I'm going to add the document from... let's say, our 'Coursework', and that's the one I've been working on. I'm also going to add a couple more from my '05 Long Documents'... both 'Section 2' and 'Section 3'. Click 'Open'. And then you go to kind of rearrange them... to decide who's at the beginning, and who's at the end... because the page numbering, you can see... gets made automatically, so I'm going to say, that guy's at the top. And the cool thing about it is, watch... if I open up Section 2 by just double clicking in here... you'll notice that automatically a couple of things will happen. One is, the page numbering is updated. You can see, my first document gets to page 17. Now this one, automatically is 18, which is cool. It's also rearranged it, so it's a left hand spread... because, on this document, it finishes on the right hand spread. So it knows that the next one needs to be at right, so it adjusts that one. The same thing with Section 3. Again, I don't have to have any of these open. Just kind of re-emphasizing the fact. And I'm going to make a PDF. Now if we go into here, it says, 'Export Selected Documents to PDF'... that's because I had Section 2 selected, so if you click off... just make sure nothing is selected... and then you get the option for 'Export Book to PDF'... you're the whole thing. Create that, and give it a name, that's fine for me. I'll 'Replace' one, fine. I left mine as Interactive PDF, which is not what I want. So I'm going to go into here, 'Export Book to PDF'... and make sure I pick 'PDF (Print)', because this is going to my printer. 'Save'. Just your regular old PDF settings here. I'm going to click on 'Export'. There's some links that are missing, I'm okay with that. And there we have it, we have our Page 1, and our PDF. I'm going to zoom out a little bit, scroll along... so I should get down to Page 17. Now it starts moving to 18, it's horrible looking, I understand. It's not my best work, nothing really matches up... but it shows you a way of connecting separate documents... keeping the page numbering working... and exporting them as a PDF altogether. Another option you can do, back in InDesign... here you can just hit 'Print', and that will just print it to your printer. That's an option. This little thing here operates little weirdly as well. You need to kind of save the Book, that's the way to save it. Another option you can do is... say you're working on a long document... but you want to keep consistent Paragraph Styles... which is obviously important over a long document. So, let's save that in Section 2. So open that up, and it will open up the document I'm working on. Now the trick is to have... under 'Window', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'... is to be all using the same Style name. You'll notice, when we created this document earlier on... we created it, and we imported it from Section 2. That was for a reason, because I wanted the Title names to be the same. So I've got these two, Heading 1 and Body Copy 1... but let's say, in Section 2... I'm working on this document, and I'm like... "Actually I don't want it to be pink anymore, I want it to be green." And I go into here, my 'Styles', and I'll 'Redefine Style'... and it updates everywhere else in this document. I can find them, there it is, Shelves, it's now this green color... but Maynooth, it's still at their original pink color. So what we can do, doesn't matter which document we have open... we can decide who their boss is, it's this little option here. So I'm going to say 'Section 2'. I'm going to set the Style for this guy, this guy is the boss. And what I want to do for these two guys - I'm holding 'Command' to click in these two guys - I can say, it's 'Control' on a PC, have them both selected. You can actually just select them all. And say, let's Synchronize, guys, let's get together, Synchronize. 'Synchronize Book'. And it synchronizes the Styles. And what will happen, hopefully, is, it did. Wasn't checking, went from pink to green. So it's using Section 2 as the leader. You need to kind of force it to synchronize every time... so if you do make changes... you need to, say who the boss is, select them all... and then click on 'Synchronize'. So that is how to use a Book. Cool feature, especially good when we're working with really long documents. All right, let's get into the next video. 49. Changing Preferences For Advanced InDesign Users : Okay, it's Advanced Preferences time. On a PC, it's under 'Edit'. 'Preferences'. On a Mac here, it's under 'InDesign', 'Preferences'. Let's start with 'General'. First thing people don't like about the new version... is this Start window, with all these recently used documents. What you can do is, just turn that off, click 'OK'... and it will go back to kind of like... when it opens, you can just get all your documents. So up to you. I'm going to go back. Another interesting one is-- actually, first I'm going to turn back on my 'Start', and I'm going to go to... 'Units & Increments'. So, this is the place where you change it from inches to millimeters... or if you're doing a lot of web work, or digital work... you can switch it out to pixels, and it will change it by default. The other useful thing down here is the 'Keyboard Increments'. At the moment, if I click 'OK', open up a new document... and if I'm tapping things around... often I like to use my keyboard just to move things around. Mainly because Smart Guides are so smart. So I'm going to give this a Fill of 'yellow'. So, it's snapping... but I just want to use my keyboard... so I can just tap it along with my keyboard... but often it's working in two bigger increments. So I want do like really microscopic stuff. So, in 'InDesign', 'Preferences', you can adjust that. Go to 'Units & Increments' again... and just turn this down to something really small. So instead of 013, I'm just going to put in that. So I'm going to get rid of that, and it's now... watch this, my keyboard shortcuts, it's just teeny tiny. I'm going to zoom in. So it's just like little bit. So you can hold 'Shift' to get it to go a lot faster... but now it's just nice, tiny little increments. Another interesting 'Preference' option... is down here, it's 'Clipboard Handling'. So if you're copying and pasting from Word... or other InDesign files, or any sort of document... what you might find is you want to bring through lots more information. So to adjust the text when you're pasting, bring in anything you can. It might be styles from Word, or InDesign... it's not going to clear them all out. So you can decide which option you prefer here, so straight on text... or going through all of the junk. Things like Styles, Paragraph Styles, decide what works for you. Another useful thing is, especially for me... under 'Spelling' there's one called 'Dynamic Spelling'. And that means it's going to work just like Word. When I type in a word that I can't spell... like there, I always get it wrong. It gives me a little red line. So I know I can go back and type the right one. You can even right click it, and get spelling options, and I click there. Then it goes green, because there's a duplicate. If I right click it, it says there's a repeat word in here, be careful. So, quite useful, Dynamic Spelling. Especially for people like me who find it tough. Where does that 'i' go? I'm never sure. One little thing though, is you won't see Dynamic Spelling if you're in preview mode. So just tap the 'W' key, and you can't see it at all. 'W' on, 'W' off. So, just note that. One of the other things is that making a PDF can take a long time... and sometimes you're like, "I just made it, is it frozen?" You can turn on this window called 'Background Tasks'. It's under 'Utilities', and it's called 'Background Tasks'. It's a big window... so you might need a bigger screen to actually be using this one here... but it just shows you what InDesign's trying to do. If you're working with big slow documents, let's say we export this one... I'm going to call mine... 'Export Test'. Just going to make it a regular PDF, and I hit 'Save'. Keep an eye on this guy, watch... It was really fast, but if it's taking a really long time... it will groan and moan, and you will see... a little bar kind of eventually getting to the end here. It can be useful, especially if you're waiting for a PDF to get created... and not sure how long it's going to take. The other things that can happen, is alerts appear down here. If you're finding you're making PDFs, and they're just not being made... it's some sort of error, it will tell you down here, the alerts. It might have useful things like... you used the Pantone, or you've used the wrong color mode. So I'm going to close down the Background Task window. He's not really a Preference, I know. Now on to my most favorite of all Preferences. It's this Control bar along the top here. Sometimes it's called the App bar. The Control bar here is... what's included along with these little options. And you can customize them. I find this is super useful when I'm at my Type tool. Grab my 'Type' tool. Remember, we're toggling between these two here. Be nice, on some screens you might have noticed... if you got a really big iMac, you can see both the character... and then there's a little break here... it's kind of a dark line you can't really see. Now it's starting with the Character stuff... but imagine if you can just see them all in one go. What you can do is just turn this stuff off, you don't use. Then you don't have to go and toggle between these two. To do it, pick anyone of them, and go to this little cog here... and go through and say, actually in Character... I want to see everything, but I want to see Character Style. That's this option here. Takes off a big huge chunk, we just don't need it. Let's say you don't use Character Scaling, you shouldn't. It's like against the typography rules. I'm going to use Stroke, and I'll use all the rest of it... and say 'Paragraph'. What else do I not need? Baseline Grid, say you don't use it. Text Grid is good. I don't use Paragraph Styles up there, I use a separate panel. Borders & Shading I don't use, and I click 'OK'. And now I've got lots of room up here, and I got kind of like everything I need. You can do it with any panel. Click on the 'Selection' tool... and up here you can decide what to turn on, and what to turn off. Under 'Object'... and just get it down, it's adjusted but it's that you just won't use... if you want to make a nice clean Control bar or App bar along the top. All right, that's going to be it for Advanced Preferences in InDesign. Let's get on to the next video. 50. How To Speed Up Your Workflow For Advanced InDesign CC Users: This video is how to go fast in InDesign. For people that are pretty competent in InDesign already. Let's start with some of the easy ones. Let's grab the 'Rectangle tool'... and let's say I want to draw out a box... but I know it needs to be '20mmx30mm'. But I'm using Imperial, kind of inches at the moment. So I'm going to draw out a rectangle, and I'm going to give it a Fill. Now, along here, it's in inches. I can go into my 'Preferences' and change it... or with my Width & Height here, I can just type in '20mm'. Click down here, and you can see, it's converted it. Same down here, I'm going to type in '30mm'... and now I've got the box exactly how I want it to be. You can do with pixels, do the other way... if you're using millimeters or centimeters. Just type in the '2inch', using the quotation option. Then click out, and it will convert it for you. Obviously, we're working in inches, that doesn't work. It's a bit of Math in these fields. Let's say I need this, but I need it to be times 2. So asterisk '♪' is times. And I'm going to tab out to the next one. It times it by 2. Let's say I need it divided by 3. Just the forward slash and 3, '/3', and it's divided it by 3. You can add, minus, divide, and times. Works for any of these fields here. Say I want to break this into-- I need to rotate it 360... but I need to divide it by 5. We can kind of do the whole bit of Math in there... without having to kind of start with the starting point... if you know what I mean. Same with percentages, any text field will accept all of the Math. The next option is 'Quick Apply'. So I'm going to delete my rectangle. Quick Apply is just a really, quick and easy way to apply Style. You can actually use it for lots of things... but let's say this is now a Heading. I want to apply my Heading Style. Instead of having to go, 'Window', 'Style', blah, blah. I can click anywhere inside of here and then just go 'Command-Return'... or 'Control-Return' on a PC. It opens this thing called Quick Apply. Now if I type in 'MF'... because I've named my Styles with MF, perfect. And then let's say I accidentally use this one as MF Headings... remember, 'Command-Return' brings that up, or 'Control-Return' on a PC. So I've accidentally applied it. I can click in here, 'Command-Return', and you see... it brings up the thing I last did, so it can get super fast. Actually, 'Command-Return', back to Body Copy. So whenever you're naming your Styles - I use this mainly for Styles - make sure you give them kind of a good name, not just Body Copy and Title. Why? Because whenever you do this... then you have to type in 'Title', and then back to Body Copy... whereas if I've got an acronym in the front... maybe just like a 'Z' in the front, it's often what I do... they're all going to be grouped together. Other useful things for Quick Apply, let's say I need this all to be upper case. You can actually pick anything from the drop down menus... as long as you know how to type it. So 'upper'... here he is there. So I've just got the first part of the letters, 'Uppercase'. So I can go through now, and decide, you my friends, are all upper cases. Just a quick, easy way to apply anything from these options here. Any styles, any options. I said options a couple of times, Quick Apply is super useful. 'Command-Return' or 'Control-Return'. Next little work flow trick is Autocorrect. So, let's turn it off, let's go to 'InDesign', 'Preferences', 'Autocorrect'. And there they are there, just turn it on. I find this useful just by itself... and then we'll show you kind of a super slick advance use of it... but just enable it, and it just has lots of mis-spelt words in here... that helps you Autocorrect. So I'm going to click 'OK'. And in here I'm going to type 'the' badly. So 'the', say you're really fast... you see, it changed it around, I'll do it slowly again. So 'hte', space, it auto corrects it. Now I have terrible spelling... so I spell 'accross' with two 'c's all the time. Space, it adjusts it. 'Abbout', I got 2 'b's. I don't do that, but I probably could. So there's lots in here, okay? Now my nemesis there, or there, I don't know. You can go in and enter your own ones in there. So you can go up to 'Preferences'... go again to 'Autocorrect', and you can add stuff. So down the bottom here, I've got it enabled. I'm going to add it to the USA dictionary... you might be adding it to a different one. Click on 'Add', type it badly. 'i' before 'e', somebody once told me. 'i' before 'e'? That's how it works, except after 'c', or something like that. That has never run through. If you've got a better way, for me... remember which way those go around... drop it in the comments, that would be great. So I'm going to type in the right way, and click 'OK'. Now I can spell it wrong, and it switches it around for me. So if there's words you have problems with-- the one that drives my friend Margaret up the wall is 'grammar'. I just spell it with two 'a's, and it drives her nuts. Now I do it on purpose, but in the beginning... I asked her to check my 'grammar', I spell it wrong. Her face goes purple. Another trick you can do, and this only works while you're typing. So Autocorrect doesn't-- let's say I already had it there. So I've copied and pasted text. It doesn't kind of help you when I paste it in... text will automatically do it. So it's just while you're typing. So it's one of the drawbacks, or I guess it's one of the things... that happens with Autocorrect, it's while you're typing... but if I paste from Word, or open in an existing document... it's not going to go through and just auto correct it. Where this can get super useful is, just to save time, speedy work flow stuff. So let's go to 'InDesign', 'Preferences', 'Autocorrect'. What we're going to do is enable-- we're going to create some crazy words. I'm going to type in 'byol'. The correction is going to be 'bringyourownlaptop'. It's a really long word, really hard to type. And I click 'OK'. Click 'OK'. Now my Autocorrect is kind of doing some weird stuff. Actually I'm going to type in 'byol', space... bringyourownlaptop Cool, huh! I write lots of notes in InDesign... so there's lots of times where I'm like-- Now go to your 'Selection tool'. I know it's not a long one, but I definitely go in here, and say... actually I'm going to make one called Selection Tool, 'st'. This is going to be 'Selection tool'. Click 'OK'. Let's add another one. I'm going to make this one 'ms', and I say a lot... "Make sure you have... I'm going to "xxx". "file open", full stop. I say that at the beginning of every note. So make sure you've got the 25721 file open. So I'm adding that one as 'ms'. Click 'OK'. Now, at the beginning of my notes I can say-- so my first note is going to be 'Paragraph'. Let's look at numbering. The first one here is going to be 'ms' space. Oh, good, nice going, switch that out. So lots of things, what was the other one? "Now choose your st". 'Selection tool'. You have to be doing some common stuff... maybe just your business name, maybe your name, or the CEO's name... or some sort of acronym that you guys use that needs to be spelled out... turn on Autocorrect, and it will do it as you type. Remember, that's only while you're typing. If I copy and paste 'st' from somewhere... it's not going to go and automatically change it, which is probably good. You'll have no control over it, but that's how it works. Other work flow options is-- I'm going to save this one here, I'm going to close it down... and with nothing open, I'm going to go from 'Start' to 'Essentials'. Now if I change anything, this will change the default forever. You might have noticed already... we've covered a little bit of it in this course... but there's things like hyphenate. So in here, under 'Paragraph', I'm just turning Hyphenate-- it's on by default, turn it off now... and every time you draw a box it's not going to hyphenate. Same with the default font. I've changed mine to 'Roboto Lite', change it here, it will change forever. Other parts, in your 'Swatches', go and-- let's say I want to delete 'Google'. So he's not part of my main fonts. I'm going to delete 'FedEx' as well, goodbye. And I want 'Maynooth Furniture' not to be in this kind of little group. I'm going to grab you, grab the 'Swatch', and just drag it up here. I have to do them all separately, fun. But you get the idea. These now will be in every document. And you could go through now and delete these ones that nobody uses. Other things that I do is that-- the Drop Shadow, so I use Drop Shadows, but the default one is awful. There's a little icon up here for Drop Shadow... what you can do is you can get into it... and if you change it now to something more useful... actually go into here, go to 'Drop Shadow'. It will open it up. And say, I don't want it to be this giant kind of offset. I want it to be quite low. And in my case I like to have it straight up and down. So I like to be at 90°. I don't like it to be such a big offset, so I'm going to have '0.05'... and I'm going to have the size of it. It's too big and fuzzy for me, that I like. So I'm going to have it down to something like '2'. And now whenever I draw a Drop Shadow in a new document... open it up... draw a grid rectangle. Actually I've done the Drop Shadow on by default forever... which is not what I want. So that's my Drop Shadow that I like. Actually I don't like it, it's not quite how I want it... but you get what I mean, right? You can get the Drop Shadow how you want... and then every time you draw it, it's going to work. One thing I did do is I clicked on that button. That just means that every time I draw an object, it's going to be on. So back to here, go to this and turn it off. If you're finding-- this is a good kind of point I guess, is that... sometimes, every time you draw a box, you're like... "Why has it got a pink Stroke and dotted with a weird Fill?" So you've just gone in and changed it here, with nothing open. So I'm going to go back to having a Fill of 'None' and a Stroke of 'Black', that's going to be my default. The Drop Shadow is not turned on... but it will still remember, when I do turn it on, what I did. Here. 'Fill'. 'Fill color'. Turn on Drop Shadow, and it's better. That's the one I'm going to change though. Another one of the features-- actually let's open up the document that I had open - Speed up work flow. - is dragging and dropping. So in every other program in the world, if you select something... you can click and drag it, move it, you can't do that here. So InDesign has turned it off by default. I can select it, and just move it around, but I can't in InDesign... so they're twice now. Let's go to 'Preferences', 'Type'. Let's just turn it on. There it is there, 'Enable in Layout View'. It just means, now, when I select stuff, I can say... actually I want to grab this, I want to drag it over here. So you might like working that way in the other documents... but just like how it does it here in InDesign... you might not have never known it existed at all... and these are the things you can do, but there you can. Another interesting thing to help you work is the Content Grabber. When it got introduced, I hated it. I'm slowly getting used to it. I'm going to import an image from, let's just say, 'Background 1'. So I got a big background, and this target in the middle. You might hate it, because you're forever like... "Why is it right in the middle?" You can put it off by default. And it is under 'Window', 'Extras'... and there's one in here called 'Content Grabber'. That's what it's called, I guess. 'Content Grabber'. Hide it. Now I want it to come on again. You can just double click it if you need to remove it. Like the good old days. Up to you. All right, on to the next one, I love this one. If I shrink this down, let's say I want this to kind of be-- I want the text to run around it, so we put on our 'Text Wrap'. Not very exciting. Weirdly Text Wrap has its own panel... should be under Type. Not sure why. So it's going to run around the outside. So the text is running around... I can push it out a little bit, I got a bit of a buffer... but let's say I want to add text to the top of this. You'd probably know how to fix this. I'm going to say this is the-- maybe we're going to add a Copyright notice... 'Copyright for 2018'. And I want to add it on top of this. You'll notice that if I try and do it right... the Text Wrap pushes it over to the edge, and I might let it be on top. Normally what people do is they go to 'Object'... and go to 'Text Frame Options'. You may even use the super-duper shortcut. 'Command-B', or 'Control-B' on a PC. And you say 'Ignore Text Wrap'. That works, but you got to do that every single time... so I'm going to undo that... and I'll show you a cool little trick. So in 'Preferences', go to 'Composition'... and this magical button here, it says... 'Text Wrap only affects the text underneath'. So it doesn't matter that this has Text Wrap applied or not... because it's on top of the image. If I push it below, I'm going to move it below... it does get affected by Text Wrap... but if it's above - I'm just using my shortcut to bring it above - it won't. And that is a kind of a default on for this entire program. So no more going in to 'Command-B' and saying... ignore Text Wrap on every text box. It doesn't work obviously, if this is behind the text. I'm going to send it to the back, doesn't work. If I bring it forward, it does. Now it's in front of this guy, I'm going to bring him forward. So that's a nice little time saver. The other thing to do, is when you're working... is to potentially have your own folder structure. Let's go check it out. So here in my documents, I've got this folder. His job is, nothing really. He's just an empty folder structure... but if I open this, it's called 'New Job'... but there's no actual files in here, it's just folders. So there's a folder structure, so there's a 'Copy'. This is where all the copies goes for any of the jobs I work on. 'Files' is my kind of like the second drawer down. All the files, you're not too sure what to do with. Generally just images go in there. 'Reference' might be material that I got from the client. A previous PDF, or something. 'Sent to Client' are all the PDFs that I've sent them. 'Sent to Supplier', there's only one in here. I only ever had one file in here, that's the one that went to the printer. 'Site Files' I have, because I do a lot of web work. And 'Working' is where I keep things... like my InDesign, Illustrator, and Photoshop documents. Why is it good? Because I've got a new job... and they say, "Dan, can you help us work?"... and you say, "Yes." Copy, paste. Give this a name, and this is 'Maynooth Furniture Brochure'. And that structure is ready to go. Especially if you're working in an agency... or somewhere where you're dealing with lots of other people... having consistent folder structure, means everyone knows where to find stuff. You don't have to use what I use, but just come up with your own. I also have in here, one called 'Zold'. So every folder has a Zold folder. All that means is, 'Z' is-- so that it ends up at the bottom. Say I've got lots of files in here that I'm working on... Zold sits down at the bottom alphabetically... and I just dump everything in there that I want to keep... but it's kind of like old news. Let's say that I've got a versioning system... or I've done concepts for clients, and there's Concepts A, B, and C. The client picks B, so what I want to do is get rid of A and C. Now I don't want to delete them, just want to put them away... and hide them, so they don't get mixed up... but I can go back to them if I need them, so Zold. So come up with your own structure. I'm going to delete that one now. I've got another one that I use for video. Kind of similar, slightly different kind of layout. So whenever I'm making a video course like this... all I do is copy and paste this... and say 'InDesign Advanced'. And I've got a place for my raw videos. My Premier Pro, After Effects, that renders the copy. All nice and easy. The other little trick is naming your files. I'm going to name this one... and at the end here let's just give it a new name. I'm going to put in 'Coursework', I'm going to call this one-- let's call it 'Work flow' just to keep it simple. You might just call it work flow, but you should give it a version number. That's not too hard, because we all know that is the kiss of death. If you call anything 'Final'... you know you're going to be opening this again, and making changes. And you end up with, like 'Final 2', and 'Final New', and--- you've done it before. So stick to either a versioning number... or what a lot of agencies will do, put the date backwards. So today is the 17th of the 12th, and it's the 20th. So that's the kind of date backwards. It's the day of the week, the month, and the year. I know, if you're American, you do it kind of-- for some reason you like to put the date in the middle there. You probably hated the way everyone does it... but you might have to stick to this numbering convention... just so that you've got some numbering consistency. Cool thing about doing the date backwards is that... they're all going to stack alphabetically. And it just means, the one at the bottom... so they stack alphabetically... means the one at the bottom is going to be the latest version. Kind of some really high flow... like newspaper ads, or something that's going out every day. You might put the time backwards, the 24-hr clock backwards as well. I find I just use V1, V2. Another little work flow thing is, I guess how you kind of backup your files. If you're in a larger company you might not have to worry about it... but for me, I'm working on my own system. Backing up is, I guess, is important... but plugging in my time machine kind of hard drive is a bit of a pain. It's not a pain, but the problem with that is... it's backing up on to a hard drive that's often right next to my laptop so if my laptop gets stolen they're unlikely... not to take the hard drive as well. So they're kind of just gone together. So you need some sort of backup system. Now, iCloud kind of works. It doesn't seem to work the exact same way that you want. Doesn’t backup everything on your machine, just backs up important documents. So what I use is something called Mozy. All it does, is it's kind of a drip feeding backup system. So whenever I create, or hit 'Save' on a file... it slowly starts drip feeding it up to my Mozy account. Mozy is M-O-Z-Y. They charge, it is 10 bucks a month, but for me as a freelancer... 120 bucks a year, just to have everything backed up. But I've had to use that only once thankfully. My car got broken into, laptop stolen. The cool thing about that is that there's a ton. So all I did is, I got a new laptop, I actually borrowed a friend's... and all I did was install the app. The cool thing about it is that it said... "Hey Dan, would you like to put everything back where you got it?" And I was like, "Oh, yes." And what it did was, it started kind of just pushing... everything back on to my Mac... on this borrowed Mac, into the right places. So it started putting everything back. My documents, all my settings went back, it was a great little setup. Now I had about 50 GB, so it took forever... like nearly about 3 days to inject everything back in. If you've got lots you can go to Mozy and order a DVD. And they send it to you in the post next day. I did both. Didn't end up using the DVD, but it's a super handy little service. Last little time saving trick thing. Whenever I've got, say a Contents page, or-- I do it mainly for Table of Contents. Let's say there's something you need to update on a document... or a note to other people using the InDesign file. Let's say I'm going to draw a nice big box. I'm going to use Magenta because that means business. And I'm going to add some text in here. I'm going to join it to it, and I'm going to say... "Remember to update." I'm going to make it centered. I'll put a couple of returns in, bad design, I know. But, just here is kind of like a big-- don't forget about this thing, all caps. Exclamation mark, I really mean this. So I want this to-- remember to update this page... before you send it out to print or just little notes to people. But you don't want it to print... you don't want it to accidentally go through... so what you can do is, you can put it on a non printing layer. So I've got my Layers panel here, I'm going to make a 'New layer'. I'm going to drag-- I got him selected. Now if I drag this blue dot to the red dot... he's on this layer here, on 'Layer 2' I'm going to give it a name, I'm going to say... this is a 'Non Printing Layer'... to make it super clear, and down the bottom here... you can say, 'Print Layer'. So whenever I go out to 'Export' or 'Print'... this whole entire layer is not going to be added. So it's there, it's in the working document... doesn't go out. I use this quite often when I'm doing things like... the Table of Contents... but also, I do trainer version of notes as well as the student version. So I'll have kind of confidential trainer version only across the middle. Doesn't go out to print... but it's just so that I know which document I'm working on. I'll show you this as well because... this will happen when you'll open the document... when you see something on the page, and it won't be exporting. It's because you've accidentally copied and pasted on to a layer that's non printing. Took me ages one time to figure out why stuff wasn't printing. It's because it was on a layer that had the print layer turned off. So I'm going to click 'OK', and I'm going to lock it. Just so I can't add other stuff to it. So that's going to be it of work flow techniques. There was some good stuff in there, I kind of finished on the data, I think. This one here wasn't my most exciting feature. I should have finished on that Autocorrect stuff. bringyourownlaptop... or the Text Wrap option. Felt like those are the best ones, but anyway, non printing layers it was. All right, that's it, let's look at the next tutorial. 51. Why Should I Use Character Styles In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, we're going to create a Character Style. Why? Because we've created a Character Style... for this first paragraph here... and the nice thing about it is that... because it's connected to a Paragraph Style... I can open up 'Body Copy', just pick a new font, let's pick 'Comic Sans'. And our lovely Character Style adjusts, it's pink... it's Bold, but it's taking the lead from our Paragraph Style... and staying in that font, but being bold and pink... and awfully Comic Sans, sorry, Comic Sans. All right, let's look at how to set one of these up. So to learn what a Character Style does... let's first of all go into 'File', 'New', and create a 'Document'. Let's go to 'Print', we're going to use 'US Letter', make it '2' columns. Click 'Create'. I'm going to bring in some long text, so let's go to 'File', 'Place'. I'm going to use one of our earlier shortcuts. I'm want to bring it over from '06 Style', it's called 'Text'. I want to turn on 'Show Import Options', but I don't want to turn that on forever. So remember, I hold down my 'Shift' key, and I click 'Open'. I get the little custom box, just for this one instance. And I'm going to say 'Remove Styles', click 'OK'. And, remember another little shortcut from earlier? What do I hold on my keyboard so this generates lots of pages? Hold down 'Shift', and get that little curly arrow icon. If I click once in the top left here... it generates pages for me all the way through, and they're all linked. Lovely! First of all we need to create a Paragraph Style... because you'd never have a Character Style without a Paragraph Style. You kind of use them on top of... to add value to a Paragraph Style. So we're going to select on all, we're going to pick... I'm going to pick 'Roboto Medium'. I'm going to pick '10 pt', and I'm going to create a Paragraph Style. So 'Window', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'. We've created lots of Paragraph Styles already. Click on 'Create New Style', double click where it says 'Paragraph Style 1'... We're going to call ours 'Body Copy'. So we've got a Paragraph Style, now we want Character Styles. The reason we have a Character Style is that... you can add a little bit of extraness to our Paragraph Style. Let's say I want to do this first paragraph here... and I want to go through and make it bold, and a color. I want to go through and make it bold, and I want to make it pink color. So that could be my first Paragraph Style. I can create any other Paragraph Style... but then I've got two styles doing a lot of the same work. The only thing different about this is the color and the boldness. So what I want to do, I'm going to undo that... and going to have nothing selected... and create a Character Style that does one thing. So I've got nothing selected, new Paragraph Style, click on this one. He's going to be 'First Para'. What I'm going to do is, under 'Basic Formats'... I'm going to say, whatever font it is, make it bold... and the Character color now is going to be switched out for the pink. Click 'OK'. That Character Style does nothing but those two things. You double click on it... and say, I'm bold, and I'm pink. The cool thing about it is that if I apply it to my Paragraph Style Body Copy... on top of it, I'm going to add this paragraph. Where it becomes quite useful, especially over longer documents... is that if I go in and adjust Paragraph Styles now... so with nothing selected... double click 'Body Copy', 'Basic Character Formats'. Actually we're not using Roboto anymore, we're going to be using Arial. But that's okay, click on 'OK'. Now you'll notice that it changed from Roboto to Arial... including everything that was underneath this Character Style... because that Character Style said... remember, just do two things, be bold, be pink. So it doesn't really care what font it is. Let's go and change it again, something a bit more craziness. Let's go mad, okay? 'Comic Sans'. The font we love to hate, but it's bold and pink. Let's undo that quick. So that's the reason for a Character Style. They're quite simple, you might already know about them... but we need to know this to carry on... with lots of other styles we're going to create... like Nested, and Grep. So let's get on with those now. 52. Advanced Paragraph Styles In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to show you how this blue stuff appears. Basically it's showing me where all my overrides are in my Paragraph Styles. When we make an adjustment, it becomes blue, really obvious to see. Great for Pre-press, let's learn how to do that now in InDesign. So this is quick and easy, but there's a couple of little things you need to do. First of all we need to wreck our Paragraph Style. Let's say, over here, I'm going to play around with the Tracking. So I've just adjusted the Tracking a little bit, using my 'Option-Right'... or 'Alt-Right' on a PC. Other thing I might have changed... is let's say I've gone and adjusted this one to Italics. There's this weird little font size going on, where it's '0.1'. We're just kind of adjusting a few little things to wreck it. Now the trick is, with my Black Arrow, I'm going to click off. I'm going to click on this option here. And this little option is the magic one, it just shows me all my overrides... but it's not going to work if I'm in preview mode, so I have to tap 'W'. You can see here... it's showing me everything highlighted really clearly... that has an override. Overrides are, if I click in here, you can see, it's got a little '+' symbol. This is really good if your job is kind of Pre-press... or checking other people's work. You must easily click on this to see if there's anything broken. I do it all the time where I accidentally do a bit of Tracking. You don't really notice it. It kind of carries on, and you copy and paste this text over here... and you start using it to start with... but we know if you've used the wrong Tracking or the wrong Leading lots in the document. This little cue here just shows you what has changed. You might be doing this because you've turned this on by accident... and you're like, "Why is everything blue?" You might use ?? how to turn it off. The exact same thing works in Character Styles. You turn it on once there, it's on both of them. So you kind of really turn both of them on. And it's the same here... if I play with the Tracking, you can see, I've broken it. That's a little advance feature for Paragraph Styles. All right, let's look at some more exciting styles in the next video. 53. How To Use & Map Word Styles In With Adobe InDesign Styles : Hi there, in this video I'm going to show you... how to bring in Styles from Word, like 'Normal'... and say, you become 'Body Copy'. And Heading, you can become my Style called 'Titles' in InDesign. Click 'OK', they all match up, and life is good. Let's go and learn how to do that now in InDesign. So to match Styles, we need to do two things. Let's first of all open up a file that I've created for us, just to save time. It's under '06 Styles', and open up 'Mapping Styles'. Click 'Open'. Nothing's really in here except for my Paragraph Styles. So go to 'Window', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'... and you'll notice, I've got a Body Copy and Titles. Let's just have a quick little look at them. I'll draw a Text box, fill with Placeholder text. And let's say that's my Heading. So that's what they look like. So 'Titles', and this is all my 'Body Copy'. So this is the Styles I want to keep in InDesign. I'll click that. Next thing I've got is my Word file. I've opened up the file from my 'Exercise File', called 'Text 1'. Just showing here in Word. So, in Word, you need to have used the Styles that are along the top here. You can see, if I click on 'Road Bikes', it's been using 'Heading 1'... and the Body Copy is using 'Normal'. So if you're working with another colleague... or somebody else that's doing the Word text... just make sure they use some of these Titles along the top... so that you can match them. If they're all 'Normal', then you're not going to be able to match the Titles. You'll have to manually go and do it. I can quit out of Word now. So, the way it works is, we're now going to bring in my file... so let's go to 'File', 'Place'. I'm not going to copy and paste. I'm going to bring in the Word doc. I'm going to go 'Show Import Options'... or we can use our shortcut, hold 'Shift' and click 'Open'. I'm going to click it on, just in case you haven't seen that shortcut video. Click 'Open'. And the magic trick happens down the bottom here. By default, 'Remove' is just going to remove them... they're all kind of plain text. 'Preserve the Style' is going to do some bad stuff, watch this, click 'OK'. Hold 'Shift', click once, so it drags it in... and it brings in 'Normal' in Heading. And I'm like, "Man, not those ones." What I could do now though is I could go to 'Normal', and hit 'Delete'... and it says, you can't delete it, I'm using it... what are you going to replace it with? And I can replace with 'Body Copy'. Click 'OK'. Same with the Heading 1, say goodbye Heading 1... but, can't delete it because I'm using it, so you use 'Titles', please. That's a way of mapping them. You can do a little bit more sneaky. So I'm going to undo until all of that's gone... and I'm going to go to 'File', 'Place'. Make sure that 'Show Import Options' is on. Click on 'Text 1', click 'Open'. And instead of doing that trick... what we can do is we can do a 'Customize Style Import'... and click on 'Style Mapping'. It just means that, it's seen that it's got Normal inside of there... and say, what would you like it to be in here? I'm like, I want Normal to become 'Body Copy'. And the Heading that's been used... I want that to become a Title, that I'm using. These are 'Normal (Web)', that I know is not being used. You could say actually, just replace with the 'Basic Character' style, please. And the 'Basic Paragraph' style, and 'None'. Just to kind of clean it all up, click 'OK'. Click 'OK', and now if I hold 'Shift'... click once, I'm going to bring through all of my Word Document... and it's going to map this. Highlight it, use 'Titles', use 'Body Copy'. Saving us loads of time. All right, so that is how to map Styles from Word into InDesign... to save loads of time, because we're awesome. All right, on to the next video. 54. How To Create Nested Styles In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at... how to create a Nested Style. And what it's going to do is... I'm going to click in this paragraph anywhere... and I'm going to apply the Style that I've created for Feature... and magically, it's going to also apply a Character Style to all words... right up until this colon. Super useful for a numbered list, or in our case, this Featured list. Let's go and learn how to do that now in InDesign. So for this to work, let's open up a file that I've got made for us. It's in '06 Styles', open up 'Nested Styles', click 'Open'. Open up your 'Paragraph Styles' panel. It's under 'Window', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'. Now our Nested Style, remember, is a way... to connect Paragraph Styles and Character Styles together automatically. So you need both of them to exist first. So, first of all we're going to work on this Features list... and what you'll notice about it is that... 'Build to last', and the colon ':', same with Timeless. So I would like a Style that automatically made this kind of bold and green. So we need two things, we need a Paragraph Style... so I'm going to select all of this... and I'm going to say, let's make a new Paragraph Style. Even though there was a Body Copy 1, they have to be separate. Double click 'Paragraph Style 1', this one's going to be my 'Feature'. 'Feature Style', based on, I'd like to just go back to my 'Paragraph Style'. Click 'OK', it's up to you, that doesn't really matter. It's just my personal preference. So we've got a Paragraph Style... now we're going to create a Character Style. So with nothing selected, go to 'Character Styles'... I'm going to create a new one. Double click it. This is going to be my 'Feature Character Style'. I should have called the other one Paragraph Style. And we're going to go to 'Basic Character Formats'... and all I want to do is make it 'Bold'. And I'd like it to make the Character color our-- actually I don't have that green one, different document. I'm going to make mine the awful green. Just to prove a point. Click 'OK'. Nothing really happens. I've got a Paragraph Style over here called 'Feature Style'... and then I've got a Character Style that's just as bold, and ugly green. Now is when we connect them up. So nothing selected, go to Paragraph Styles... double click 'Feature Style'. And the Nested Style connects them in here. And some of the 'Drop Caps and Nested Styles'. So they get connected through the Paragraph Style. And we say, 'Nested Styles', that's 'New Nested Style'. Click there. Where it says 'None', I want this Nested Style... to apply the 'Feature Character Style' that we made. That's the bold and ugly green. And now if I kind of click around, you'll see, preview's on... and at the moment, it's doing it all automatically through one word. So just going to the first word, applying the green and bold. That might work for you, you might just have the first word... and you need to make it that green and bold. So just a play at the Paragraph Style, and that will work. What I'd like to do, is I'd like to go-- actually just so you know, you can go up to '2' words, click out. You'll see, it goes 2 words, up to you... but I would like to go through one, and instead of words... you can go through here, and look at the different options. You might have a tab that you want to break across. Might be a certain amount of 'Letters' or 'Digits'. You go through the first three digits. You might have an 'Em Space', so we're on Em Space. I am going to actually delete the word 'Words'... and actually use my own character, and put it in a colon... because that matches there, click off. So what it's going to do now is it's going to apply that Character Style... through to the colon. This becomes really nice when I'm doing something else... so 'Graceful Design'... click on this one here, I'm going to say, I want you to be a 'Feature Style'. Ah, it's broken. Because it's looking for that colon, it can't find it. I'm going to put in the colon here. Awesome, huh! So that's a Nested Style. And it's just a way to automatically... connect Paragraph Styles and Character Styles... and in particular, it uses the beginning of the Paragraph as its starting point. Now I want you to, on your own... create a new Paragraph Style for this group. And instead of using the Character for colon to stop it... I want you to change it and go and use this open bracket '('. The only difference would be, there was an option that said 'Through to'... you're going to say 'Upto', because we want it to stop before it gets here. All right, so that's how to create a Nested Style in InDesign. 55. How To Create A Grep Style In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to look at how to do a Grep Style. What do they do? They do magic. They are Styles that-- let's say I type in our Business name, 'Maynooth Furniture'... As soon as I typed it, it added a Character Style of bold and green. Okay, not pretty, but automatic and magic. Another cool use is, I've got a quote here. Imagine if I have a Style that knew... whenever I put a quotation around something... it Italicized it. Okay, I love Grep Styles. So, let's go and learn how to make those now in InDesign. So Grep Styles are amazing. First of all we're going to open up a document I kind of set up already. It's in '06 Styles', grab 'Grep Styles', open it up. And the way a Grep Style works is that... it kind of works like a Nested Style. It's an automatic way of connecting Paragraph and Character Styles. The difference between Nested and Grep Style... is that Nested Styles uses the beginning of the Paragraph as kind of Home base. So you can't really work off that. So it's great in the last video where we did Nested Styles... remember, we did our Featured List. Great for Numbered List, anything like that... whereas Grep is a little different... it kind of reaches through the entire document. So you need both, really. What I would like to do is... whenever the Business name, you can see it there, Maynooth Furniture... whenever that appears, I'd like it to be bold. It's just what we do, as a business, so I want to automatically do it. So, first of all we need to select all of this, and make a Paragraph Style. So I've got my Paragraph Styles open. I am going to double click it, and this one's going to be my 'Body Copy'. I'm going to click 'OK'. Next thing I'm going to do is create a Character Style. So I'm going to click off in the background. So I've got nothing selected... grab my Character Style, make a new one. This one is going to be 'Business Name'. And I'm going to say, I just want it to be 'Bold'. I'm going to change the color. I'll probably wouldn't do this normally... but I'm just doing it just to make it obvious. So I picked the green and bold. So now I need to connect the two out. So I got nothing selected, back to my 'Paragraph Style'... open up 'Body Copy'... and in here we're looking for this one, it says 'Grep Style'. Now, 'New Grep Style'. And what I'd like it to do, I'd like it to apply the Style... click where it says 'None'. I'd like to apply Business name to the text, delete this. And it's going to say 'Maynooth Furniture'. Click out. You'll see in the background there... wherever the word Maynooth Furniture appears... it's going to apply that Style. Click 'OK'. It's a dynamic thing, so it means, whenever I type Maynooth Furniture - yes I have to spell out my spelling. - it will automatically apply. So it's really handy, it's kind of dynamic, and it will always do what it needs to do. Yours might be just a slight change, you might have some weird thing... that you do with your Business name, might be just Italics or Underlined. Whatever you want to do. You might have different kind of versions of that. You can open up Body Copy in here, and say... under 'Grep', you might just keep adding them... so when I add a new Grep Style that is... just the same thing, but maybe lower case... I know, you probably wouldn't find this in this instance, because it's a Business name... but you might be doing it for something else... some sort of language you use in there... so you might have a few different options. Still applies, 'Business Name' Character Style. But it's looking for both lower case and upper case now. Let's click 'OK'. So that's a pretty basic use of a Grep Style... but it's the one that I use the most. Another thing I'd like to do for Body Copy is... you see here, I've got kind of quotation marks around this kind of like... this inspirational quote here. What I'd like to do is whenever anything is inside of these quotes... I'd like it to be Italicized to make it kind of colloquial. So I'm going to use the same Paragraph Style... but I'm going to create a new Character Style. So nothing selected, 'New Style', click in here. And this one's going to be my 'Quote'... and what I'm going to do... under 'Basic Character Format', I'm going to go into here... and I'm going to say, actually I'd like you to be 'Italic'. In terms of Character Color, I'm going to... not do anything. So what I want to do-- that sometimes happens... it's kind of picking, and I'm like, "How do I unpick it?" Hold down the 'Command' key on a Mac... or 'Control' key on PC, and just unselect it. So if I go into 'General' now, it says, it's just doing Italics. And it's not even doing that, it's 'Based On'. I want you to 'Based On' nothing, I just want you to make it Italic. That's its only job in the world, this Character Style. Let's click 'OK'. So, I'm going to click off in the background... I'm going to go to Paragraph Styles. I'm going to open up 'Body Copy'... and what I want to do is add another 'Grep Style'... that says, 'Grep Style'. I want to apply the 'Quote'. When do I want it to apply it? I want it-- see this, I put in two quotation marks. Now I want to double check whether they're using the curly ones or the straight ones. You might just have to copy and paste these in, because they can be different. I know they're straight quotes, it's what I'm using, because I can see them. And inside of here, we need to enter in... the Grep code for any character. And it's full stop plus question mark, '.+?' Now I only know that because I teach... and this is one of my favorite teaching Grep codes. In here, there are bunch of other things in here. So you might be able to build your own. You'll find stuff in here, like 'Wildcards', I want to find... maybe any digit that's between those two quote marks. You can apply it. Or any other case that happens to be between quote marks. So you can build out your own Grep codes. I find I end up just Googling them, and copying other people... rather than try to work them out myself. I find that little hard. I'll clear off in the background here, and hopefully... you can see there, anything between the quote marks is italicized. And I click 'OK'. Let's see if I can make it work again. So you, quote ' " '. It's not working because there's no other side of it. A quote ' " ' mark there. Awesome, huh. So that my friends is a Grep code. Takes a little while to set up, but can be super useful... if you were doing very similar things. Very long documents, or for the same client. All right, that's going to be it for Grep codes. 56. How To Use A Next Style In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to learn what a Next Style does. I'll show what it does, and then we'll look at how to make it. So I got this list, it's repeating the name... the color, the price, and the description. And that goes on and on. Imagine if I could just click on this one and say... I'd like you to apply Heading, but then... spill through all of these other ones, and do it repeatedly. Look at that. Really useful things like Catalogs... or anything that has repeating data. Let's look at how to make a Next Style in InDesign. So to create a Next Style... I've created a new 'US Letter'. Any old document will do. I'm going to grab the 'Type tool', draw out a Type box. I'm doing it over half a screen for no real good reason. We're going to place some text, we're going to go to 'File'... going to go to 'Place'. I'm going to bring in the 'Product Sheet'. The Product Sheet is a kind of repeating bit of information. There's the product name, there's this color... its price, and its description. So this only works when it is this kind of repetitiveness. Now if your description has two paragraphs in it... so this, a 'return', and another paragraph. This one only has one, and this one has three, it's not going to work. So this really has to be a defined list of really kind of regular paragraph breaks. Often it's really good if you get that out of a database... or Excel sheet, or CSV, something like that. So, when this works, we need to create three Styles. I'll do it by selecting this first one, and go, you are going to be bigger. Using my shortcut, 'Command-Shift-.' Pick your color. 'White'. It's just going to be made the same color, but bold. The Price is going to be a little bit bigger. And the Description is going to be made a bit smaller. So whatever you do, doesn't really matter, I've got three of these. So actually what I'd like to do is have that bit of a paragraph break. And the 'Command-Option-7' will switch you over to Paragraph. And I'm going to have a 'Space After'. I said paragraph break, I mean space after. So there, there, there, this one needs a bit more as well. Then a big one between that and the next. You can see, repeats, repeats, repeats. I'm going to turn these into Styles... by going to 'Window', 'Styles, 'Paragraph Styles'. If you are sick of going through that you can actually just use this one up here. You might not be able to see it, depends on how big your screen is. This is a 15" MacBook so I can see a reasonable amount. If you're on a smaller one, maybe a MacBook, or a 13" MacBook Pro... you might not be able to see this one here. I can just go into here, and go to 'New Paragraph Style'. I'm going to call this one 'Heading'. I'm going to put one at the beginning here, you don't have to. This just will make it easier for you to follow. Here's my Heading, it's based on nothing. Let's click 'OK'. Same with this one here, I'm going to say, 'New Paragraph Style'. This one's going to be called '2'. This one's going to be called 'Color'. Spelt that way. Based on nothing. Price. It's all going to be here. Same, same, same, and then the last one's going to be 'Description'. '4 Description'. So I've got four Paragraph Styles. What I'd like him to do is kind of repeat. That's what the Next Style is for. After this Style, the next one is going to be this, then this. The way to make them work is... I'm going to click off, so I've got nothing selected. Open up my 'Paragraph Styles'. You can do it from that little drop down... I just find it a little easier from here, just to show you. Let's just drag them so the Heading's at the top. Then Color, then Price. This doesn't have to happen as well. Just makes it a little easier for me to explain. So, what I'd like to do, nothing selected... open up 'Heading'. All we do, under 'General', is say, 'Heading'... I want the 'Next Style' to be 'Color'. Click 'OK', double click 'Color'. I'd like the Next Style after that to be the 'Price'. That's why I numbered them, 1, 2, 3, 4 to make it easy. And after Price, I would like it to go to the 'Description'. And this is the magic one to get it to repeat. So when it gets to Description, I want to go to the Next Style... which is back to the Heading, so it loops around. Now to make this work, or to apply it, it's a bit weird. You select on the Text box... I'm going to right click 'Heading'. Now I'm going to say... 'Apply Heading 1' to this whole box... but then, apply the 'Next Style', watch this. Hey ho, magical. Goes through and applies the Style, then the Next Style, then the Next Style. So that is a Next Style. It kind of continues to work. So you're going to apply it like I did there. There's a few extra options here... but watch this, if I'm here, and I'm working... and I want to add another one, I hit 'return'... I start putting in my next one... which is going to be the made up name called 'Joskle'. I made up these names at the top here. I'm trying to be all Swedish with my fancy names. 'Return', I'm going to put in the color of blue. Put in a 'return', I'm going to put in the price. You can see, I bring out a space, but as I go along... it's going to apply that Next Style every time... because of that little Next Style thing we did in there. Next one is, add 'Description'. I hope you found a good use for a Next Style. Great for Catalogs, or kind of things that are pulled out of databases... or terribly named furniture. All right, that's it for Next Styles. 57. Advanced Object Styles In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this tutorial we're going to take Object Styles to the next level. I'm excited, you should be excited... because we're going to do something like this. We're going to bring in a couple of images... dump them on a page, select them, and say... become the right size, even fit. Great if you need to have the exact same size images. Every single time you can create a great style. It gets even better, watch this. Now I have an image, I'm just going to dump it on a page anywhere. I wish it would go into the exact right spot. Ah, hang on, there we go. Perfect. Right position, right size, I can set a Style... to make things go wherever I want, to be the right size, kind of, mostly. Let's go and learn how to do that now in InDesign. So Object Styles are really basic. You've probably done one before, let's quickly recover those. So, 'Rectangle tool', I'm going to draw something... but I'd like it to have a Fill of 'green'. Remember, our 'X' key brings the Fill to the front. Then Stroke to the front, and it's going to be 'white'. I'm going to make it nice and thick. I want to use that as a Style, so it happens over and over again. Let's go to 'Window', 'Styles', 'Object Styles'. With it selected, with my Black Arrow here... I'm going to say, you my friend are a new 'Object Style'. This is going to be called my 'Green Box'. Cool thing about that is, later on... when I grab my Rectangle tool, and it goes back to the default... I can click on 'Green Box', and it matches the Style. So that is basic Object Styles. Let's look at some of the more advanced usage. We're going to bring in an image. We're going to go to '04 Interactive', and grab one of these ones. So grab any of these, except for the Chair... because that's already in the background. I'm going to grab this one, 'Image 4'. Now, I'm going to just place it by clicking once. I hit my 'W' key, so I can see the whole thing. I'm going to resize it, and let's say we spend a bit of time going... "Okay, this is how big all the images are going to appear in this Catalog." So what I'd like to do is be able to kind of... set this as a size as the default as well. It's kind of new for the new version of InDesign. I want it to have a Stroke around the outside. For no good reason. But with it selected, I'm going to create a new 'Object Style'. Double click it, and this is going to be my 'image'. What's not on by default is, down the bottom here... well actually, at the top here... it looks like it's on, it's called 'Size and Position'... but it's set to 'None'. So let's look at 'Size', and let's adjust... the 'Height & Width'. All right, let's click 'OK'. It's going to kind of work. It's got a little, but it's actually worth learning because it's quite useful. So that's the exact size I want all my images to be now. So I've got a new page, I want another image, I want to bring it in. 'File', 'Place', and I'm going to bring in the 'Kitchen' this time, click it. It becomes really very big. I want it to be that size with the Stroke. Watch this, I click on 'Image'... and it almost works. It makes the Frame the right size. It makes the line around the outside, so it made the size right. Just hasn’t fit the image in. So you can kind of fix it. You can go into 'Image', and say... actually I would like the Style to also do... down the bottom here, 'Frame Fitting Option'. Now I want to say, I want you to 'Fit Content to Frame', please. Can you see, it adjusts over here. So I've turned it on, turned on 'Auto-Fit'. 'Fit Content to Frame', awesome, so it's going to remember it. Not quite. So I'm going to bring in my third option, 'Floating'. Same thing, nice and big. I click on this, and... it still doesn't work, don't know why, it seems Auto-fit... and I told the Object Style to do it... so weird little thing is, you just turn it off... turn it back on, and it works. So it's not a deal breaker. It works, but you just got to turn this on and off. Feels like a bug, it's been in there for ages... but I think it's totally worth it. So I've got these images here. I'm not sure what I'm going to do with him, I'm just going to actually undo. I'm going to move you over here... and you, over here, Ah! So stylish, Dan. The other option you can do with Object Styles... is moving the position and size. This is going to be really handy for a logo. I'm going to bring in a Logo, it's going to be in my 'Exercise Files'. There is 'Option 4'. I'm totally not using Option 4, I'm going to bring in Option 1. I'm going to click and drat it to get it to be the right size. I adjust it, and I get it perfect. And let's say that I want this in this particular spot all the time. I've got a Corporate Spec Manual, that says... it needs to be these many centimeters from the side... and these many millimeters from the top... and you get it all perfect, right? And you'd like to set that as a Style. You can, let's create a new Style, with it selected... 'Object Style 1', this one's going to be my 'Logo' Style. And in here, where it says 'Size and Position'... we're going to do 'Size'. 'Height & Width'. But we're also going to do Position, x and y. Turn the Fitting on as well, 'Frame Fitting', turn it on. Fit 'Content Proportionately'... even though it doesn't work. Click 'OK'. Now let's say we've got a new document, or in our case, just a new page. I can go, dump my logo in. It's 'Option 1'. Click once in the page, and then, magically, click on 'Logo'. Gets into the right position. The Frame that's inside kind of works. Remember, just turn this on and off, and it works. So, that can be super handy. Maybe 'T's & C’s' down the bottom, or 'Logo Placement'. You might have something that kind of happens... the same on every document, and you might find that useful. The only trouble is that it uses the Left Hand Edge as a reference. So if your document... became Landscape now, it ended up in the same place... and it will be all this white area over here. It's actually using the measurement from over here. So I can't figure out a way of fixing that. If you do, drop me a comment, I'd love to know, because it's been baffling me. You might also find, when you're doing it, in the future... that this Auto-fit thing just works, you don't have to turn it on and off. One last thing to do with Object Frames is... this is a strange one, you might not use it, you might do. So I'm going to bring in an image, and let's bring in from... from my 'Interactive' again, let's grab any of these images. I bring it through, and yes, looks good that way. I'm going to do some stuff to it, I'm going to add my terrible Drop Shadow. I'm also going to go there, and do a 'Bevel and Emboss'. It's terrible, I know. Terrible. But say you've liked this, and you want to bring in images. Instead of bringing them in, and having to apply styles from them... you can create this crazy style, called the Place Gun Frame. What you need to do is, with your Style selected, make a new Object Style. And with it, double click it to name it. And you just need to call it this, you got to call it 'Place Gun Frame'. It has to be spelt that way, it has to use Title case. So I've pulled this style, our Bevel and Emboss, and Drop Shadow. We've made a Style called Place Gun Frame. Why this is good? It means that later on... I can come into here, place something else... Chair, and I'm going to drag it out, and look... it's got those Styles applied to it. You might do something just more simple. Might be a Stroke around the outside that you always have to do. It's just a weird little feature that-- Yes, you have to call it Place Gun Frame. What you'll also might do is close everything down... and add your Place Gun Frame style. If I close this down now, save it, and I close it... now if I open up my 'Essentials'... and go to my 'Object Styles', and create an Object Style now... it's going to be there forever. I agree, that one's probably a little random... but cool kind of trick, I felt that was. Do I ever use it? No, if I'm honest. I don't have Bevel and Emboss drop shadows... but you might be doing something long and repetitive... and it's worth remembering... and you'd be like, "Hey, I can use that trick." I hope you do, either way, let's move on to the next video. 58. Best Practices For Working Across Multiple Documents In Adobe InDesign : So it is time to look at what are the best practices... when you're working between a couple of documents. Some of them are easy... some of them we've kind of covered a little bit before... I want to put them all into one amazing video. First up, stealing colors, and Paragraph Styles. So in my Swatches panel, I would like to go steal colors from 'Load Swatches'. Find a document, I'm using '05 Long Document', 'Section 2'. Bring it in, you can see down here, we brought in some new colors. The Google ones, the FedEx ones. It's a great way of just kind of reaching in and grabbing new colors. Same for Paragraph Styles, 'Window', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'. I want to steal some Styles from that same document. I want to go to the 'Burger menu', go to 'Load Paragraph Styles', 'Section 2'. What do I want? I don't want you... I don't want you, I don't want you, so you can decide what you want. Click 'OK', and I've got the Heading and the Body Copy to get started. Next bit of awesomeness, is I want to-- actually I'm going to close down that. I've got this document open, I want to open up a second document. 'File', 'Open', I'm going to steal stuff from one of the files I made earlier. I'm going to grab it from this one... which was one of my Digital Publishing guys. So I've got it open. There's this stuff in here that I want to steal. Instead of tabbing between these two... we can just go to this option up here. Say 'Arrange Documents', and you can see... there's lots of different ways of doing this. I'm going to hit this option here. We'll go one on this side, one on that side. Really cool when you've got a bigger screen than I do. We'll close down 'Paragraph Styles'. You can see, I can just grab you, copy it, paste it. Grab you, drag it across, animate this other document. So you're not impressed? I'm going to go back to this first option here. How to get you impressed? I'm going to open up that Digital Publishing one. So I've got my Home page, it's way up here. I'm also working on a page down here, I'm kind of going back and forth. We've used our shortcut called 'Command J'. You can go 'Page 1', 'Command J', 'Page 7'... and jump back and forth that way. What we're going to do is use this little icon down here. It's quite similar to the last one... except it splits the window in half, with this same document. I'm still only looking at my Digital Publishing. So on this side, I'm going to zoom out, so you can see the whole page. On this side, I'm going to zoom out so you can see this page here. Same document, just looking at different pages. Really handy when you are maybe checking the Contents page... and looking further on in the document... or if you've got a Cover and Back Cover... and you just want to kind of see them, and how they relate to each other. Also works good, is say, on this side here I can look at-- both looking at the Cover here... you'll see they're totally connected. Watch this, I'll move it, they move on both, though it's the same document... but what you can do, is you can be working in really tight here... working on the Tracking, and just keeping an eye over here... and a larger view, you kind of see what's happening. So I'm going to turn it off by clicking that same icon down here. Now, I want to go back, I should have done this in the beginning... because I've forgotten this step. That's okay, I'm going to go back to up here. I'm going to split them in half. Let's pretend we're back here. Now this new document over here, I want to steal lots of bits... but I'd like him to be a little bit special. We're going to use something called the 'Content Collector'. So I'm going to zoom out over here. And instead of just copying and pasting across... we're going to use this magic thing. It's called the 'Content Placer Tool'. Actually there's a Collector and a Placer, so we're going to start with the Collector. What we're going to do is, I'm going to click on that. I want him, I want him, let's say I want this thing as well. That's what I want. I want this chunk of text. You can see them all appearing down the bottom here. Now I can switch the Placer, either up here... grab the Placer tool... or you can toggle between the Collector, and the Placer down here. The special option here is to create a link. When I paste this over here, it comes across. The image, I'm going to drag out. I can click on this first. I'm going to place my little image, and I'll click once for my text. The difference is, can you see this locking icon? These are separate documents saved in different places... but because they're linked, watch this... go over here, find, say the image here. I'm going to go through, actually I want to change the Stroke. I'm going to select it with the White Arrow... to grab just the circle that I made. I'm going to say, you need to be the 'Maynooth Pink' now. Back to my Black Arrow, click over here. And what you'll notice is... can you see that little link icon changed into like a little caution symbol... to say, "That's been updated, and I'm linked." "You should know." You might not see it because you might be in the Preview mode, so 'W'. So make sure you're working in the Normal mode... which is the W key. And over here you can say, actually click on this. Updated. Cool, huh! Now a circle, not that useful... but in terms of text they can be super useful. You can have one kind of, like parent text document... or you can have lots of other documents that link to it. It might be your pricing, or your address, or your disclosure statement. Something that gets really used lots. You can adjust it over here. Can't remember where it is now. You are there, Shelves. Zoom in, and we've adjusted our Prices. It's now 55. Over here, click in here, it's updated, 55. Cool, huh! Now you can do something similar without the Content Collector... and it's probably how I do it a little bit more. So we're going to go from 'Arrange Documents', back to 'Single View'. We're going to go to 'File', 'Open'. And in your folder, and in your 'Exercise Files'... under '07 Multiple Documents', open up 'Stationery Set'. Let's be on page 1, and you see this, my Letter Head... actually I've got a Comp slip on page 2, and business card on page 3. Let's be on page 1. What I'd like to do is use this address across all of them. I want them all to be linked. So instead of using the Content Collector... we're going to use this method, so we're going to... select it with the Black Arrow. We're going to go to 'Edit', and go to something called 'Place and Link'. We don't have to copy it first, for some reason, do that. You'll notice that the Content Collector just opens. So we are using our technique while using the icon. What I'm going to do here is, I'm going to... click and drag out my Text... and I'm going to make it so it covers the whole Comp slip. And the cool thing about this... like before, I go through and change this, say that the Address was wrong. It's actually 145. You'll notice down here, instantly... as long as I'm not on my Preview button, I'm on Normal... enter the 'W' key, click here, and it goes and updates. Let's say we want to do something even more special. Same sort of thing, I'm going to go, like this. First one selected, he's going to be the Parent. I'm going to go to 'Edit'. Copy that link. Place that link even, come down to this one... and I'm going to place it in, but there's a few things I want to change. I want to change the Layout... because I want it to be, first of all, Type tool. I want the Left Aligned, and I want to maybe resize this. So I want to do some stuff to this thing. The only trouble with that though... is if I go through now and update this top one here... so it's not Dan, it's Daniel. Come back down, you'll notice I get this arrow, click on it... Click 'Yes', and it goes back to all the same styling. The text came along, but the style changes. So what I want to do is open up my 'Window', 'Styles', 'Paragraph Styles'. Lots of Paragraph Styles in InDesign. What I'll do is delete this guy, go back to this first one here. I'm going to select it all. I'm going to give him a Paragraph Style... because basically we're going to map them like we did earlier with the Word Styles. We're going to say, you my friend, are a Style for the Letterhead. Click 'OK', Black Arrow, with it selected, go to 'Place and Link'. Come down here, click once. And what we're going to do is restyle it. Same sort of way, I'm going to drag it down... move it in, do some stuff to it. 'Type tool'. 'Right Align'. Black Arrow, make it even a little bit smaller, so it fits down there. Move it up a little bit, okay, I'm spending lots of time now. Let's do something really obvious, let's change the color. I'm going to pick the Turquoise from above. I don't like it, but it makes it really easy to look at... but it's going to make it really obvious. I'm going to select it all, and make a new Style. Paragraph Style 1, I'm going to call this one 'Business Card'. I'm not going to base it on the Letterhead one... I'm going to make it its Lone Ranger style. That's not part of it, it's just something that I do, it's up to you. Now what we can do is, this thing's linked. You can still see it there. What we can do, it's a little fiddly, I guess, go to 'Links'... it's showing me the Parent, and this one over here. What I'm going to do is right click this guy, say 'Link Options'. What I'd like to do is this bottom one here... where you define a Custom Mapping. Click on 'Settings', and you want to say... 'New Style Mapping'. The original one is going to be a Letterhead... and I'd like to map it down the bottom here... to Business Card. Click 'OK'. Click 'OK'. Now when I update... I go up to here, and I say, it's no longer daniel@maynooth... it's 'daniel@maynoothfurniture'. A website that doesn't exist. Black Arrow, come down here. Comp Slip, it's going to update nicely. Now Business Card though, watch this. Click 'Yes'. It updated with 'maynoothfurniture', but also kept the style. I really like that one, that's great for having a Parent. Now you could do this across lots of documents... like we did with the Content Collector, I can grab this one here, the Parent. 'Edit'. 'Paste and Select'. Jump to a different document, paste it in here. And they are still linked across documents. Gets a little bit more complicated, and potentially troublesome... when you've got lots of documents all connected to each other. if you do have do have something linked, and you're like... "Actually, stop being linked"... you can just go to your 'Links' panel... right click it, and say, 'Unlink'. Sometimes you've got to do it twice... there's two options in here, the original, and this one, 'Unlink'. Nice! Now he is his own thing, and he is not connected to our original document. All right, so that is it on how to work effectively and efficiently... across multiple documents in InDesign. All right, let's get on to the next video. 59. How To Use Adobe Stock With Adobe InDesign CC : Okay, what is Adobe Stock? All that it is, is stock imagery that you get to use for your projects. So they're professional photographs that you get to use commercially. They cost about $20/month, it's their subscription service. You can sign up at bringyourownlaptop.com/stock... and that will give you 10 free images to get started. Now there are competitors. iStock, and Shutterstock are the main ones... but to be honest, they're all very similar. You find images that are on iStock, are also on Adobe Stock and Shutterstock. There are some exclusivity deals... but most of them are all the same. Now the main perk for Adobe Stock is, I'll show you here. So, when I'm in here, I'm going to search for 'furniture'. I need them for my project. And I'm going to pick an image. There's one that I want, and that is this one over here. Now when I hover about this kind of download cloud thing... I have the option of just downloading it to my computer, and that's fine... but if you use the Libraries, it adds a special kind of feature and functionality. So down here, I'm going to add it to my Maynooth Furniture that I've made. You might add a Library there. And what you'll notice, if I jump back into InDesign... you can see, I've got my CC Libraries open... I'm switched to Maynooth Furniture, and there's my image. So I'm going to drag this in, and drag it out. Now to start with, it is watermarked. So I haven't paid for it yet... because I haven't got the client to say, "Yes I like it yet"... or I haven't decided if I like it yet. So you get to start with a reasonably High Res image... to start your design work... except it's got the big ugly watermark in it. So say you get it how you want. We're going to do just a tiny bit of work to show you the magic of it. So, I'll make it here. We give it 'No' Fill, and I'm going to give it-- actually going to give the Fill 'Black', and 'No' Stroke. I'm going to lower the opacity a bit. And I grab both of these. Select both of these, and I'm going to push them all the way to the back. So I work through this, and I've liked it... and the client signed it up, you can see some other images here. What's really nice about Adobe Stock is, if I click on the image... you can see, in the corner of the icon here... can you see, like a licensed image from Adobe Stock? This is where the magic happens. You can do it from over here as well. You can right click it, and say, 'License Image'. And because I'm paying my money, and I get 10 free a month... I know that I've got-- if I jump back into Adobe Stock... you can see at the top here, I've got seven left for this month. You can pay more to get more, but what I can do... is click on this little icon here... hold tight. It's going to use one of my seven licenses, I'm going to click 'OK'. And what's really nice is, watch, watch, watch. You can see, it's syncing over here. And you can see, the watermark's gone, and now it's a High Res version. So it's just super handy if you are working with images. It's really even better when you're using, say Photoshop. You can use these images, do a lot of kind of manipulation to them. Adjust them, bend them, do lots of cool stuff... and license them, and then you don't have to try and redo it later on. Cool! So now I have the image. I get to use that on any of my projects now... because I am legally allowed to use it commercially. And that my friends, is Adobe Stock... tying it into CC Libraries. 60. How To Crop Images Inside Of Text In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to do some Advance Cropping... where we stick it inside stars... and we stick it inside custom shapes that we make... and awesomely, we stick images inside of text. Let's go and do that now in InDesign. So let's do the first one, doing some custom shapes. So we've pasted it into a circle before, in case you missed that one. It's really easy, pick a shape. I'm going to use the 'Polygon Tool', click on it once. I'm going to double click it. I'm going to pick '5' sides, with a Star Inset of '50'... to give me kind of a traditional star shape. Holding 'Shift' while I'm dragging, grab an image. Click off in the background, 'File', 'Place'. Find any image, I'm finding one from '03 Magazine'. I'll bring this guy. Remember just to paste it over the top of where you want to go. Go to 'Edit', 'Cut'. Select it, and go to 'Edit', 'Paste Into', that's the magic trick. Now this is one we did earlier, inside of a circle. I'm going to select it, and delete it. What I'd like to do is a bit more of a custom shape. So I'm going to go back to the 'Ellipse Tool', grab an 'Ellipse'. I am going to draw out a circle. And I'm going to grab the 'Pen Tool'. The Pen tool has a couple of options, I'm just going to use the top Pen tool. And I'm going to click once on the edge... and you'll see the Pen tool turns into like a little '+'. I'll click once there, then drag, once about there, and then one in between. Why? Because I want to grab my White Arrow. I'm going to drag that one in between out. Sometimes it can be a little hard to select, so you got to click 'Off'. Then hover kind of roughly where it was, then click on just that one point. It's even harder now, there's lots of dots, but that's what I want to do. I want to pull out like a little blob. Next thing I want to do is go back to my Pen tool... there's an option here, it says 'Convert Direction'. Right now it's a bit of a blob, it's got a rounded end. I'm just going to click on it once... and that will clear off those little rounded bits. Now it's nice and pointed. So you can make any shape. I just made like a little speech bubble, that's what I wanted to do. Bring in another image. I got enough images to grab. I'm going to grab one from 'Spring Flyer'. 'Modern kitchen with white and yellow colors'. Remember, I drag it so it's just above where you need it to go. Cut it. 'Edit', 'Cut', then 'Edit', 'Paste Into'. So it doesn't really matter what kind of shape it is. You can draw in Illustrator as well, and copy, and paste it in... if you're more comfortable drawing in there. It could be some of the options from our CC Marketplace. So 'Assets', 'Market'... 'Download an Icon', and place it into that. You might have to ungroup it first. Now let's get into the thing you've been waiting for, the pasting inside text. And this totally reminds me of Baywatch, for some reason. Everybody remembers Baywatch, not the new one, the old one. With mr Hasselhoff. So I've got a text box, I'm going to write Baywatch, for no good reason. Do you remember? It was like waves in the background. So what I'm going to do is make a nice big font. I'm using 'Command-Shift-.' to make it bigger. You can use 'Control-Shift-.' on a PC. I'm going to pick a nice-- there's Roboto Slab in here, 'Roboto Slab Bold'. Too big. Slab is too big a chunky font. And what I'd like to do is paste an image inside of that. Now for this to work we need to do something called Outlining the Text. Now, because we outline it, we can't then adjust it later on. So often it can be handy just to duplicate it... so we've got a backup version. With this selected, let's go to 'Type'... there's one in here, it says 'Create Outlines'. Basically it turns it into shapes, that look like text. You can't use the Type tool anymore... but what we can do, is we can bring in an image. Let's go to 'Exercise Files'... let's bring in one of the ones from 'Drawing'. Not even sure which one I'm going to pick, I'll pick this one. So 'Image 4', and because I had it selected... and because I had this option turned on, 'Replace Selected Item'... it just put it in. If it didn't work, you can just draw it over the top, like we did everything else. Get it in the right spot. Cut it. Then select it, and go to 'Edit', 'Paste Into'. Baywatch. All right, that's going to be it for some advanced copying. On to the next video. 61. Using Adobe Comp CC To Make InDesign Layouts On Your Mobile Phone Or Ipad : Hey there, it's real me back again. In this video we're going to look at... something called Adobe Comp, it's another app. It's different from Capture, which we've done, it's another free app. So there is Android and Apple, so go download it. Works best on iPad. I don't have an iPad, so I'm going to do it on my phone. Let's go and look at that now. So instead of Adobe Capture, see this second one down, Adobe Comp... I'm going to open it up. Now to be honest, I don't use this one myself... but I wanted to share with you, because it's really cool. The only reason I don't use it is because I don't own an iPad. So hit the little '+' in the bottom right. I'll give you kind of a quick demo, mainly because I'm not amazing at this one. We're going to go down to designing, say the Letter. Now it's all about drawing shapes. So we're going to put in an image. Put in an image, put in a cross, remember that one? I'm going to make it full width. I'm just dragging the corners here on my phone. My very broken phone, with the cracked glass, still works. Let's put in some Heading. So Heading is a box with a dot in the corner. Give it a bit of a tap, I'm going to make it lots bigger. You can see here, on the right there's a little slider... for going up and down the font. I'm going to do that. I'm going to drag it. Oops, just drawing a line. Clicking it once, dragging it up. I'm going to put him in the middle there. To do Body Text... it's kind of just multi lines, but then put that dot in the corner... you get kind of like a multi line Text box. I'll make my Font size smaller. It points on the side there. I guess it's just getting the structure down. If you are round and about, and you're like... "Man, I really want to do something like this"... you can add Shapes. You can add things from your Library. There's no Shapes. You can add 'Images'. I'm going to click on this image that I did there. Down the bottom left is the little 'Import'. I can take a photo, I can go to my 'Maynooth Furniture' library. I'm going to bring in this one. Takes a little while to download, but you can actually build quite a complex design. On my phone, it's near impossible... but on an iPad, it's actually quite amazing. So we've brought that through. I can click on my 'Lorem Ipsum' thing here. And you can pick Fonts, let's have a look at the fonts down there. I'm using the 'T' down the bottom. Using 'Source Sans', like everybody. These are all TypeKit fonts. I'll use 'Lust Script', just because. I can download it to my phone, to use. Actually it's going to download it to both my library as well... so I can start using this. We're not going to spend too much time on this. Text, images, good for structure... it's all Lorem Ipsum, you can go and change the Type. You can use colors from your CC Library. When you're done though, I'm going to close it by hitting 'X' in the top left. Once you're done, and you get back out to here, it's saved... and you'll find that if you go to your Creative Cloud app... on a Mac, it's on the top right, and on a PC, it's bottom right. If you go into 'Assets', 'Files', there's an option that says 'Open Folder'. That's where they all download to. You can take a little while for them to sync... but in there, you'll find, you can open up in InDesign. Pretty crazy. So that's it for my terrible explanation of what CC Comp does. If you're a Web Designer, you can do the same thing for Web Layouts. It will pull in some designs to use in Photoshop, Illustrator... that you can use to mock up a site. Mobile apps as well, but that's it. All right, I will see you in the next video. 62. Advanced Use Of CC Libraries In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to show you... how to use CC Libraries in advanced features. We're going to show you how to add Colors and Paragraph Styles, easy peasy. We're going to show you how to work... interconnected with something like Illustrator. We're going to break the connection through the Libraries. We're going to show you how to collaborate with other Adobe users. I'm also going to show you how to send it out to maybe clients... that don't have any Adobe skills, that's quite useful. They get cool little interfaces like this... where they can see, and download colors and images... without any Adobe login... plus lots of other things. I promise, it's going to be interesting. All right, let's go check it out now in InDesign. So first up, let's open up a file. It's in '08 CC Libraries', there's only one file in there. It's called 'Maynooth Locations'. Click 'OK'. So you might have already created a Style, CC Libraries... and made it a Style. If you haven't, go to 'Create New Library'. I created one earlier, but I've gone and deleted everything through it... because I want this to be a little stand-alone video. To add colors, it's pretty easy, click on this guy, and say, over here... '+', you got the option of adding the graphic... which is just the square, with the color inside of it... but I actually just want the Fill color, please. So I'll click on this guy, go down here, and click on this one here. You can be a little faster, click on this. There's an option down the bottom here, moves it across. Either one, they end up in your Library. You can right click them easily to rename them. Cool thing about colors is that if I jump into Illustrator... or Photoshop. I jumped into here by accident. But the colors are there... because I'm using the same Libraries panel, with the same name... 'Maynooth Furniture', same in Illustrator. They're all there. Other things you can add are things like Paragraph Styles. I've got a Paragraph Style applied to this location, it's called 'Heading'. I click on this button here, or with it selected... I can say, you my friend, I want just the Paragraph Style. Cool thing about Paragraph Styles is that if I open up a new document in InDesign... these are here. I can draw stuff, and I can add text. I can select it, and I can say 'Heading'. Not only does it apply it to the text, but adds it to my Paragraph Styles. Same is true for Illustrator. In Illustrator, I can use that Paragraph Style... see it came through. So, added some text, click on the Paragraph Style, and life is easy. For some reason Paragraph Styles don't work in Photoshop yet... or at least I can't make them work... but that's okay, the colors work. Let's get back into InDesign. You can do the same things with Character Styles. We're not going to, because it's the exact same process. Let's go back to this 'Maynooth Locations'. Now we can add actual graphics. I'm going to click on these three, and let's say I use this quite a bit. Just drag it into here. You can click the button, or just drag it. You can see, here's a little graphic, so I open up my 'New Document'. The graphic comes along. I use this mainly for things like-- I draw arrows all the time for lot of my tutorials. I have a Styles in here called 'Notes'. Where is he, I might as well show you. And he has a lot of arrows and circles, and stuff, and 'Before' and 'After'. I write that lots. That's in here as a graphic, that means I can drag it out... and use 'Before' and 'After', and it's the right size and the right font. Same with the circles, I use it to highlight stuff. I put circles around things, so I know which one I'm pointing. Awesome! Let's go back to 'Maynooth Furniture'. Now let's say I have added something through Illustrator. So in here, I'm going to draw-- I'm not sure what I'm going to draw. I'm going to draw something beautiful, look how beautiful this is. The line, good work, Dan, I'm going to grab the 'Width tool'. It's my favorite tool in Illustrator. So we draw this super amazing line. Say it's a logo or a graphic, I'm going to add this to my Library here. And of course, it goes two ways... because my graphic now is here in InDesign. Now let's say I drag this out, and I start using it. So one of the pros, and also its exact same con... is that if I go and update this file, this will update as well. So I can double click it, that edits it in Illustrator. You'll notice, it's not that original file I was working with... it's a separate file. Once it's in the Library, it's just kind of its own new unique thing. In here, I'm going to say-- actually I'm going to grab my 'Width tool' again... and I'm going to add another little thing to it. I'm not sure what I'm doing. But if I save it, go back in to InDesign... you'll notice that this thing has adjusted. It can be cool, but sometimes you're like... "I just don't want them all connected." Easy trick to get around that... if I go back into here, and undo, save it, I kind of wrecked it. So it updates. So instead of dragging it off normally - that's fine. - what I can do is, while I'm dragging it out... while I'm dragging it out, hold down the 'Option' key. That is, on a Mac, and on a PC, it's the 'Alt' key. When I drag it out this way... what will happen is, you'll notice, the little cloud icon's gone... but when I update this one, let's say I pick a new color... I save it, and I go back into InDesign... the graphic updated, but this guy didn't. So whenever you drag things out holding down 'Option' on a Mac... or 'Alt' key on a PC... it will come through, but they'd be disconnected... pretty much I always do that. I just find it's just easier working with everything... all kind of dragged out, I love that it's there... but I don't like it connected. Another thing is, in here, say in our 'Locations'... let's say I want to add-- if I click on this 'Text', and I click on 'Add'... I can add it as a graphic... I'll turn all of this off, just as a graphic... and it's just the unit that I can drag out and use again. Remember, if I hold the 'Alt' key, it won't connect them up. But that's actually like a text block. You can now, in the newer version of InDesign... you can click on this, and just add the actual text itself... not the text box. Why that's different is that its-- watch this... if I drag it out, it's no longer a text box... I can decide on what to do with it out here. It's not that physical shape, I can make it any shape I like. The other nice thing about it is that, if I jump into, say Illustrator... and go back to this document that I'm working with... you can see the text is available here, I can drag it out. So it is text rather than a graphic. I know it seems like a small difference, but it is quite useful. You might put in your 'Tease & Cease', or you're like me, I've got my address... it might be a disclaimer. Something you use over and over again across multiple documents. You'd be able to open this up... and see the text in After Effects, in Premiere... Adobe Animate, Muse... can't thing of anything else, but yes, nice and useful. Now the next thing we're going to do is, back in InDesign... your Libraries here, we can share. There's two options. At the top here, in the Flyout menu for your CC Libraries... there's 'Collaborate' and 'Share Link'. Collaborate's been around a little while. All it does, means it says... I'm going to share this library with somebody else in my team. It opens up a website, and allows me to invite contributors. So I can put in somebody's-- you need to really put in their Adobe email address, for their Adobe ID. This is for colleagues, other people you work with. You might be working in a bigger agency, or a marketing department... or something, you want to share them around... because you want to both add colors, and logos, and fonts, and texts... and share the resources. So I can put in my email address. I can decide whether I trust them to be able to edit as well. Maybe it is for people-- you're a Head Honcho, and you just want to make sure-- they can use it, but you don't want them adding or removing from it. So you can just say, they can view. Back into InDesign, a new little thing that they stuck in... was this option here, which just says 'Share Link'. What's really nice about this... it opens up another website... which you can turn on from 'Private' to 'Public'... and this thing here can just be emailed to people. And why this is nice? You can add a bit of a description... but this is for sharing with, say your clients... or people that don't have other Adobe products... or they don't have an Adobe ID... because Collaborate allows them to kind of... get it in there, and get it in the software. This just opens up a web version. So I'm going to open up in a new browser. Let's have a look at what it looks like. So I email this to my client, and say... "Here, here's the colors, here's some images." The nice thing about it is that they can actually use this stuff. You might use this as maybe a corporate spec... say you do some logos with somebody, you can share your library with them. And what they have, they have read only access... and they can go through... and you might have a bunch of different libraries in here... and they can click on it... and view it. They can right click it, and save the image. So it gives you kind of a real, kind of updatable corporate manual... or it might be out to a developer... so that they know what colors to be using... and here's some of the graphics... put them into a CC Library, share them around. And they don't need Adobe IDs, and all sorts of Adobe skills. So that's really useful. What I find really useful is-- back into InDesign... I've got some-- you can tell the ones that are being collaborated. You can see this one here, Adobe logos has got little two heads there. That means I'm collaborating with somebody else. What I find useful, sometimes I come in here, and I'm like... "I'm sure I put that logo in there, where did it go?" And the person I've been collaborating with might have deleted it. They might have a good reason, or they might have done it by mistake. What you can do is you can go up to here, in the 'Burger menu'... and you can go to the one that says... you click on here, it says, "View Deleted Items"... it opens up that website again... and it just shows you the things that have been deleted from it. You can re-engage them, which is really cool. This ends up in Archive. You can click on it, and say... "Actually put that back in, please, we're still there"... or you can delete it permanently if you like. If you're trying to get rid of evidence of-- I don't know what you'd be giving... whatever evidence in here from, but you can permanently delete it. So that is going to be it for doing super advanced CC Libraries. I bet you, the most useful one is the dragging it out... holding down 'Alt' or 'Option' to break that link. Totally makes Libraries a lot more usable when they're all not connected. It does for me at least. All right, let's get on to the next video. 63. How To Get The Most Of Photoshop & Illustrator In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to learn... how to use InDesign with Photoshop and Illustrator. If you're tempted to skip on... we're going to look at some cool little tricks, both to connect them... but also to do some of the day-to-day stuff... we do in Photoshop and Illustrator... that we need in InDesign, like this one here, see... spot the difference, there's this guy, just disappeared, super easy and quick. Same with the one, this image here... not long enough, we're going to magically extend the background. Also down the bottom here, I'll turn off Preview mode, zoom out. That's the original image on Photoshop... we're going to crop this up on to a nice white background... then we're going to move it... so, can you see, the text wraps around the outside... and it's on a nice white background. All of that, plus we'll do some stuff with Illustrator. It's not as exciting, but I'll show you... the tips and tricks for using Illustrator with InDesign as well. All right, let's go and do that now. So for this one to work, I'm going to make a new document. I would like it to have, say some pages, because I want Spreads. How many pages? Let's just have four. Let's click 'Create'. So working with Photoshop, the best thing to do is... if I import an image here... let's say I'm working with '09 Working with Photoshop'. And I bring in 'Content Aware Fill 1'. If I bring in this image, then drag it into my CC Libraries... that's not a great way of working with Photoshop... because if I double click it... kind of opens it up. In Photoshop, it opens up in its own document here in InDesign. So I'm going to delete both of these guys, not sure why there's two. So instead of doing it this way, I'm going to, in Photoshop, open him up. 'Content Aware Fill 1'. And drag it into the Library this way. That way when I jump back over to InDesign here... and I drag out the image... they are connected better, so it's a really big image. So I'm going to drag this out. Let's say I want to use this for double page Spread... so I'm going to go to here. I'll drag out this image. Zooming out a little bit, because I want to go from corner to corner. This particular image works nicely across a double page Spread. Let's say I want to edit it a little bit... let's say I want to remove part one of these. I can double click it here in my Styles, and now it opens up in Photoshop. You'll notice, it wasn't that original that I opened. So this one called 'Background.psd', it's the one, I dragged into it. Let's do a little bit of Photoshop. Now I'm not going to cover much of Photoshop here. I just want to, I guess, get you excited about doing a full Photoshop course. Of course, I've got one. There's an Intro and Advanced one that I'm just filming at the moment. Obviously, not right this second, because I'm doing this one. Let's grab the 'Lasso Tool'. We can be pretty basic with this one. Say I want to remove this Wacom pen thing, I'm going to go around here. Really basic selection. We're going to use 'Edit', 'Fill'. And by default there's this one called 'Content Aware'. Basically, it's magic Fill, watch this. Cool, huh! Let's go to 'Select', 'Deselect'. And it was never there. Let's go to 'File', 'Save'. This is the really nice connection between here, in InDesign... drop back into InDesign. That updated, this updated. Really good connection with Photoshop. Let's look at using Photoshop to-- one of my big problems is - I'm going to delete that guy - is if I bring in an image, let's say-- actually let's add in Photoshop, do it the proper way. So 'Content Aware Fill', let's say, let's do... Let's do this one here. Let's open up 'Content Aware Scale 1'. My smiling face. With the 'Move tool', drag it into my Library. Then in InDesign, we run into this problem. I'm going to drag it in, and it's just the wrong dimensions. So I'm going to drag it, and you see... it just doesn't cover a double page Spread, just doesn't. So you end up with this kind of gap over here. So let's double click it to open up in Photoshop. Remember, I closed down that original one. We're going to look at another really useful tool in Photoshop... especially when you're working with InDesign. It's called the Content Aware Scale Tool. First of all I want to make my background a little bigger. So I'm going to go 'Image', and go to 'Canvas Size'. And which way? I'm going to push it from the left, in the middle here. I want to make it just wider. It's 4000 pixels at the moment, let's make it 7000. And because it's pushing from this corner over here... it's going to make a bit of a gap over here. Zoom out. So what I'd like to do is grab my 'Rectangle tool'. Drag a box, kind of right from the edge, all the way, grab this fellow. All of this text, then go to 'Edit', 'Content Aware Scale'. Now this tool is even more magic, watch this. Holy Molly magic. Our background just keeps on creating. There's a bit of weirdness going on with my shadow... but that's okay for this instance. It just looks like I've cast a really big shadow. So now I've got kind of a double page Spread size. I'm going to hit 'Save'. Now I'm back into InDesign. And now it's a better proportion. So I'm going to resize it now. I probably made a bit too much. Well actually a lot too much. But at least it's able to kind of generate more background without destroying me. So that's the way to connect with Photoshop. I'll show you a couple of other exercises for that one. Often when I'm teaching people, I get excited by those two features. We looked at Content Aware Fill 1, let's look at 2. There's times when this doesn't work. This one's going to work okay. So again, the Lasso tool. It doesn't matter what kind of tool you use. I'm going to use the Lasso tool because it's a pretty blunt instrument. But you can use the Magic Wand tool if you like. Trying to get around his bike. Going around it, you can see, I'm pretty liberal. And again, let's go to 'Edit', 'Fill'. Let's try and make him disappear. It's not bad. Got a bit of that back in there. So there's time where it just-- It gets you close, you might be able to use... say the Clone tool stamp now to kind of fudge it out... but it might be just perfect. This one's a little hard because of the stripy lines here. So, doesn't work every time. Let's do one more before we go. Let's go 'File', 'Open', 'Fill or Scale'. We're not going to get into super advanced stuff here. I'll do that in my Advanced Photoshop course... but I want to give you a few techniques for working with InDesign. Let's say I want to make this wider again to fit... might be a banner ad you're doing... or just a little image you need some text to put on. So the same thing, let's go to 'Image', 'Canvas Size'. It's kind of like pushing out from that side. Width, let's make it, maybe '700' pixels. Click 'OK'. We got an extra box over here. Now by default, doesn't always work. I'll click on this. You've seen my Marquee tool. Go to 'Edit', and let's say 'Content Aware Scale'. I'm going to drag it out. It's kind of working... but when I pull it a little too early it's not working perfectly. So what you can do though... is using Rectangle Marquee tool again... actually just grab a chunk of it, don't have to grab everything. And then, go to 'Edit'... 'Content Aware Scale', and just drag that out. So, the perspective's changing on the floor... and hit 'return' to finish it. 'Select', 'Deselect' to get rid of it. But to be honest, it should be a bit too hard to pick... unless you knew that floor. It's pretty cool, huh! Another option that will probably work for this one... is I'm undoing that, I'm going to grab my 'Magic Wand Tool'. Click once in the white area. In this case the Tolerance is too high. So what we're going to do is lower the Tolerance to say, something like '15'. Grab my 'Magic Wand Tool, click in here, so it just gets the white area. I'm going to go to 'Edit'. 'Fill', and I'm going to use 'Content Aware' Fill. And we're going to cross our fingers, see how it does. Taking a while. Not bad. It's made some alignment issues down the bottom there. Not absolutely perfect, but it was great... but I wanted to give you a couple of used cases that weren't absolutely perfect. So when you're doing your work you might run into somebody's problems. Let's look at one of the other good uses of Photoshop for InDesign. Is that, putting things on a white background. I'll show that quick and dirty version. And I'll show you how to use Layers in InDesign. So let's open up a document here in Photoshop. And in the '09 Working with Photoshop', grab 'Quick Mask & Layers'. Now I've got a document, it's got some layers. It's got an Ellipse, it's got a logo, and it's got a background. What I'd like to do is to mask out. So I'm going to turn the eyeballs off on these two. And in here, I'd like to mask out this background. Now the best way to do a Mask... or the quickest way, is to grab the 'Quick Selection Tool'. It's kind of mixed in here, if I hold down the 'Magic Wand Tool', there he is there. I'm going to zoom in a little bit. This cool tool learns as you go. What I'm going to do is click across the red. You see, it jumps out, and grabs the red. Just kind of printing it in here. And it's jumped to the edges... it's clever enough to know that's red as well. I click this once. Watch this, I'm going to zoom in, 'Command +'. I'll just drag across that red bit. So it's grabbed all the red. What I'd like to do is also grab this bit... which is the pillow, grab this pillow. I just kind of painted across it. Down the bottom here, I'm going to zoom in, and say-- Actually I'm going to paint across this as well. This is where it probably gets a little bit messy, can you see... it's kind of jumped out, and missed bits. It's doing okay. Let's say you want to remove parts. Say you've gone out, and you've grabbed this bit, and you're like... "Ah, not that big." Hold down the 'Alt' key on a PC, or 'Option' key on a Mac. And just paint that bit out. So I don't want this bit now. So you do a little bit of painting in, and then painting out. Paint it back in, painting out. The cool thing about this brush is that... as you do more, it kind of knows what you mean. Gets a little better and better as you're working. So some of the first selections you do aren't great. But then, if I hold down 'Alt... and say, actually, I don't want you, don't want you. That will do for the moment. It looks pretty good around the outside here. What I'm going to do is use the Quick Mask Button. With that selected, got my selection, I'm going to click on this guy here. Hopefully, I zoom out, and then place you with the mouse. So, we've done a little mask. This could be just nice, just to have... white out graphics in your InDesign document... but let's say I've got this kind of mixed up document. It's got some layers, and all sorts of different layers going on. I'm going to save this. I'm going to save it to my 'Desktop', 'Coursework'. Just so I don't ruin your version... that you're working on through the Exercise Files. So in InDesign we're going to bring in - I'm going to get rid of that thing. I'm going to bring in the 'psd' that I was just working with, 'File', 'Place'. I'll put mine on my 'Desktop', in 'Coursework'. And 'Quick Mask & Layers'. So I bring it in, and I grab it all. It's kind of working, it's got my mask, which is cool, but I don't want this stuff. I want to get rid of these, this part of this layer. With it selected, you go to 'Objects', and go to 'Object Layer Options'. This only works for the psd, because it's got layers. Also works with Illustrator, with layers. And you can say, I don't want you, and I don't want you. I just want this Layer 0 that I had on there. Click 'OK'. Now that same psd file still has the layers in it... but I've turned them off to use in InDesign. What I could do now, is I'm going to resize this. I probably could have just dropped that off to start with, I realize that. But I'm got have this, I'm going to make it bigger... and I'll do a bit of Text Wrap. We looked this way, way back. Remember, 'W' key, so I can see everything. I'm going to paste the text inside. It's inside 'Exercise Files', it's in '09 Working with Photoshop'. 'Long Text'. I'm going to hold 'Shift', click on this. Follow the text around it. Now this cool little trick here, 'Window', 'Text Wrap'. There's an option that says, this third one in. Then, I can say, instead of saying, this clipping... which is the Rectangle, I can say, 'Detect Edges'. And because it's got a white background... I can increase this up, and do a cool kind of Text Wrap type thing. So it needs to be cropped out in Photoshop first. We'll use the 'Quick Select', along with a 'Layer Mask'. That's it for using Photoshop. Let's look at one of the last things you can do using Illustrator. So in Illustrator, let's draw a quick shape. I'm not sure what I'm drawing here. I'm going to draw you, and you, and you. Beautiful, Dan. One little trick in Illustrator, I've got a full course in Illustrator... but this is the best tool in the whole program. It's this one here called the Shape Builder. It allows me to hold down the Option key, and just kind of delete these. If you've ever used the Path Finder, you'll realize... "Man, it's a whole lot easier than the Path Finder.' So I've got this beautiful thing. Now I could be all very prim and proper... and add it to my Library, then bring it across over here in InDesign... because there it is, and it's all connected. What I find quite easy and useful is just to copy it from here. So I've got it selected with my Black Arrow, 'Edit', 'Copy'. Then just paste it into InDesign. No need for Libraries, comes across... you can ungroup it, click off... and start working with the individual parts. I'm not sure why there's two of them. Who knows, but just copying and pasting from Illustrator... I find is a super useful way instead of using the official libraries. But it doesn't update, so there are pros and cons. All right my friends, that is how to use Photoshop and Illustrator with InDesign. Let's get on to the next video. 64. How To Create A PDF Form Using Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to make a Form in InDesign. It's going to be interactive... we open up in Acrobat, and we're going to be able to type our names. If we can spell them. Put in email addresses, look, check boxes. Vegan, Vegetarian, and Gluten-free. We can do Radio Buttons. So I can say 'No' to a catalog, or 'Yes', but I can't do both. Drop down menus. I can pick a date. I can add comments on lots of lines. I can hit 'Print', or I can submit it... so it will email me, the form creator, this completed form, ready to go. Let's go do that now in InDesign. Before we get started... we're going to talk about the pros and cons for doing Forms. The pros, are that I can create a print version of this file. So it can be printed off, and left in the office to get pulled out... but I can also make a digital copy at the same time, using InDesign. I can save loads of time by people filling it in electronically... rather than having to print it off, sign it... either scan it back, or send it in the post. So definitely a pro for Interactive Forms. Now, the cons. If you make an Interactive Form using InDesign... the recipient has to fill that out using all the features using Acrobat. Can be the free version, Acrobat Reader, which is the world's most popular reader... but you can't guarantee everybody can. So know that some people might have to print it out... and that's what we'll do, add a Print button. Make 'em do it old school, with the print. The other con is that you assume that they're going to fill it out... and it's going to kind of fill up in a database. That doesn't happen automatically. You need help from a developer to make that happen. It's not just an easy clickety-click thing. It used to be, there was something called Adobe Forms... and that was great, but that's no longer around. So the way that these Interactive Forms should be used... is, know that they're going to go out... 95% of the people are going to be able to fill them out fine... using Acrobat Reader. And instead of some sort of magical database... where it all gets collated... you can have this option, where I hit 'Submit'... and all it's going to do is email you a copy. Filled in, ready to go... but it's not going to yank out all the data into a spreadsheet. I hate doing that bit at the beginning... because you're like, "Ah, ugh, really?" Yes, Forms in InDesign isn't perfect. There is no real perfect way at the moment. Now, if you are thinking... I can't really get into-- I'm getting into Forms, and I'm doing like a big job here... not just like an event registration, or some sort of survey... you want to collect proper data. You might want to jump into something called Adobe Sign. Nothing to do with InDesign. Well, you can do the design in InDesign, but check out this. So go to acrobat.adobe.com... and Acrobat Sign is the thing. You might have kind of crossed it already, where people can do digital signatures. Once signed, people get both copies, it goes into databases. It's more of an Enterprise Level type thing though. Give the free trial a go. It's pretty amazing, but outside of the scope of this course. We're going to do InDesign Forms. Now another thing to consider is that... say it's going to be a totally digital form only... it's not going to be printed. What you might consider is using something like Google Forms. Google Forms is super quick, super easy. It's all online, and it does collect it in a database. It's responsive for mobile devices... and you can do cool graphs afterwards. So maybe Google Forms might be right for you. I'll stop now with the alternatives. Let's get into InDesign, and look at what it does really well. Let's jump into InDesign. If you go to 'File', 'Open'... and in '10 Forms', there's one called 'Event Registration Form'. Open that up, and I've done some basic work for us. It's nothing much, just text boxes. Just plain old type, with text in it... and I kind of laid it out to look nice to help us out with this document. The first thing we're going to do is, this is going to be like a dual use form. I want people to be able to fill it out by hand. So if I hit the 'W' key, you'll notice there's no lines in here. You can draw it with the Line tool... but that's not fancy, let's do it the fancy way. I'm going to have my cursor flashing in with my name. Anywhere inside of here. I'm going to go out to the Burger menu here... and then I'll go to this one that says 'Paragraph Rules'. Move this the other way. Now, whatever yours is defaulting to, above or below, it doesn't really matter. I'm going to use 'Rule Below', if that sounds right. I can't remember what it is by default. Because I've changed it so many times, it doesn't remember my default. Yours will be. Make sure you turn 'Rule On', and you can see the text there. Let's get it down to a nice weight, I'm going to use '0.25'... just so it's not so thick. Next thing we need to double check... is that it's the width of the column, not just the Text. Text is just Underline. Not very exciting, we're going to do the whole column, that's what I want. The whole way to the edge of this box here. What I'm going to do is the Offset as well. So I'm going to actually increase the Offset. So it's down a couple of millimeters. Yours might be using inches. Just click up until it looks nice sitting underneath here. Click 'OK'. I could turn that into a Paragraph Style, I'm going to be lazy, copy this. Replace this, then type 'Email'. Lazy Dan. I'm going to get two lines in here if I was doing a big long document. I would turn them into a Style... but I've only actually got two lines. So the next thing I want to do is I want to put in a Text box. I'm going to grab my 'Type tool'... and it's literally just a Text box, I'm going to draw a Text box. And this is going to be the space people are going to be able to draw. Watch this, if I start typing in it... it's quite high, so I'm going to grab my Black Arrow, and just get it down... so it's somewhere close to here. I can't guarantee the font they're going to use... so don't spend too long styling the fonts. It will be up to the reader to decide. So I've got a Text box, now I need to turn it into an editable Form Box... that people can type into. Go to 'Window', 'Interactive', 'Buttons & Forms'. We've been here before. The difference in this one, we're going to put in 'Type'... and I'm going to go to this one called 'Text Field'. And that's it. You got to be an editable text field now. What we should do is give it a name, so we're going to call this one 'Name'. You can go to Description. Now the thing with this Description here is... maybe 'First & Last Name'. If it's a confusing one, you can put in lots of description. People should be able to work out name without a description. I'm going to add it here just to show you what it does. Next thing I'd like to do is-- you could leave it here now. I want to go through and do things like-- I want the font size to be a little smaller. I want it to be printable? Yes. It doesn't matter because there's nothing in it. That doesn't really matter. In here we can decide you have to do it... otherwise you can't submit the form required. And that's going to be it. Now let's make one more line, and then do a preview. So I'm going to copy and paste the Text box... because what I wanted to do is an email here as well. I'm going to hit 'W' key, so I can see both lines. So I can get them kind of lined up, or roughly the same. I'll drag the end here to set up the lines up there. The one thing we will change, what we haven't done, is 'Scrollable'. Scrollable just means, I turn it on for one, and off for the other. Scroll just means, when I type, and get to the end... does it allow me to keep on scrolling and typing... so I can type in, like a thousand characters. If your name is longer than this Text box here... actually there are long names... so leave it as scrollable. Email addresses, you might decide whether you need scrollable or not. We'll test it out and have a look. Let's preview it before we go and do all the rest of it. To make a Form happen, we're going to go to 'File', 'Export'. And all we need to do is export a PDF. And it needs to be this one, that says 'Interactive'. We've done him before, again. Now we click 'Save'. We've got one already, I'm going to replace it. And there's nothing you need to change. Just double check that it does save Forms and Media. 'Include All', in case you've turned it off in the past... but that's the only other thing. Click 'Export'. And it's produced my Form. In here, I've got my fields, so I can click in here, 'Daniel'. I left it a bit low, so we're going to have to play around with that. 'Daniel Walter Scott'. My email address. So this is all working fine. The difference between scrollable and not scrollable... I can't remember who is what, but if I paste, paste... here it is, my little keyboard said "No more." Whereas this one here, I can put in the world's biggest email address. And it means that, you can see, just scrolls along. And you see here, I didn't pick the font. It's the default one from Acrobat. But I spent ages trying to make it do what I want... and you have to open up Acrobat, and try get the fonts to work... and it doesn't work all the time... so I've given up, and just let the default run... in whatever PDF program people have got. Let's jump back into InDesign and add the rest of the fields. First of all, this one needs to come up a little bit. Next thing I'm going to do is 'Multiline'. So 'Comments' down the bottom here, I'm going to grab the 'Type tool'. I'm going to draw a box that's quite big, Multiline box. And it's exactly like it was before. 'Black Arrow', I'm going to go to 'Type'. I'm going to say 'Text Field'. The only difference, I'm going to say this is a 'Multiline' one. Allow people to write in kind of a multi-line comment. Make sure you give it a name, this is my 'Comments'. And I'm not going to add a description... because, we should be able to work out what that's for. One thing I didn't show you was where the description appears. So let's jump back into Acrobat. Watch this, if I hover above this, can you see, it says 'First & Last Name'. This could be where-- oops, 'First & Last Name', so I didn't adjust this. You, 'Name 2'. Because I copied and pasted it, it just added the word 'Name 2'. So I'm going to replace that with 'Email'. Down here, I'm going to leave this blank. Let's look at some of the other options. Let's look at a Check box. So Check box-- I'm going to go to 'W'. Get rid of all the blue lines, they drive me mad a bit. So a Check box is easy to make, you make your own one. Grab the 'Rectangle tool', you pick a Stroke color, 'Black'. I'm going to have a Fill of 'None'. It's going to have-- We'll use the, maybe '0.5', the Stroke. I'm going to zoom out a little bit. And I'm going to draw a rectangle, appropriately sized. Holding 'Shift', so it goes a perfect square. Back to my 'Arrow key', I'm going to get it in the right spot. And that is going to be my little Check box. To turn it into a Check box, with it selected with my Black Arrow... go to 'Type', 'Check box'. You get a little tick in there. The only thing we might do, is that, by default it's got a tick in it. So we're going to set the default to 'Off'. If you want it to be one of those tick here... if it's okay to send you a lot of spammy mail, you can leave that on. Look, they left it on. That would be a bit weird when it got printed out. Just a tick there, to try and get rid of. So we're going to leave that as 'Normal'. We're going to give it a name, 'Check Box 1'. We're going to say 'Vegetarian'. And with the Check box, there's this option down the bottom here. So what it's going to say is, a Check box is... and you say 'Yes'. So the button there is going to give you the response... and say, 'Yes', it is vegetarian. A Check box is an AND field. So I can be Vegetarian, and Glutten-free, and Vegan. So what I can do with the check boxes, just copy and paste it. Select the box on the outside there, copy, paste it. Just select the edge if you got no Fill, and I got this other option. Then I'm going to drag out another option. I'm going to select all three. I want them all to be evenly spaced, using that option. The only thing I need to do is... I need to go through and click the edge of Vegan... and say, you're not Vegetarian too, you are Vegan. I'm not Vegan, but the guy downstairs, at the Healthy Food Store... sells amazing Vegan burritos. And because he's really close, I eat a lot of them. Gluten-Free... I'm not Gluten-Free. But you didn't ask, so I'll stop talking. So let's have a little look. You need to close down the preview here in Acrobat. I'm not going to save it... because when I export another one, I'm going to 'Save', 'Export'. Same details as before, 'Interactive', I'm going to 'Replace' it. If it's open it doesn't like to update. Yes, yes, yes, to all of that, and you see, you've got Check boxes. Cool, huh! Got my Multiline comments box. Now let's look at doing Radio Buttons. I'm going to close this down without saving. Jump back into InDesign. Let's look at Radio Buttons. Just remember, I said Check boxes are AND. I can be Vegetarian, and Vegan, and Gluten-Free. I can't be... would you like a catalog? 'Yes' and 'No'. It's an OR, and those are Radio Buttons. So, Male or Female, or... are you attending, Yes or No? It's an OR, you can't be both. You're not allowed to be both, at least in this Form. Same thing with the Radio Button. Like a Check box, we just draw it with an Ellipse. It's really common obviously to have Radio Buttons as ellipses... and not squares. Doesn't really matter what you draw, it will work... but let's say we're going to be proper, and do a little circle. So I got a Black Stroke, and no Fill. And in here, under 'Type'... I got my Black Arrow, got it selected, I'm going to pick on 'Radio Button'. Now this Radio Button is going to be my Catalog. And this choice is going to be the choice of 'Yes'. I'd like the default to be 'Off'. Now I want another one of these... and the trick is, I can just copy and paste it like I did before... but because the name hasn't changed, it's still Catalog... unlike, remember the Check boxes... they said, they added, like Vegetarian too. This one keeps the same name. If they have the same name... they are connected, and they need to be connected... because if you pick one, it needs to turn the other one off. The only thing we need to do is change the choice. So remember, this first one was... a choice of 'Yes'. This one here, the name didn't change it, this one is a choice of 'No'. So the names are the same, but the choices, 'Yes' and 'No'. Let's save this one, let's export, let's have a little look. Of course it's going to work. 'Yes', 'No'. 'Yes', 'No'. Just puts a little dot in there, and that is a Radio Button. Close this one down, I'm going to save it, back into InDesign. Let's look at 'Choose a Date/City'. So this is called a Combo box. Now we need to be careful with a Combo box. It shows you right at the entry there. It's a little drop down menu. Now the reason you might be a little bit more hesitant... with adding the drop down box... is that, say somebody has... remember, at the beginning, I said that one of the cons is... if you open this up in anything other than Adobe Acrobat... this Form system doesn't work. And that's okay, because people can print it out. But you can't print out a drop down menu, it's all kind of tucked up, and hidden. So when it's printed out, you can't obviously interact with it. So you might decide to maybe leave this one out... or if you're happy with interactive stuff, or you might love it. So let's do it anyway, because we want to know the technique. It starts off with a Text box... and I'm going to see where my lines are. I'm going to grab my Type tool, and draw out a Text box. How big? About that big, like before. I'm going to grab my 'Selection tool'. The difference between this one is going to be the Combo box. They call them Combo boxes instead of drop down boxes. That's what they're called. This one here is going to be 'City/Date'. This one's a bit different, right down the bottom here. This says, I would like my 'List Items'. Now how many lists do we need? And all we need to do is put in how many items list we need. Doesn't make sense. Let's just do it. Let's say you want to do the Auckland one. On the 21st of December. Hit '+'. I want to add another one, that's going to be the one in London... and that one's on the 23rd of December. Terrible time for it. And this one here is in Vegas. Let's do it properly, Las Vegas. And this one here is on Christmas day, everyone's going to turn up to this one. Hit '+'. So that's going to create the contents for the drop down box. One other option you should add is 'Choose a City'. And hit '+'. You need one of the options to be like the initial option. It's going to appear here to get people to kind of interact with it. And the way to decide who's the first one to appear-- you can drag this around to say, actually I want-- it's actually in alphabetical order there. I'm going to choose here at the top. And you can kind of move him around. That's the way they're going to list. They're not going to automatically list alphabetically... but if you want an initial one, you click on it, it just goes blue. That means that this is the first one that's going to appear. Doesn't matter that it's at the top, it matters that it's blue. I'm going to click a font size of '10', now I'm going to go and test this. Let's save it, I'm going to export it. Same as before, 'Replace', I'm okay. Now hopefully it's going to open up in Acrobat. All right, here it is, there's my combobox/dropdown. There it is, it's got 'Choose a City' first... and I can click on this one. And that's the result that's going to come back in my Form. Some of the last things we need to do is these two buttons here. Now what you might do is add a little extra bit of text to say... when you're finished, save this and email it to me. Or print it off and send it to this address. Because these little buttons here might just not work on some PDF readers. So we want to make this as usable as we can across lots of different people. But we're ignoring them, we're just going to make these buttons work. So close this down, don't save it. Back into InDesign, and let's look at these buttons. That one's easy, click on it. Now, I just made this Button. It's just a rectangle with text in it. I grouped the two together. Just because I want it to be a Button. So you can draw this, it can just be text... it could be a printer icon, it can be anything. With it selected, go to 'Type', 'Button'. And the way to make it a Print Button, go to 'Actions', and hit this '+' button. Down here where it says 'PDF Only', I want the one that says 'Print Form'. And that's it, when it clicks, it's going to start printing. The one thing I might do is actually make it not printable. We've ignored this throughout, is that when it prints out... this Button is not going to go through the printer. Doesn't really matter... but it could look a little weird having buttons on here... that are interactive but don't actually print. You could also do it for this Combo box here... you say, you, do not print. 'Printable'. And it means that it's not going to print that 'Choose a City'. You might have to put a line underneath so people can write their city or date. So you might just change the language in here, that might get you around it. So printing is done, let's look at the Submit button. We talked about it at the beginning... one of the cons is that there's no real easy way... to get a database driven form. You might want to sit down with a developer, a Web Developer... and work out a way of doing that, it can be done. And I'll show you where in a sec. What most people do is they just get them... to send them an email with this form attached. We can do that easily enough. So what I need to do, just like the Print, we're going to turn it into a Button. I'm going to go 'Actions', and go to this one, 'Submit Form'. The trick to get this one to work is you need to write in 'mailto'... Has to be spelt like that with the colon, ':'. So 'mailto:', you can read. But that has to go in, and then you can put in your email address. daniel@byol.ie That means, when they click that button, it's going to launch their email client... and attach this PDF. I might not make this printable. Let's save it, and let's export it, and see what it does. So I've got my Form, I've filled it out, and I'm going to click on 'Print'. And magically it's going to load out my printing window. Awesome, huh! So you might get them to print it, and then post it to you. So you might get them to print it out, and post it to you on a dead tree. Let's click on 'Cancel', and let's go the digital way. Which kind of works, let's click on 'Submit'. It's going to open up what your default email application is... which is, on my Mac, called 'Mail'. If you're on a PC, it's probably going to open up Outlook. Or in this case, I'm going to use my Webmail, because I actually use Gmail. You type in your email address, and that will fill it out... and attach the PDF, completed, and send it to you. The only trouble with that... is that if you're sending it out to 10,000 people... you're going to get a bunch of emails. You can send out, maybe some sort of email filter... to filter out all the ones with PDFs... but if it's a smaller job, it's perfect. Say you're only getting 100 of them. You get to stick them on a folder, or print them all off for yourself... or copy and paste all the data out. Not fun. One of the other last things I'd like to show you for the Forms is that... we've generated a lot of our forms. If you need existing kind of stuff-- let's check it out. There are Buttons and Forms... in this Flyout menu, we've got sample Buttons and Forms... but prepare yourself, these are ugly. These were made definitely in the 90s. So let's say I want a nice glass Button. You might love these glass Buttons. And I shouldn't judge you, but I am. Wow, these are terrible. It's been a long time in Photoshop... trying to work out how to do those glass Mac icons... but that was a long time ago, but there are other things in here... like Radio Buttons, that are diamonds, I've never used those. We've all been taught how to use Check boxes and Radio Buttons... that should be circles or squares. But there's all sorts of stuff in here. I'm going to close it down. And that's going to be the end of our Forms in InDesign. All right, goodbye Glass buttons, get off my beautiful Form. I will see you in the next video. Bye now. 65. Advanced Use Of The Pages Panel In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to do some Advanced Pages... looking at this Pages panel here. First things we're going to do is... see that icon here? You can see this little rotated option here, if I double click on it... it's turned around the other way. It's a cool little way of working, sideways, so it doesn't affect the print. You can turn it back easily. Another one, you can see in my Pages panel here... I've multiple size pages, so I can have a real fold in the middle. We also notice in here, I have my page numbering... A, B, C, D, then 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. We'll look at how to adjust it so it's not a right hand Spread... it starts with the left hand Spread. We'll look at Templates, and, that will be it. Let's jump into InDesign now, and get going. First up, let's open up our file of-- kind of got started with. Let's go to 'File', 'Open'. And inside of 'Exercise Files'... under '11 Pages', there this one called 'Advanced Pages Panel Example'. Open that up, and this is what it looks like. Now first of all what I'm going to do is... in our Pages panel, scroll down to page 15. So I've got a page in here, and I want to add a map. So we're going to go to 'File', 'Place'. That exact same 'Exercise Files', under '11 Pages', there's one called 'Map'. I'm going to drag it out... and what I'd like to do is I want to rotate it... because it's going to be kind of best viewed at this angle. It's going into a printed magazine... so people can kind of just flip it around and check it. Now one of the troubles with-- drag it out a bit bigger. Now one of the troubles of working kind of sideways... partially this way, and partially sideways is... I want to add Heading to this... and I could draw the Heading, then just rotate it around... but visually it's quite hard to kind of line things up and make it look pretty. What you can do, with the Pages panel... over here, you can right click 'Page 15'... you can go to 'Page Attributes'... and in here, there's one called 'Rotate Spread'. I just want to rotate it. '90°', click once, that works for me. Now, I got to grab the 'Type tool', and draw out a Type box... and this is going to be our 'New Development'. I can make it nice and big, I'm just kind of working on this... and there's 'Rotated View'... and it means I can just draw things and work quite easily and nicely. Now the cool thing about it... is when I make a PDF, it will flip it back out. So it can stay like this... it's not like a permanent rotation, it's just while you're working. You can turn it off by doing the same thing. You can see, that one's being rotated. You can turn it off by going to the same thing. 'Rotate Spread View', and go back to 'Clear Rotation'. So do all your work, rotated, then flip it back over. You don't have to flip it back over if you don't want to. All right, Tip 1. The next tip is, let's say this long document here... is going to have a center fold... where you open up the middle of the document... and you can fold out another page. So, a Roll Folder in the middle. So I'm going to double click 'Page 11'. I'd like it to be twice the size. What I used to do is kind of do this weird shuffling thing... where we had an extra page here. It's a lot easier to grab the 'Page Tool'. The Page Tool is this third one down here, I'm going to click on this document... and I'm going to say, actually I'd like you to be twice the size. So instead of 8.5, remember, we can do measurements in here, times 2, '♪2'. And it just kind of pokes out that side there. You can see in here, I just got an extra side page. Now I'm to have to do the same for page 12, because it's the back of it. So you, my friend... need to be the same, you need to be times 2, '♪2'. Now there's no adjustment for that Type... but yes, that's how to add an extra page. The one thing you might think-- I'll kind of just drag it. Weirdly, if you just drag it, like this... sticks back, it really doesn't want to resize. We got to hold down the 'Option' key on a Mac, or the 'Alt' key on a PC... while we're dragging it. Don't know why, but that will let you do it. It also doesn't like you doing crazy pages. Anyway, that's how to do multiple size pages... in the same kind of Spread document. Now there's a couple of things I need to do with the Master page. So I've got a Master page here that's got kind of my numbers... and this ugly looking circle here. On this page now, on page 11, it doesn't really work. So I'm going to-- it's stuck. I can create a different Master page... or you can just hold down 'Command-Shift' on a Mac... or 'Control-Shift' on a PC, click him. Delete him, click him, delete him. I could go back and 'Shift-Click' both of them without deleting them... just move him across, so they're not part of the Master page anymore... but they're still on there. If you added anything to the Master page now... it will still get added. Just not these two guys. So I'm going to do the same for pages1 1, 2, and 3. So 'Command-J-1', 'return'. Not worried about that one, because it's hidden behind it... but this guy doesn't need page 1. So I'm going to delete those guys, this guy doesn't need it as well. Goodbye. This one doesn't need it. Gone, you, gone. So that's the shortcut for deleting things from the Master page. Now another problem you're going to run into is, I've got my Cover... I've got him inside Cover, I've got the Contents page... I've got it inside that Contents page... and then that Content doesn't start till page 5. You can see down here, page 5 is where it starts. I shouldn't have lined that up that way. I'll ignore it. So we need to change the ordering. So the way to do this is... you go up to this first one, double click 'Page 1', right click him... and go to 'Numbering & Section'. Now I want to say, I want to start page numbering at 1... but I don't want to use numbers, I would like to use letters. We normally always use capital A, B, C. You can use anything though, click 'OK'. Now the whole document becomes A, B, C, all the way along. You'll notice all my page numbering is all A, B, C, D, it's not what I want. Then the second part is, you double click the page... you want to start the numbering at, in my case it's E. It's where my kind of content starts. You right click him, go back to the exact same place... 'Numbering & Section'. You say, I want to start page numbering at '1'. For this particular page, make sure he's double clicked in Blue. And I want to start from here, from 1. So start page numbering at 1 by using these guys. Click 'OK', and we're back. You'll see, it got the right page number, so 1, 2, 3. You can see over here, A, B, C, D, then 1, 2, 3, all the way. Another thing people like to do with pages... is, by default, remember, when we're using Spreads... you start with the right hand Spread. And in this case that's what I want to do, so I'm going to totally break this one. But let's say I want this to be, just like two pages next to each other. Stop doing this Spread thing where it splits him across. So what you can do is right click our first page here... and we can say, allow document pages to shuffle. What that means is, nothing really happens, except... I can grab page A, and go, you're now over here. It's kind of hard to do. Kind of, you need to drag it on this side of that little line. The editor will zoom in, so you can see... that if I undo, it's really hard... click, drag over here doesn't work, but see, there's that little icon. There he is. Cool. So now I can start with... a Spread that goes there. So my front Spread is this page, and this page, and continues on. So that's starting pages on my left. I've totally wrecked mine... but I know lots of people want to do that side by side. Another last one for pages, is actually starting with some of the Templates. So we're going to go to 'File', 'New', and let's go to 'Document'. These options along the top here are perfect, go to 'Print'. And you might be ignoring these guys down the bottom here; don't. Why? Because there's lots of templates down here, there's lots of free ones. And it might just be a nice way to get started with a document. Get some fresh ideas. All you need to do is click on him, click 'See Preview'. That's a little preview of this. The only trouble is, it's not going to give you these images. It's giving me like a-- often what I do is, a screenshot of this... just so I can see what they've done with the images... because once you actually download it-- there's an option that says 'Download'. I've already downloaded this one and practiced. Clicked on 'Open'. And you get this document... and it just doesn't look as sexy when it's missing all those images. So, you can use this as a start. You might just use it for some of these kind of nice Pull Quotes. And this kind of interesting Chapter Heading here, Lines. It might ask you to download some fonts as well. They'll be from TypeKit, so they'll be free. You just need to switch off the images. Might be a good place to get started. There are more. You can go pay for those at stock.adobe.com All right, that's going to be it for Advanced Page stuff. 66. How To Place InDesign Documents Inside Of Each Other : In this video we're going to place... an InDesign document inside another InDesign document. Why? Because it brings through both the InDesign file... plus all its related links. Makes it easy to update, and it's super simple to do. Let's go do it now. So I've just got a blank document open... and I'm going to go to 'File', 'Place', and it's that simple. So I'm going to bring in the file I made earlier in this course... called '01 Spring Flyer'. I'm going to bring in-- you'll be tempted to bring in the PDF file... but if you bring in the InDesign file directly... I'll show you a few little perks of doing it this way. So I'm going to place it in. I'm going to make it a bit smaller... so it's just like placing a graphic or an image. Hold down 'Command-M-Shift' to resize it. But the perks are, under the Links panel... you can see here, my InDesign file, but look... you can actually see the images that are actually inside the InDesign file. So my ai file, and the jpeg, and I can check. Is it RGB, is it CMYK, is it the right resolution? So you can dig into that sort of stuff rather than a flat old PDF. Obviously another perk, is I can click on this... right click it, and say 'Edit Original'. And I can go through and make some text changes. I'm not, I'm just going to delete the logo, because I'm lazy. Save it. Go into here, and you'll notice that it updates. So it's one of the other perks for not using the PDF. Another little trick to do, is... instead of finding it, right clicking, and go to 'Edit Original'... if you hold the 'Option' key on a Mac, or the 'Alt' key on a PC... and just double click on the Placement Design file... you can kind of tell this place here, a little linking icon. If you hold down 'Option', or 'Alt', and double click it... it goes and opens it as well. I'm going to undo, put my logo back, save it, close it... and everything's back to life. Great way of working, especially when you're making, maybe ads... in an InDesign file, or maybe making a longer document in another. All right, let's place documents in InDesign. 67. How To Use And Install Scripts In Adobe InDesign CC : Hi there, in this video we're going to talk about Scripts. Now what do Scripts do? They kind of take InDesign, what's built into it... and adds an extra level of awesomeness. Basically it allows programmers to write scripts. They can let us do things that InDesign's not meant to do. So let's look at some of the ones... that are kind of built in, and given to us by InDesign... and we'll look at how to install our own. I'm just going to make a new plain US Letter document. Let's look at where they are. Let's go to 'Window', 'Utilities', 'Scripts'. In the application, the ones that are built in... twirl that out, there's 'Samples', and there's kind of two folders. There's one written in AppleScript, and one written in JavaScript. These are the most common ones, so let's use these. I'm going to make this really big... so we can see all the different options in here. Some of them, I've never used before, some of them I use... never all the time... they're kind of just really handy, kind of save a lot of time once in a while. I'll show you the best ones, and you can go through all of them in your own time. Let's have a look at-- I'm going to grab the Rectangle tool. I'm going to give this a Fill of 'red'. Now it's going to draw out a rectangle. And wouldn't it be nice if we had guides? You can open up your rollers and drag them out... but look, there's an Appguides option. Just double click it, I've got the object selected... click 'OK', and I've got Guides. All the way throughout. There are some options in there... I have to go undo quite a few times to get rid of the guides. So maybe that's not what you want, maybe you want CropMarks... and you can see, down here, they are not in alphabetical order. So double click 'CropMarks'. Again there's lots of options, but let's just look at what it does. 'OK'. Awesome, huh! They get Registration and CropMarks. Maybe you're doing kind of a bit of soft printing... and you've got business cards all laid up... and you just need CropMarks, super easy to do. So Scripts aren't things that are typically in InDesign. There's no, like a CropMarks button, somebody wrote a script... and Adobe have been kind to include it. So now we've got CropMarks. I'm going to delete this guy here, and delete all my CropMarks. Let's look at some of the other parts. One of the other ones I used the other day was... let's say I've got a Type Box... and I fill it with Placeholder Text, so 'Type', 'Placeholder Text'. I'm going to make it a bit smaller... so that I get Overset Text. And I'm going to draw out another Text box. So these guys are linked. I can check them by going to 'View'... go into 'Extras', and let's go to 'Show Text Threads'. Just so that I can see that, that goes to that one. Now there was a time when I just needed to break these apart, exactly here... because if you delete this one, or try and cut and paste him... things start reflowing, and it gets weird. What I want to do is select both of these with my Black Arrow... and there's one in here called 'SplitStory', double click him. It breaks them into their own text boxes. The story's been snapped in half, there's no linking... they're just in their own text boxes, which is cool. So, "Not very exciting," you say, "that's not going to save me time." This one is the one that I've done loads... and it's kind of a big time saver. Let's go to one-- it doesn't really matter what we've got selected... it's going to create a new document for us... and there's this one called 'Image Catalog', double click it. What this is going to do is... let's just say-- I'm going to say-- I'm going to point it to 'Exercise Files', go to '04 Interactive'. And what it's going to do is... it's going to grab all these images and put them on their own pages. Click 'Open'. You can decide whether you want rows or columns... or like me, I just want, please put an image on every page. I'm going to leave the labels on to show you what it looks like. Click 'OK', kick back, relax, let InDesign do the work. Done. Thank you, InDesign. Now you can see, in my Pages panel here... there’s that graphic, there's that graphic... Great for a contact sheet, if you're a photographer. But all the images are on their pages, all laid out. You can see, it's created its own file here. Another one that I like, and kind of similar to that one, is placing a PDF file. So let's go back to this first one I've created. I'm going to delete you, guys. I'm going to place a PDF, and it's going to have lots of pages. So I'm going to go back to the one I made earlier on in the day, called 'Catalog'. It's this kind of interactive thing. I want to bring that in, I'm going to click 'Open'. By default, this one starts placing one page, I can get around that... by going to 'Catalog', holding 'Shift', and clicking 'Open'. I got a few options in here, and I can say, I want to bring the whole range, 1 to 6. The only problem with this, is that I want to put this one on this page. Then, still loaded, I can go to another page, I can paste it. Another page, and I can paste it, and you can do it that way... but you know there's a script for this, right? I'm going to hit 'Esc' to get rid of those. And again, it's going to make a new page, I'm not really worried about this one. This one's called 'Place Multiple PDF', double click him. It will ask you which PDF you want. I'm going to go to 'Catalog.pdf', click 'Open'. Do you want to place it in the current document, or a new document? I'm going to go for 'New one', please. 'Document', I'm not sure what that means, click 'OK'. See it generating the pages over here. Look, there's all around pages. Awesome! I probably need to pick a new document size that's a bit bigger. Actually I've generated this catalog at a massive size. So I might have to resize those up afterwards... but at least they're on their own pages, I can go through now. I might have to do some resizing. I've just found a hole in my one little plan there... but you get the idea of Scripts. Now let's look at installing our own Scripts. Now, there are lots to download online. Some are free, some are paid. So if you are doing a job, maybe it's a production job... and you've got to do the same thing over and over again... good chances there might be a Script that already exists. There's lots of places that do it, so Google... the thing you want to do, InDesign Script, and see, where you end up. A great place to look though to get started is InDesign Secrets. It's one of the home bases for InDesign. They've got a '/free' option. And there's some interesting Scripts in here. The one we're going to use, and install is-- I've downloaded it. It's just a file you can download from the internet. Inside of InDesign, it needs to go inside of this. I'm going to twirl up 'Application', this 'User' folder. At the moment there's nothing in there. To open up the User folder... you can right click it, and go... 'Reveal in Finder' or 'Reveal in Window'. And that's where this is. In your 'Exercise Files'; go to 'Exercise Files', 'Scripts'. There's one in here called 'Columns2Frames'. All you need to do is copy it, and in here, I'm going to paste it. Make sure it goes inside of the Frames panel here. This one was created by Steve Wayham... but I'm just using it as an example to show you how to find and install them. What we're going to do is... I've got a blank document here, I'm going to create... a Text box. I'm going to give it three columns. I'm going to go to 'Type', and fill it with 'Placeholder Text'. And now what I want to do is... instead of doing one Text box with three columns... I'd like to go to my 'User' folder, 'Columns2Frames'... and you can see here, it's kind of separated them all out. They're connected Frames now... through the output, rather than one Text box. Rather than being amazing, it's more to kind of show you how to go find Scripts. Now let's look at one more before we go. So I'm going to delete this guy, thank you very much, gone. I'm going to bring in some text. So 'File', 'Place', in 'Exercise Files', 'Script' folder... there's some text called 'List of Fruit'. Drag this one out, and, just got a random list of fruit. What I'd like to do is, magically, make it alphabetical. I can do that by clicking it with the Black Arrow... so I got the whole text box selected. Under 'Application', there is 'Sample', under 'JavaScript'. In here, there's one called 'Sort Paragraphs'. If I click on him, double click, that's all going to work for me. Click 'OK', you'll notice, all, alphanumeric. Cool, huh! So you will find little scripts if you're doing things repetitively. Have a little read through these ones... see if there's anything in there that takes your fancy. Also have a look at InDesign Secrets for the other free Scripts. And if you find yourself in a job where... you are doing repetitive stuff all the time... adding guides, making sure it's this far over, that way across... the right color, with an image from your hard drive... you can actually contract their company to write your Script. I've never done it myself... but ask them, they will tell you if they've got something already... and they'll give you a price on how to make it. You might find that, that's really going to save loads of time... and worth the effort of helping develop it... and the cost of it being made. I'm going to leave you with one more, it's the worst one of them all. I'm going to drag out a box... and I'm going to click on this one called 'Neon'. Are you ready? Ready to go, Neon. We're going to leave it all exactly how it was, click 'OK'. Wow! That is terrible. But, actually no buts, it's pretty terrible. Let's get on to the next video, Dan. 68. How To Speed Up InDesign When It’s Running Really Slow: Hi there, in this video we're going to look at how to speed up InDesign... if it's running a little slow, especially with longer documents. The quickest and easiest is to go to 'View'... and where it says 'Display Performance'... switch it form 'High', which I think is the default for a little while now... and we're going to go to 'Typical'. It just means, can you see, that image there changed. I'll turn it back on, just watch, it's kind of pixelated. 'Display Performance' at 'High'. Looks nicer. So with nothing selected... you can actually turn this whole document, this 'Typical Display'. Things will just start running faster, but things will look not as nice... but don't worry, they’ll print just fine, and go to PDF just fine. It's just the work flow thing. If it's going really bad, you can go to 'View'... and go to 'Display Performance', and go to 'Fast'. It's not really a nice way of working... but especially if you're just doing Text edits, they can work nicely. Now what I found on long documents is... under 'View', 'Display Performance'... if you have one selected, you can actually... kind of force them to go high and low, and they ignore this. What you can do is clear out the 'Object-Level Display Settings'. It just kind of gets everybody back to being... whatever you tell it to be in this. I found that happened on one of my documents... a really long one, one of my notes... and just by clearing out the Object-Level Display Settings... life became great again, and I could work at high quality display... or Typical, without overriding that... which is what this option does. So clear it out, go back to 'Normal', life can be better. One of the other things that can really slow down a document... is Dynamic Spelling. If I turn 'W' off... I got Dynamic Spelling on, I like it, but especially with Lorem Ipsum, everything's spelled wrong. Smart, just not the right language. So 'Dynamic Spelling' under 'InDesign', 'Preferences'... go to 'Spelling'. Remember, it's under 'Edit', 'Preferences', 'Spelling' on a PC. Just turn Dynamic Spelling off if you don't need it. Just turn it on while you're working, turn it off... you'll find life gets a whole lot faster. Another thing you can do, is down the bottom here, 'Preflight'... we haven't done that in this course, we'll do it in the next video. But down here, Preflight's on by default. Shows a little green light on there... means it's trying to check it every time you do a little change. So what you need to do, is this little drop down menu here... go to the 'Preflight Panel', raise this on. Turn it off, close that down... and it's not going to check it every time you paste a bit of text in. I found that speeds me up. The next trick to speeding things up is under 'Preferences'. So I'll show you what it looks like first. When I drag this image, can you see, it's redrawing it as I move. By redrawing it, I mean, you can see it the whole time. Same with the logo, when I'm moving it, you can see where I'm moving it. I know it seems a bit strange, but same with text, watch this. Can you see, the text flashes. Now I'm just kind of really stressing the machine out. My machine's pretty fast, so it's okay. You might find yours is finding it really hard to move things around. Now you can fix that by going up to 'InDesign', 'Preferences', 'Interface'. Remember, 'Edit', 'Preferences', 'Interface' on a PC. And down the bottom here. At the moment, 'No Greeking'. I'm going to go all the way down the bottom. It says, it's going to 'Greek Images & Text'. Greeking just means, it's going to try and-- it's going to use kind of Placeholder stuff... not the actual image and text itself. Down here as well, let's turn this down to 'Never'. That's that redrawing that we've just seen. And there's 'Greek Vector Graphics' as well, still not on. Let's click 'OK'. Now when I drag this, you'll notice... it's dragging a lot faster, it's not flashing... but I can't preview the text. You can see, it's such a good lot, wherever I go, it appears. So, if you can live with that... there might be a nice little thing to speed things up. Same with the images, here... let's start dragging it, it doesn't try and preview it... but when I let go, it appears. Same with this image here. Just drag it around, it's fine. The other thing to do is, not embedding images. So, there is a way to embed images in InDesign. You know if you've got embedded images, basically they're not linked. So this image here, I'm going to go to my 'Links panel'. And see this little icon here, says it's Embedded. How to embed something? It means that it's not going to be connected anymore. So this one here is connecting to a file on my Desktop, called 'Logo Option 4'. I can right click it, and say, 'Embed Link'. The cool thing about that is that, it means when I send the InDesign file... these two images are inside of it. I don't have to package it, or send these files as well. So it comes along with the file. It makes the file size bigger, and it stresses InDesign out. It doesn't like doing that. So what you can do, is you can unlink them. See this guy here, I can right click and say, actually 'Unembed Link'. You need to say 'Yes', and try to find the file again... or it has the file... and you say 'No', and it says... "Where would you like me to put it, now that I've kind of un-embedded it?" And I'll just stick it in my 'Desktop'... in my 'Advance Coursework', and you can go in there. Nothing really changes, except now... this image is linking to that folder I just stuck in. And things will run a little faster. And the last thing is... your computer could be just too slow. If you are looking to upgrade... because things are just painful, and slow, and none of those tricks worked... what you're looking for is basically three things. There's two kinds of RAM, and a hard drive, that's going to give you your speed. The first kind of RAM is the normal RAM you get. When you're looking at the shop, and it says... I've got 16GB, or 8Gb, or 4GB. That kind of RAM is your kind of general purpose RAM... and that's the main ingredient. So 8's the bare minimum, 16 is amazing... if you can get 32, you are winning. So get as much RAM as you can. Some laptops, mainly just PCs, you can upgrade the RAM. Check how much you can get to put in there. Often it's not expensive. For a Mac, most MACs don't let you put RAM in, that just can't be done. There's hacks to make it work... but really if you're going to buy one, go high on RAM... because it's really hard to upgrade. The other kind of RAM is called VRAM, or Video RAM. It's generally publicized a little less in the shop. So basically, you've got a video card in your computer... and it gets its own bit of RAM... and the more you can have in there, the better. Where things are really bad is when they don't display the VRAM at all. That means it doesn't have any. It's like an on-board video card on the motherboard, really bad. Often that's when you're looking at like a $500 laptop. They can keep those prices... because they just don't do what's called an external video card. So when you're looking in a shop, and you're like... "Hey, does this one have an external video card, or VRAM?" It sounds like you know what you're talking about. They'll hopefully be able to help you in pointing to a laptop that's got both... a good bit of RAM, and a good bit of VRAM. Other thing is the hard drive. Now this is kind of weird. Normally it's a hard drive, how big it is... but recently hard drives have gone through a bit of a revolution. There is your normal tape hard drives. It's a little spinning wheel that spins around... and that's the hard drive's work. Now we've got something called SSD Drive, a Solid State Drive. It works more like a USB stick, a big version of it. The cool thing about them is that they are super-duper fast... compared to more standard kind of wearing away hard drives that you buy. The trouble is, they're a lot more expensive... and they're a lot smaller for that more expensive price. So this laptop you're looking at now has 1 Terabyte... and cost me a fortune, because it's a SSD drive. Now, if you're using an old Mac, you can totally upgrade those. The model of MacBook Pro I had before this... you could upgrade the hard drive, that was a little bit of a hack, but... man, did it make a big difference in the performance. This new one, I'm not sure. Maybe you can upgrade them, I don't know. But it's got an SSD drive, so I don't need to. If you're on a PC, easily upgradable. Definitely cheaper to do than on a Mac... but I'd probably take it to a technician to do it. If yours is still running slow... you could just have a slower computer, and you need an upgrade. But hopefully in there, you'll find... a little bit of nugget of good speediness... to help with your InDesign work flow. All right, let's get on to the next video. 69. Advanced Exporting & Printing Tricks For Adobe InDesign CC : So let's look at some of the things you do at the end... where we're kind of exporting, and printing, and sharing. The first one we're going to do is Packaging. So let's say I need to send this to a colleague... but I need to send the InDesign file along with the fonts, and all the images... or let's say I'm just archiving this, and I want to kind of get everything... because the images are all over the place... and I need to bring it back to a single location... so I can zip it up, and archive it, or email it. The easy one, I go to 'File', 'Package'. You click on 'Package'. You ignore the printing instructions because everybody ignores that. And you tell it where you want to put it. So I'm going to put mine on my 'Desktop', 'Indesign Coursework'. I'm going to use everything, including the hidden fonts. I'm going to give it a name, call this one... 'Collection 2019 V1'. Kick back, relax. It's going to say, "Do not share the fonts with anybody else because it's illegal." Let's go and have a little look. So, in my 'Desktop' now, in 'Coursework'... I've got a folder, inside that folder... if I go inside, you can see everything that I need. There's my InDesign file, there's all the fonts. There is all the images that were linked. It's also created a PDF... makes it easy just to quickly send off... or just check what's in the file before opening up InDesign. And then this file here, called the idml. This file is super useful if you're using, say the new fancy version of InDesign... and you're sending it to somebody... that's using CS6 or a really old version that can't be updated. They can open up the idml file. Often with no, or maybe a little bit of trouble... depending on what new features you might have used. That might not exist in that older version... but most of the times it's perfect. So 'idml's are awesome. What you can do here is, you can just grab this. On a Mac, you right click it, and say 'Compress', and you get a zip file. Nice and easy, email-able, stick it in a Dropbox... or send it via WeTransfer. Lots of ways where I can just archive it. So that's packaging. Another useful thing is... let's say you're doing some printing inside of your office. You want to print it on, say you've got an A3 printer... it's a nice big one, and you want to print pages... and you want to print spreads. Then kind of fold it together like a little booklet. Probably you'll know, like with a newspaper... if we pull the pages apart... it's not numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or evenly. When you're folding pages together, groups of them... 1 needs to go with 7, and 7 needs to go with 14... and there's kind of like a weird numbering system. I'm totally guessing about those numbers, by the way. But you can do that yourself in here. It's called Pagination, that's the technical term. Normally it's handled by a printer... but if you want to do it yourself, and print your own booklet... go to 'File', and, I'll give away a little secret... it's called 'Print Booklet'. In here, let's have a look at the preview. It's going to print this page with the blank page at the back. Let's have a look. So, 3 goes with 14, all sort of weird stuff happens. 5 needs to go with 12 for this thing to print off on a big printer... and for you to be able to fold it into half... and everything to line up properly. You have to go through and pick a printer... that actually has the big enough page size. This is the most common one, the '2-up Saddle Stitch'. Saddle Stitch is just a fancy way to say we're going to staple it. If you've got a quote back, and they say, Saddle Stitch-- I remember, when I first learnt that, I was like... "Ah, why don't they just say staple?" One of the other cool things you can do at the end of the document... just to make sure everything's going to run right is 'Preflight'. Down here, I'm going to open this up. By default it's on, if yours is not like mine... go to the 'Preflight panel' and turn it on. Once on, go to this drop down, and let's go to 'Define Profiles'. What we want to do is create our own Profile, clicking '+'. I'm going to call this 'Dan Prepress Check'. Now, this is great if you're going out to print... and you just want to kind of... have an automatic checker to go through and do things... so what I'd like to do is... down here, under 'General', there's nothing I need in there. Let's go to 'Links', what I'd like to do is check if there's missing links. Definitely will give me a warning. 'Inaccessible URL links', I've never had a problem with that... I'm just going to ignore it. Let's say 'Color'. Let's say we're going out, and we can't use RGB... because it's going to a CMYK, and they told us it has to be CMYK. So you can go into here and say, 'Color spaces not allowed'... and the one that I don't want. Turn this one on, and I say, I can't use 'RGB'. You also might say, I can't use 'Spot Colors'. Well I can, but I can only use a maximum of one. You can run through all the different options... to get the things how you need it to be before it goes to print. Let's look at some of the other ones. Image Resolution, I need 'Image Resolution' to be... a minimum of-- 'Color images', it needs to be a minimum of, say '100'. I want to throw you some errors here. Yours might be 300, it might be 72 if it's going out for Digital Print. Work your way through. 'Minimum Stroke Weight', that's the one that caught me out once. I printed a Stroke that was teeny tiny. It was less than that, and it's called a Hairline. I was just scaling it down, and I made it really small... got the print back. And weirdly the lines just kind of rubbed off with your hand. It was so small, and just holding on to the page. You might have a 'Minimum Stroke Weight', 'Text' in here. It's going to give an alarm if there's Overset Text or missing fonts... you might have a minimum Type Size. Say you're dealing with lots of Terms & Conditions... and your minimum Type Size, you know... is '5' for Black Text, for Terms & Conditions... so you can set that goal. And the document, in here, you might be saying... you can only deal with US Letter. If you're using Metric numbers... you could just say it has to be page sizes of A4... instead of giving me some other random size. All right, anything else in here? Number of pages... you might be printing, and you know, like we did that print booklet. If you're going to do a booklet, you need a minimum of four... and then, multiples of four, you can turn that on now. You can say, 'No Blank Pages', please. Once you've got it how you like. Click 'OK'. And it's not working. So by default, you define it, then you got to turn it on. And you can see down here, still on 'Basic', saying you got no errors. I'm going to say, I want to go to 'Dans Prepress Check'. Now it's got 12 errors, this is where it gets quite fun. This can happen while you're working... rather than just at the end, like we're doing here. Useful for junior designers that might be working with you. You can have that Preflight on, and they can work out their own errors. The way they work out their own errors, if they go to the 'Preflight panel'... you can see here, I just have 12 color problems on my one. So, in here I have lots of color spaces of RGB that I can't use. The cool things about it though is, it tells you where. It's telling me I'm using text that's the wrong color... so I can click on it, and it says-- there it is there, it's using RGB color for the pink there. Down the bottom here, where it says 'Info'... it tells you how to fix it. So I can't use RGB, it says use a different Color Swatch. What if I had more errors than this? Turns out I didn't really think about the Image Resolution. I'd turned it down to 100. I should have turned it right up very high... so that this thing threw a few more errors for us. But I hope you get what I mean. So you define your Preflight first... by going to this arrow here, and saying 'Define Profiles'. Make sure it's on in this Preflight panel... and then make sure you pick it. You can either pick it from this, which is easy, or within here. Up to you. The last little one is a little Easter egg. This is mainly for the people who came from Quark. I learned Quark at University. What is Quark? Quark was the industry standard when I was studying. It was what InDesign is now. But InDesign came along and totally took over. Why do you care? I'm going to show you this little Easter egg. You'd probably just more than smile if you've never used Quark before. We're going to go to 'File', 'Print'. In the bottom here, go to 'Save Preset'... and you need to call it 'Friendly Alien', capitals. It needs to be spelled exactly like that. Click 'OK'. Nothing really happens. I hover my mouse down here. Where do I click it? I can never remember. Click once. It's our Alien friend, from Quark. I used to love it when you could get him to zap letters, remember that... or delete them. So cool. This guy's friendly, he waves, and continues on his journey. Is that super awesome? No. But it's kind of fun if you're a Quark person. Make sure you install it on a colleague's computer... install the preset... and then get them to click it. It's awesome. All right, so that's going to be the end of this video... of Exporting and Printing. I will see you in the next video. 70. BONUS: Software Updates: Hey, there. This is a bonus video that I've made so I can share with you the latest updates that have come out in InDesign since the original recording of this course. Adobe are constantly updating the software, so I thought this would be a handy way to keep you super up to date. Now, I'll go through all of the features and put them in what I think is the most important, to the more obscure ones towards the end of this video. I'm going to stop talking and I'm going to start showing you the new features. But first up, if you are playing along and you've downloaded the exercise files, open up the newsletter, it's the only file you can open, and let's talk about the very first feature, and it's unavoidable, it's this Properties panel. It's the talk of the InDesign town. You either love it or you hate it. I'm in the love it, so I'm going to try and convince you the same, but I'll show you how to turn it off. Basically, it's the same panel that's being put into, it's been in Illustrator for a little while and Photoshop just got this version. It's contextually sensitive, which is quite cool. I've got the background selected. Nothing selected gives me options to change the height, and the width, and all that good stuff. But when I end up clicking on say this image here, I've got image options, so Text Wrap, Frame Fitting, all that stuff that you end up with a bunch of panels all open if you need to. Text Wrap is this giant one. It's always in the way. The closer the roll up, and what they've done is this little dot dot dot in the corner, there is more, so you can click on that and it expands out to be a bit fuller. The one I'm finding the most useful is things like paragraph styles and character styles. I find it's a big group of panels that I have open, always in the way. With this selected here, you can see it's got paragraph styles, character styles, there's a lovely little drop down. You can apply and do stuff. I love it. But there's some things that are going to be a bit weird. You're going to have to get used to. Like this image selected, you'd be like, "The links panel, it's gone." Instead of just going and opening it, which you can do, just go back to the old school way and just have a look at this quick actions, and all these things. They're quite good. If I want to replace the file here, Import File, Replacement Image. It's super easy, super quick. You'll find 90 percent of everything you need just over here in the Properties panel. The one thing you might not be able to live with is, I'm not sure if you've noticed yet, but the control bar is gone. That's the big bar on the top here. This is the one where I'm like, I'm not sure I can live without this. Messy ugly bar on the top. It's too handy. I can see why they turned it off for people that are new, because man, it is daunting, and you can get a lot of the options over here. But how about me and you? Just for this course, we'll try and live without the control panel and we'll see where it falls down. One little tip I just stumbled across was, some of these icons you can click whiles holding down the Option key on a Mac or the ALT key in a PC, and it gives you more options. If I have this selected, some of them don't work, so if I hold that Option key down on my Mac, ALT key in a PC and click "Font Size", it does nothing. But I was working in here and I wonder if this, I don't know how I stumbled across this, but I was holding down the Option key and I clicked "Drop Caps" and it opens up that panel. If you know that there's a panel that you can go into up here, it's likely to be connected to the icon next to the feature over here. That makes sense. I had nothing selected. The other one I found was new page, goes like, new page. It's not what I wanted. I've undone. I want to hold down the Option key and click it, and given a bit more, you can pick master pages and numbers of pages, all that stuff. Some of them can be clicked, some of them can't. If you're like, "No I'm old school, I can't live in this properties world." You can go back to Essentials Classic, and go back to the way it was in the last version, and probably you've got your own layouts and things set up anyway, so you can jump back to that. But for this class, we're going to Essentials, we're going to give it a try. Like I said, I've been using it for a couple of weeks now. I'm somewhere in the Properties panel. But like me, complain if there's things that are missing. I can't believe they removed that. Adobe has few Google Adobe feature requests you end up at. It starts off at this site, this wish form, and you end up at this thing called User Voice, and that's how people vote on features and get into the top of the list. It's not complaining, it's a helpful criticism. Next feature. This feature is called Adjust Layouts. It's being over here, seen staring at us and now bring you Properties panel, and this is really amazing. I do a lot of work across continents. I do a lot in New Zealand where I'm from and Island where I live, everything is A4. A lot of work I do ends up being in the US, and for some banana reason we like to use different size bits of paper. Let's say, I'm going to look at this top page up here. What I want to do is currently you can see I've got nothing selected, it's set to US later. I need to get it ready for Europe. So I need to go to A4, and you just end up with this. That's my job to show you how it works. You can see format issues, just nothing lines up anymore. Imagine there was a button that you can click and say, "I'd like you to be A4." We won't change anything else at the moment. Let's just click OK and be ready to be amazed. Cua, just quit and changed it. I loved that so much. Undo, redo, undo redo. Now you might have noticed that this thing isn't working, so it's a little bit of prep work or at least some best practices. If you work in a company where you know you have to go through all these different file sizes. It doesn't have to be like we're doing a traditional print design. But this might be landscape portray designs for e-books or magazines. Digital magazines who publish online, maybe banner ads, weird formats. I want to undo that, and before I go and change my adjust layout, I need to do some preventative maintenance. This image selected, I'm going to say, "I would like you to auto fit and I want you to fit frame proportionately. No, this one fit content proportionally." I always get mixed up with these. If you do too, happens to everybody. I'm telling it to auto fit and fit content proportionately, and now if I go and change it, click on the background, just layout, change to A4, get ready. So good. Now that's just a really simple page and you're like, yeah. What happens when you've got lots of columns and text and things? Let have a look. I'm going to go back, file revert if you don't know, it goes back to the last time you hit Save. Just a handy way of jumping back a few steps. Let's look at this page, more complex, there's columns, there's margins, there's things. Text boxes that, I do that all the time. It's a habit, I make sure that the text box fits the edge of the text and that's going to throw some problems. Let's try it now, and then I'll show you how to fix it. Like, missing, oversight, oversight everything is wrong. I'm going to undo and all you need to do is you probably spotted in there. But my, look at this, adjust font, you can say it's minimum and maximum adjustments. I've found that to be necessary at the moment for anything that I've worked on. Now I'm going to make it A4, and I'm going to say, Okay, and look at that before, after, before, after. Just magic the columns, the gutters, everything just adjusts. Now what happened to the fonts? You'd be like, because what was it before? Let's have a look. So undo. This is when it's US later. Couple of things to look at. This one here is 40 points and this one here is 10 points. I'm going to turn it back, so now it's A4. Lets have a look. So 40 ended up going down to 38.6. Now, it really depends on brand guidelines and how specific UIView like. Man, I can't deal with bits of fonts sizes. You might have to go and adjust it now, but it gets you close. Lets look at the body copy here. You can see it's gone from 10.2-10.1. You might be horrified and you might be like, "There's no way we can live with 10.1 fonts." I guess it depends. Some people, like a lot of my smaller work, I'm not going to worry about 10.1. But if you're working with a larger logic business and there's just lots of documents and it's going to cause it to trouble. You could go and clear the overrides, will just not adjust the font when you're adjusting the layout. One last little thing is, let's say you are not doing that whole US to imperial thing, you're just doing design changes. Let's say, just you personally or the client comes back and sees the margins are two type. We need to push them out, and there's just a lot of layout work you're going to have to do to fix that. Let's do that. I'll just lay out and in here, I'm not going to change the page size. I'm just going to play around with the margins. I'm going to use the inside and the outside. I'm going to bump it up some random measurement. Actually random 30 millimeters. You can't just type in measurements if you're not sure how to do it in points, I'm going to click Ok, and just keep an eye on like things like this. This is one of the things I'm like, tiny small thing but watch, just going to shuffled in, all the columns changed. You can see here, just really good. Even if you're not using it for full document changes, super handy just for small like margin changes. One last thing, I believe can be changed as well. So you come back and we need three milli for everything. That's a bleed typically in my part of the world. I'm going to click Ok, and you'll see, it just tucked it a little bit, but I adjusted the image. I want you to do it a bit better. Let's go back to old school six milli. Keep an eye on this and the image down here. Click Ok. Just go. Big Internet drove out the image. The only you might have to check is luckily this image, I think it's big enough or already being set to auto. Remember when we did the auto up here, this guy needs to be auto fit and that second option in. That's auto adjust, that's my favorite. We did properties first because we couldn't really ignore it, but adjust layout was one of those life-changing features in my opinion, anyway. Let's look at the next life changing feature in InDesign. Quickly before we move on, if you are enjoying this video, hit the Like button really helps me and my teaching thing. If you'd like my teaching style, hit Subscribe. Also note that I've done reviews of all the new Adobe 2019 software. There'll be links to them all in the description. If you want to hear more of my kiwi accent and you want to say, "Get up to speed with InDesign properly." I have an InDesign essentials and InDesign advanced course. Search for my name, Daniel Scott, if you want to do one of those. All right, back to the features, and this one is a big one. Imagine if there was a way you can send your PDF to a client, they could add comments and then they come back into InDesign, and not only would they just indicate with the changes where, that actually update the text. If that doesn't sound exciting for you, skip to the next feature. But for me and a lot of people out there, I know this is amazing. I used to go to [inaudible] and there was a workaround for it. There's lots of plug-ins that try and do it, but Pro InDesign can't do it by itself until now, and the workflow is amazingly. Let me show you how the workflow goes. I've done this, I've going to send it to the clients. It's all going to go File Export. It has to be a PDF for this to work. Print all interactive, it doesn't matter. I'm just going to call it newsletter. I'm going to click Save, and I'm going to leave everything set to the default. I'm going to click Export, is obviously text, I know. Now you're pretending to be the client or your boss, or your studio manager, or your account manager who does the mark up on your work, and what they need to do is they need to use Acrobat and they need to use these committing option. Commenting opens along the top here, I'm using the latest version of Acrobat Pro, and basically all of these or most of these features work. Let's have a little look. Let's just put in a little sticky note to say, "Hate this image." I can't spell image of this. Great feedback then, and let's have a look at some of the ticks. [inaudible] is really nice is when you've got like this, I'm going to highlight this text and explain that I believe this is opposite. That's cool, you can underline stuff, it's probably loads of bad spelling in here. What I really liked though, is when you start doing stuff like this, when you want to insert text and this is where it gets exciting. Maybe just exciting for me, may be exciting for you too. Is Rosemary grows best in full sunshine, I don't know what I'm adding. But lets I'd say there's a bit of takes that I've left out to my copywriter or maybe my editor is adding things like a mini version of in copy, if you've ever used that. That's going to go in there, what else is handy? I can delete stuff, I can say, see this one here Strikethrough text, I'm just going to remove this. It's obvious that needs to go, can draw on things, you can pick a color. Where is somebody we can draw, super mature stamps. These last few don't come through to InDesign hand and should know if you've never used the thing before. If you're working in a place where you need to do this, you need to say I'm approved and you can do that. There's loads of cool stamps in here, I want to say them all but lots of dynamic ones to say this has been approved by me at this time. You can see it's actually a date and time, has my name from my login, but this stuff is good for PDS but doesn't come through to InDesign. Drawing shapes, stars does adding attachments doesn't. Enough of this, let's save it, so File, Save. I get to InDesign, and this is where the magic happens. What you need to do is under Window, let's go to PDF Comments and this little bar rising up and that's the little icon for it, I'm going to import the comments from my newsletter in my exercise files, newsletter PDF. You ready for the magic, look at that. One thing it won't do is when I was first testing this, I was in Preview mode. If you know Preview modal or short cut the W key on your keyboard or down here, you can turn it off to make sure you're not in preview, you got to to be in normal, otherwise they don't appear. Let's have a look. My very useful way, I hate this image so I'm going to go through and switch it out. File image, Placement lovely. I'm going to auto fit it I'm going to fit proportionately. I always give which one of these two to use, don't worry we going look at another fancy way in a second. That's done, hide that image. I have done that one, ticked it, you can tick or delete it, click on it, it'll jump to it. My approved is there but the stamp doesn't come through, I'm just going to get rid of that. Now the stamp, get rid of that, we've got over, say it. Maybe the highlighting appears, it doesn't print. If I go back to preview, disappears that totally right and it's totally over set. Now I've done that one. Now this is where it gets really cool. I'm marking it up is one thing, but actually adjusting ticks is where I find this thing super amazing. This is all being strikethrough remember, I click "Accept", that's the wrong one. Did strike through down here as well, such as gone, but look at this first paragraph really, I don't know where I'm heading. No, where's the one needs to go, here it is. Click just deleted the paragraph. If there were 10 in there, there might be some work flow you might have to work out with your committer or your editor and this one here as well. We've done that one, where is don't know what to make, there it is. Let's add this, it was in, where was it? When my after I click it and say accept, there it is, I don't at I'm adding there it is there. You can just say add it just adds it in and if you're going to be like my editor, Margaret, she does all of the takes editing for me, you might just delete this whole thing, put a big strikethrough for that and add her own big chunk. You'll need to work out a workflow that works right for you. Anything else that's in there? Yeah, there's lines in there, good bye lines. A couple of things you can do is instead of going through them one by one, say you trust them completely. You can just go up to here and say actually, just apply all of them. I've already gone through and applied them separately. We can say delete them all, collapse the all, type them all up so we're nice and clean as you can see them. Other things you can do is, this is the other option is. I'm gong to Undo, you can just turn them off so you can't see them. Just turn to hide comments on and off. Don't print. You can't just leave them on but I love the workflow is super handy, it's not as good as if you liking then you're like, man, I wish there was a more complicated, not complicated. I wish it was more features to that then you might want it to look into in copy goes hand in hand with InDesign. Often what will happen is the designer will be using InDesign and whoever is in charge of the copywriting we'll be using incopy, and why did I have to separate ones? Because ones are really focused on tics domains and you can do cool things when you lock things like images and layouts and fonts choices to just a few little options. The design again can say, "You can do this much editor, but not more." The editor gets a really purpose-built, text editing software. Onto the next feature it's called content aware that. We're going to close this down. We were going to do it, we'll do it here. We're on pages 3 and what I want to do is continue with fit, we've done auto fitting with images already remember this one up the top here. What I want to do is show you that very new feature for fitting and it's pretty clever it's using some Adobe since a machine learning AI is probably one of those things. Let's bring in a bunch of images, and File and then to place. Help that shortcuts Command D that I use, look, it's the properties panel, come on. I've got to bring in an image, I am going to bring in these three so Shift click the top one and then the last one and you select all three, click "Open" and I want all three of these images. You can see if I use my right arrow key on my keyboard, I picked images that had really different ratios and formats, it's like a square one and a long thin one in a portrait one, and that's just my arrow keys on my keyboard, and I want to put them all down at the same time. This is not the shortcuts by the way, this is not the feature, at least, this is just cool, gratify, and a lot of people don't know it. If you hold down the Command and Shift key on a Mac or Control Shift on a PC and drag out, you can see get this grid of images. I'm holding down the Command Shift on a Mac or Control Shift on a PC and the other little trick for this, as you can use the Arrow keys, you can let go of Control Shift, keep holding the mouse down and you can use up to add more down to remove them, left, right. Just to edit. You can use Page up and Page down, will do the spaces in between them. Anyway, we need three images, I'm going to lined them up here, and I go about that size. Now like, hey, that happens all the time because nobody ever gets the perfect ratio images, you end up doing things like this option you like, yeah, but see this person at the top. That one's not to bad, lets have a look. I'm going to do a couple options, I'm going to duplicate it, I've got, let's actually do it, all ever here there is this space. This option, and I'll do this option and we'll do that option. That's how it came in, we're going to use this option and you can see fills the image inside the frame, which is cool, but it's done some weird stuff with the people and I've got to go and amend it. Imagine if there was a clever little button that looks like this, that somehow went off and worked out clever things like way people's faces where in compositions and 3D takes a little while, but look at that. This first one's not a big deal, when I was practicing, it did make a big difference so I will try and break it and see if I can make a way, but this one, he is very clear. It's gone through impact the hidden shoulders. It's called content aware fit and it's just very clever. Lets see if I can break this one again, instead of using that ratio, let's use some thing else. Do a couple of options, different shapes, one of them I did and it really good, you're trying and approve your works. Two options, this top one here we're going to use L fit to frame and then this one here we're going to go content aware, give it a second and take a little bit longer its analyzing stuff, it's pretty high raised images as well. It heeds in it, not clipped off that's what I made before. This one here is not too different a little bit, like not as big a gap at the top there. Will this change my life forever? No, but it's quite handy, it's no adjust layout, but it's definitely one of the more sexy things that have gone into InDesign, AI, machine learning, Adobe CC, but if you are dealing with gun venture, it's not going to do much. I played around with this for quite a while to try and find good examples, I try to find like maybe product shots what it did it well with, does really well with people. That's like major feature, anything else, it's not perfect but this is the first version of it. I imagine if you're looking at this and it's a year from now, it's the end of 2018, by the way, you might be using it and it's just a phenomenally more better. Those aren't really words, but you know what I mean. It's going to get better and better. Now, that's the default, that's the way default, you can turn this on by default, you can go to on a Mac, go to InDesign Preferences, and go to General. If you're on a PC, go to Edit, right down here some is Preferences and go to General and where is it? The bottom feature here, make it the default. Now, I totally would it takes a little bit longer, but it definitely gives you a better starting point than this original default. But I've got to turn mine off because I'm a teacher and I need mine to look like everyone else's, like this, but if I wasn't, I'd be tuning it on. Thank you very much. You get on here and let's get onto the next feature. Next feature is secretly my most favorite, but it's not very sexy and you can't really start a video with, let's look at this thing that's really just basic but really helpful, it's like number four in my list, but you probably going to love this as much as I do. Let's look at the problem it solves some bullet points that's likely to lists, I'm going to make it a bullet point using our Properties panel, but I want the spacing between just these bullets because it's using this spacing from the body copy, I'm going to say actually, you guys can you just have paragraph? I don't know why paragraph I use quite a bit, so I might have to have that panel open a bit because clicking these little dotted lines as a bit of a pain. But let say I'm going to have that add size zeros, it's one of the stuck underneath each other. You see it a paragraph style full of these bullets, you're like great, but then I want something different to the bottom one. The last of the bullets needs another paragraph style that does some spacing back to 10 same as the rest of it. If you want some spacing above the bullet lists, you're going to have to put in another paragraph style that does this. You end up with three paragraphs styles to make a pretty simple bullet point list. But now I'm going to undo loads. The next feature, well the new feature is, it say the same thing, bullet points and you're going to have to open up your paragraph panel. This is the new option, doesn't have a very good name. Space between paragraphs using same style, and it's a little bit in the section e. It's very hard to explain, to me I just like to get my head around it. I'm going to try my best to explain it nicely for you, but if you do find later on you're like, man. It's worth working out though. What we're going to do, is we're going to ignore this one. What we're going to say is this thing here, the space between paragraphs using that style. I would like this to be zero, okay. So it's all stacked up nice to each other, but you can see we get the gaps either side. What it's doing is, as long as the style repeats. This one here, actually, let's make it a style, doesn't actually have to be an official style, just has to be different from the one above it. I'm going to call this to make it clearer. I've got bullets. Then this one here you can see is body copy. What it's saying is, as long as bullets is followed by bullets, I will be zero, where is it? This one here, and this one here as well. Bullets followed bullets. So I will be zero, this one here, unless the style changes, so bullets becomes body copy. What ends up happening is, it uses this other option. If bullets follows bullets, it's zero, unless it's different and it's going to use this option. I could grab all this side and I could say, I can increase it. It doesn't have to be the same as body copy. This is just do this, unless the style changes, then do this. Did it help explain it? That becomes like the main when you use between styles, it's like the hard core one, and this is the option that only happens if the style changes. Let me go back to ten because that's what I wanted. I rerecorded that a couple of times. It was my best one. I'm going to stop there because the next one might not be as clear. Play with it because it is amazing, I think So. Say this one here now because I've spent the time doing this style, watch this 3D, body copy, bullets, look at that. One more thing I want to show you for good measure, and it's not in the properties panel. I'm going to have to go back to the Control Panel. I like it too much and I know where everything is. Keep the properties awesome. I'm going to use the control panel if it ever opens. What I'm looking for, if you don't know this one, get ready to be amazed, this is not a new feature, just happens to be awesome. Make sure you are on your paragraph and down here they split. Look at that. No crazy tabs panel. Just you can split it by three or two. Mine doesn't fit. Three. It's too small. You get the idea, right? Why would they have a good measure? You can say the same thing, for this, instead of splitting it, you can span, I'm going to get it to span across all of them. That can be handy for stuff. Not really what I want here, but a little bonus. Next feature time. This one's not as good looking as the other ones, but for a few people, this is going to be pretty useful. I'm going to delete this. What I want to do is get this table that I've got here into one column. Footnotes. Not a very exciting topic, but fundamental to the desktop publishing game. Let's say I want to add a footnote to this text here. In earlier versions, 2018 and earlier, you couldn't go up to type and add, Insert Footnote, this is grayed out, wouldn't work in a table. We can use the new properties panel, getting used to it. I can now insert footnotes into tables, paste it in, I've already added a style to it, I'm going to add another one. That's all I really need to show you really, you just do footnotes in tables, but it does segue into the next new feature in InDesign 2019. To do what I want to show you, let's add endnote. Footnotes are the bottom of the page, end notes are the end of the document, or at least you're textbox. I'm going to insert one here. Endnote. You can see it's just jumped all the way to the end of my text frame. I'm going to add one more in there. A new feature, it's quite handy, as you can convert one to the other. What I'm going to do is, I've got my cursor flashing anywhere in the text box that you're working with, cause it'll lies long linked text box, I'm going to say type. There's one here, it says convert footnotes to endnotes, so instead of them being up here, I can say type, convert to endnotes please. You can say footnotes or endnotes, scope. You can look through the whole document or just the selection that you have selected. I'm just going to do the whole document, found two of them, and let's check it up. I'm not sure why I've got a return on them. You can go back the other way as well, the weird thing is it's in the same place, watch this. I want to turn the endnotes back into footnotes, so type. You can see here, there's no endnote to footnote. Let's lump them both together, even though I wanted the opposite of what this is, it doesn't really matter. I can just switch it here. They go back to their home places. Done, endnotes are gone. I'm to get rid of that text. Hopefully now, where is my table? That one, they're all there on the page with a return. Once I'm finished this video, I'll work out why. For the moment, you can do footnotes Inside table and you can convert endnotes to footnotes and footnotes to endnotes. Where I find this most useful is when you're bringing in stuff from Word and somebody's used endnotes in one document and footnotes in the other, and you've got a style guide to follow. We need to switch them around. Now you can. Let's go to the next feature. The next feature is not really a feature, it's a missing thing and this is a test, okay. So you need to tell me what is missing from what we're going to do now, okay. Something's gone. It's as Scooby Doo mystery. You're part of it. I'm going to go and package my document. I need to send it to a client or the printer, I need to archive it. File package, I'm going to go and click package and I'm going to save it. I'm going to put it onto my desktop. I'm going to call it Newsletter folder, then I click package, missing fonts. Sure thing. I got a visit text. Sorry about that. Should fix it. Something happened there. Well, something didn't happen there. Do you guess what it was? It's that annoying printing instructions thing that had always asks you to fill out that you'd never do. Just removed it, you can turn it back on. If I go to package, it's this thing here. We'll package and I'll show you. Remember that thing that you've never filled in, but it comes up every time. There might be people who do fill this in. I can see the point of it, but I know if I send this to any of my printers, not one of them is going to open it to check it. But you might be in a different kind of production line, where this is quite good, so you can turn it back on, or like me and it go and make sure it's off forever, never to come back. So it's not really a feature, but it's worth mentioning, right. All right, next feature is a visual font browsing. So I'm going to click on some text and in my Properties panel over here and a character. You'll notice that this pop-out's got a whole lot different. So it's a little bigger and a couple of things have happened. Actually what I'm going to do is, I'm going to make this bigger. I'm going to select the text first. You don't have to do this. But over here, the new features are, you can decide this drop down. I think the default is selected ticks. You see the little sample ticks, is actually what I have selected over here, cafe growth, because we all know we pick a font from here, it looks good in the preview, but without particular characters, it just doesn't look good. It's easy to do this. Often I like switching it to typography for some reason, it just got a lot of the ascenders and descenders. It's a good generic look at a font. You can also go in here and pick a Roger Hungry ate. Yeah, so you can decide on these. I'm going to switch it back to select a text. There's one in there as well. I find that sometimes quite useful in numbers. Back to topography. You can also change the previous size, it's handy. Because we're just dealing with one word, I'm going to use the larger size. The other thing you might notice that you can see when I roll over it, you see updating the text over there. Okay, over there, back over here. That never used to happen as well. Kind of a live text preview, it updates as you're working through it. The other big thing they've done with typography, is they've actually removed the need to jump out to Typekit. If you've used Typekit before, you go to the website, pick a font, download it. They've done it actually built in, which is cool. It's called find more. Not very exciting, but actually this crazily is fonts that aren't on your computer. There are actually just on Typekit. These are just thousands of fonts you can just start using. We're done away with the jumping in and jumping back out. You just do it by hitting find more. The other thing which you'll know, is that they've called it adobe fonts now, it used to be called Typekit. Adobe have done away with that name now. Now Typekit is just Adobe fonts. What's really cool about it, is let's say, we're going to use filters. Filters have been around for a while, but people don't use them and they're so cool. I'm going to say I want hand-written fonts. I'm now looking at Typekit, all the hand-written fonts. You can see there, hover is above it and I can actually just download this to my computer now. I'm going to activate it. Yes please and that's downloading it. You can see it's sinking there. I'll just have a dawn on my computer and as long as I continue with my Creative Cloud license, keep paying to that, you're going to keep them fonts. You see there, it's updated. Yes, pretty cool. No more jumping out to Doug font or 1001 free fonts. Unless you need a cactus shape font. I'm pretty sure that's the only place to get those. Just click on the Find More and use your filters to cut it down to stuff, like a handwritten. You might be picking Slab serif fonts or you can look at these ones, the different x heights. Maybe you need to a condense width, just super handy filters for finding fonts on Typekit, super-quick, super easy, and then just downloading them within the app. It'll be available in all apps. It'll be available in Illustrator and Photoshop now. Hopefully now Adobe. Yeah. Nice. On my computer. We did it well. The other thing to note with the change of Typekit to Adobe fonts is that, let me show you that old version. So the old version, if I went into fonts here, maybe this thing here, add from Typekits, so that's changed. Now it's just fine font and here, this one here, the Typekit, I use to this quite a bit because I want to see all the Typekit fonts. They've changed that icon to look like this now, so if you want to see on your computer all of the Typekit fonts, or the new Adobe fonts, just click on that. It's the ones that have been activated. You can go through and pick ones from the ones you've downloaded from Typekit. Another handy feature that they've updated in here is this option. So I'm going to turn off my activated fonts and I'm going to turn on the ones that are recently added. This is just really handy if you've installed fonts. You can see here at the top, just the recently added fonts. You might have installed them through InDesign or Photoshop, or you might have gone through and done it with Font Book or Suitcase, does anybody still use Suitcase? However you've installed a font on your machine, It'll just be like show me the new ones, please. Go on, make sure you turn them off when you're filtering them. One last thing that they've done is that they've gone and moved a couple of things that were handy, that were along the top here, and these two little icons, they used to be up here. Now if you hover above the text, can you see that is next to the type? It's show visually similar and make a favorite. So if you're using Como, it's a new font, you want to add it to your favorites, click it there. I'm going to add that one, I'm going to add this one, I'm going to add that one to my favorites. So instead of having to scroll down your giant font list, what you can do is you can say, just show me the ones I'm allowed to use. Really handy if you're in a corporate environment where you only have two fonts, two different weights and two fonts. It's no point scrolling, and scrolling, just set favorites on them and then click this little stop here, turn it off by clicking it again. One of the little feature they've moved and it's just cool is, say you like this one, be like actually show me the visually similar ones. That's just a little double wave. It's pretty clever, I don't know how it does it, but you can see we had great vibes. But look at all these fonts that are very, very similar there on my computer. That is a visual font browsing. It's updated in Adobe Illustrator this year as well. So you'll see the same thing in there, the one thing with the visually similar one, you need to go to this little back button that say get out of there please? Next feature. Well the next feature is more just a thing that happens, that's quite handy. So when I go to File Export, what happened in the past was let's say this thing here needed to be an interactive PDF. I'm going to click Save and zoom through it all. I exported the interactive PDF and then I went to a completely different document that had nothing to do with the first one. It's not meant to be a PDF interactive, but InDesign just removed the last thing you did but now what happens? Let's say in this case, this guy is meant to be print or it might be Prefable, EPUB, or Fixed Layout, might be JPEGs, whatever you're doing. It's going to remember per document now. That one was a PDF, that was indirective PDF. In the old version, if I went to export again now it'd say, hey do you mean, look, it's remembered. Remembered that this guy was indirective PDF and this guy was a PDF and you can have another thing that's EPUB, another one that does JPEGS. So it's per document now, which is real handy. We've all got it right? You got like ten different documents open that need to come out and they have all their own different formats. Now they're going to remember, and the crazy thing is that they remember across. If I send this to a different computer, or colleague, or my home computer, it's going to remember there too. It Segways into another option. Let's say another kind of feature. If I go to File Export, there's this thing that wasn't there before. So what I'm going to do is on my desktop, I'm going to export this one. You can see it's using the exact same name I've got my InDesign document, whereas in the past what would happen is if I try and tick that, I would call this wide, maybe v1.1, or low res or something else and I exported it and when I went back into export, it remembered the last thing I called it. Now with this option on, it's going to always default to whatever the document name is, so it's on by default and you can see here it says it's only going to work the next time I do this, so I'm just going to skip through all this. The reason I show you that is because you might rely on it because that's the way it used to work, and it's going to default, can you see it's defaulting, to the name of the file again? So if you like the old way where it edited, because sometimes you have a working fil 71. Adobe InDesign CC 2021 New Features & Updates!: Oh, yes. It is that time of the year again, Adobe InDesign has dropped all it's brand new 2021 features. My name is Daniel Walter Scott, I'm a designer and I'm an Adobe certified instructor and I'm going to take you through the new features plus the sneaky one that they dropped about three months ago. That is probably my most favorite new feature that has come out in InDesign in a very long time. Let's cover the new ones first, and then we'll cover that sneaky one a little bit later in the video. Lets jump in. The first one, content aware rep. Let's jump down to page 6. I'll throw in some shortcuts as we go around, just it's time, pull in some shortcuts as well as new features. Lets Command J or Control J on a PC, six is good for long documents, as in that long. Lets bring in images, Command D, Control D on a PC. I'm going to bring in these three, click "Open", there's a box for actually another little shortcut, your left and right arrow, means you can toggle through the ones you've had selected. In this case, I've accidentally put on purpose to show you a little shortcut is this one I don't want, you can use it to escape, and it clears your way back down to two. This one there, the other one there. Let's do that content a way. I want the text to wrap around the outside of this man here, he's got a nice contrast between him and the background, let's click it. You can use this text wrap one at the moment, there's not enough detail in it. You've got to go to "Text Wrap" the actual panel under window. Click on that, click the third one along, this object. Then it's text wrapped and it's pushed everything outside of its box, but you want to change it down here as is Type to "Select subject". You're ready? You're set? You fit your time. It's good. Painter, because that way with around his head but if you're like me, if you've used the painter to do text wrap, yours looks way worse than couple of big giant circles feel like me anyway. You can play around with whether it's left side or right side or both sides or in this case, largest area seems to always work for me, and we can play around with how far away the distance which this go up 1, 2, 3, if you hold shift, you can go up in 10s, multiples of 10. That works for any up and down. You could use kerning or leading. You'll shift when you get the errors. That's going to be enough for me, let's have a look now at another example, because that one looks really well, I found that example that works really well. Let's have a look at one that works. I'll show you some extra bits for it. I'm going to go to "File" place again, that's Command D on a Mac, Control D on a PC, lets go to coffee. I'm going to open it up and I don't really have a place for it to go. I'm going to actually just drag it out, and let's put it, how big do I want it to be? [inaudible] big. I'm going send it to the back, Command Shift square bracket, the fester them on a PC, it's Control Shift square bracket. I'm going to get it in the middle there and I should really tidy up the edges. Because you're watching, I told you I would do this on my own. We've got our coffee cup, I've got it selected, same thing again. Click on it, go down here, Select subject, and you can see it's done average job at that clipping mask, sweet. Photoshop does it like amazingly, they've got a new feature, that does the path select. Hopefully InDesign gets it soon as well, so you might be looking at it and it does a whole lot better job. But in this case, what you can do is, you can say, I'm going to push this out. This is what I'm doing, I'm pushing it out, and to be honest, I probably leave it like that and probably go for largest area again and be happy enough with that. But I say you do adjust it. You've got to do it as the last part, because local changes over here might take rep panel. If I start grabbing any of these dots with my Y error, with my direct selection tool, like I actually want to push that one out. Guess what happened? Now it's a used fine path and I can't do that automatic adjustment, I can do it manually. Let's zoom in. You can just bend it around. You get close. You can go through and do some adjustments. Probably for this coffee cup though, let me just do a big giant circle, a big giant overload at the end here, but pretty nice especially if you've got more complex things like this guy here saved loads of time. This one here, maybe two circles would have worked. But wasn't that hard to adjust. Last thing before we go, this came out a little while ago. Now select on him. Just went in at full size. You can go to this last little option. I'd be a content the way of fit, and it tries to look at the image and tries to fit him best as he can within the frame. That was close enough. That's what I do. Dump the image, click content aware, and make my final adjustments. Next feature and new for 2021 is locate colors. Now this locate colors is basically, the quick short version is if you going to find change, look, we've got colored in here now. Let me show you some practical application of it. Let's say that, it's done something in the coffee here. Command D, Control D on a PC. It's my cover image in, put it in there. Again, [inaudible] give me. I'm going to grab a couple of colors using my eyedropper tool, which is the I key. I'm going to grab one of these peachy colors hopefully, I'm going to add it to my swatches panel. I'm going to close down Text Wrap, open up my Swatches. I'm going to add that one to my Swatches. I'm going to grab head escape. We want to go to my move tool and back to the eyedropper tool to clear out the eyedropper. I want like a slightly California shirt, I'm trying to tie in some of these text colors with the image. I want that one as well. I've got like a slate in a peach. Just double-click them and they would color value. So we use Slate. This one here we'll use Beach. There's a couple of things you just need to double-check if you haven't done a whole lot of finding and changing is let's go to Edit, Find/Change, make sure it colored in here. You have been able to do color for a little while, for a long time, you could do with objects and with text separately, but now you can just do it as a general. Let's just do color, not worry about what we're defining lots of things within colors and objects. I'm going to find this green that are being using. This is already in my Swatches. Look at that. You can do 10 ranges as well. If I want that RGB color, I want to change it to my new one, which is going to be this peach. The thing with it though, he's got to make sure if you have something selected, you'll have an option here is it's selected and it won't work. Just say, all of this document. Or if you've got lots of documents open, you can do it all at once, which might be super handy for you. You can decide on which frames as well, I'm just going to let it do everything and I'm going to click "Change All" and it's going to run through three instances. Hurray, simple adjustment and yeah, nice little addition for InDesign. Let's have a little look at problem you might have is, say I want to change this gray, this gray has been used quite a bit through this document, down here, lots of places, but I don't have as a swatch, so we can't do that color switch. You do need to convert it into a software. Let's grab this color, let's edit as a swatch. I'm just grabbing the text. I'm going to say you are a new swatch and pull it out. HSB, we'll discuss in a little seconds the new thing for InDesign 2021 as well. But now it's in there, I can go and change it all. Sometimes it is nice, and an excuse to show you a cool little shortcut is down the bottom here. This button that you've never clicked, click on that one. It's really nice that you can see this document plus you can start scrolling down like they're just two views of the exact same thing, but now I can start to see what else gets changed. I can see in here and over here. Let's go to Edit, change it from peach to HSB color that we created to the one that we want to switch it to, which is Slate. Have a little look. The box takes various places. Let's go, make sure it's on document. Change All. Look at that, 12 instances changed. Thank you very much, so that is finding change color, super useful. Let's click "Done". Look at the next one, it's called HSB color. In my accent, HSB is H for hue, S for saturation, B for brightness, HSB. To get to it, let's say this, I got nothing selected. I've got my foreground color, I'm going to double-click it. If you're using RGB, then you're great. I like this color, let's make it darker tone of it, you're like, "What do I do? "When do I drink it?" Down this way. RGB is a weird color space. I don't know why, it's not even primary colors. What's green doing in there? I know it's something to do with light, but anyway, let's look at this HSB. I'm going to cancel that because I've destroyed my color, go back in there. Instead of trying to mess with RGB or trying to do the hold, just add some k trick to seem like, "Hey, does anybody do that?" I do it just [inaudible] k in there and it gets darker. But now you can, at least play with these new little sliders. They're not new, they've been around. It's just a different way of controlling RGB. They're exactly the same, just you can do it by hue, saturation, and brightness rather than red, green, and blue. Hue, obviously, up and down, your slider. Working my colors. Saturation, I can make it more saturated, less saturated, and brightness when I use quite a bit, just to darken things up. I'm going to cancel that because I've messed around with it. Double-click it to go back in and just get the brightness and go. Give me a darker version please, and I can add to my swatches. Click "Okay", I don't often use this, I use it on the flower show here. Let's close down these double windows. Let's get a lighter version. Double-click it. If you're like me, use these little windows to change the colors you go to here, you go up to here, and now HSB, instead of switching to these ones. HSB, and again, I probably like these slide is even better than the way it's displayed over this side. I can actually just give me a lot of vision. Unsaturated, look at that. I'm going to add that to my swatches as well, swatches plus. Now I've got like my original color, my original peach, and just dragging it up, I've got a lighter version and a darker version. I guess it helps explain, you'll need it with these and freak out. You're like, "Well, what does HSB being in here?" It's just another way of displaying the same color spaces, RGB, which is a different way of working it. It doesn't matter if you're using the RGB version of it, or the HSB. Lab CMYK, completely different color spaces. These are the same. Anyway, I wanted that one to be the dark one, I wanted to be a nice big books, and here Command Shift square bracket to send it at the back. Make sure it's on the wrong layer. Let's get over the right layer even. Background, there we go. I don't want this to be my new fill color. Anyway, it's actually pretty bagged in. You can go to your Preflight panel and it's actually in there as well. So Window, it's got a preflight which is hidden under, oh, I remember Output. Let's go to Preflight and you can define it in here. Let's make a new one. Let's go to Define Properties and you can see in here, Colors, there he is. He's not color spaces that you might not be allowed. You might be deciding that you don't need RGB or Basic Copy. This is Dan's Preflight, so this will give you a warning if you are using these wrong color spaces. Don't want RGB, but I also don't want HSB because they are the same thing, so click "OK", and let's actually define the profile. Checking, 30 errors because I usually use HSB colors. That is hue saturation brightness, if you're using Illustrator and InDesign, use them in there as well. They're basically implemented the same way, you might find them a little bit more helpful. Next new feature is something called Recovery as a Service. What is it? It is when your files go corrupt and your computer doesn't know what to do with it. You can actually send it to Adobe now or automatically send it to them and they can see whether they can fix it for you on your behalf. It's a bit of an automated process. Now, I can't make this happen, I can't break or corrupt the files, so I've just got some screenshots of what's meant to happen. You have something, it opens up, it can't open it and it says, "Would you like it to process it temporarily on their services?" You say, "Yes" because it's broken and it does some stuff, and opens it up, and recovers it. Up until recently, there was just an email you send it to, but to be honest, like this is a new feature I guess [inaudible] , and but for me I know, the InDesign for me is being super stable for so long now, I guess that's why we like InDesign. You might be different, you might be like, "Finally, Recovery as a Service is going to be useful for you." I can't think to break my files anymore but anyway, that's a new service that's in there. If it discovers an unopenable document, it will try and fix it automatically. There's one more update for InDesign 2021, and it's a small update to something that came out only a couple of months ago. I bet you there's lots of people out there who haven't seen Share for Review. There's a couple of updates to that but I bet you there's lots of you who have never heard of it and I want to share with you. It's my absolute favoritest update InDesign for a very long time. Share for Review, easiest way click this icon and Share for Review. Whatever reason you don't have that one, you can go to File and Share for Review, either way you end up in the same place here. I've got my name of my document, I'm going to create a Share for Review. Basically, this is web based, so this is going to go out to my client or my stake whatever you want to call that person and they don't have to have InDesign which is amazing, they can't do. Invite only. Let's just do a quick version of it and I'll double back and show you the new more nuanced parts of it, but I just go to Public and don't require a password for the moment to make this work, and here's my little link here. I'm going to click it, it's going to open up on a page that's not on the screen, and drag it up here. Make it full screen and look at that. I got a width version of it that I can share with anybody and I don't need InDesign, I don't even need Adobe ID, and it's got the spreads. What's nice about it? I can just share that link, it's here. It's this little like copy thing. Copies it to clipboard, that's not that clear anyway, but you can just email it to them all or send it via social media but they get this web interface. This brings us to the new updates for 2021. It's these three buttons were there before, really useful. Contents page here. Let's say I highlight this. I click on the highlighter and highlights it as you would imagine and I can say things like we using American spelling here. I can't spell American. I should not be spell checking anybody's work but I submitted, let's look at a couple of other ones and then I'll show you how it looks on the InDesign side. You can see it's coming out with my name here because I happen to be logged into my Creative Cloud accounts but if this person doesn't have it, they can login as a guest or sign up for a free Adobe ID. You don't need a paid Creative Cloud license for this to work. Look at the other ones, not like you need to know what Strikethrough does but it's on my list of things to show you. I've written down my outline for this video, so anyway. Let's look at the last one. Oops, submit that one and this one here replace text buddies, lowercase b. Let's see what happens back in InDesign. I'm going to close the Share for Review. Now, this goes back in, good idea. This opens automatically. If you can't find it, you need to go to Window's, go to Comments and go to Review, and you can see, but it's got these things in here. But it's nice, works well. I can click on them, it jumps to the bit that I need to replace. Do we need this? Look, it even highlights it. Let's say I do delete it, oh, challenges. Can you see my comment is unmapped now? But I can go into here and say actually I have resolved that, it's done. Let's do design buddies, and let's make a lowercase b and it'll resolve that one as well. Now, I'm just showing you how life works, nothing's too exciting in here but let's look at it a bit deeper into what you can do. One of the options is you can hide annotations. Now, I've been on preview mode the whole time, said W key on the keyboard, you can see my working version. You can see there's my little highlight, you can hide them if you need to, just messing up your flow, you can filter them as well, it's pretty clever by the different reviewers, times of days, status, that'll make sense as well. A couple of other interesting things before we finish up is under this, say you do these changes. The web version doesn't update automatically, you got you go Share Review and you've got to go to Update Link, and then it will update. Surprise you how fast it works. Other things you might do is you might require a password, you might go Invite Only and add specific people. You can add email addresses. They don't need to be specifically Adobe IDs at this stage but let's say I put in some I know that doesn't have an Adobe license, they will be required to create one. It's free to do comments and stuff. Otherwise, you're going to get public and use the password. It's up to you how smooth you want this to be. I know some clients are going to see that they need to create an Adobe ID even though it's free, they'll freak out, so I'm just going to send a public link with a password. Another nice thing is for me on this side, [inaudible] not replying to me, I can use this at and start looking at the different people that are included in this. You might have three or four different stakeholders and you can send at's to them specifically. Can't see much of me because I'm probably blurred out down there but you can add at symbols and if you do want to jump out to the actual view itself, go back into the web version of it and you can go to here and say Manage reviews on web and it will jump out to the web page which is also opening up on the wrong screen. Here it is. It's showing me the different reviews I've got on the go. Go into it. Going back into that same view that my commenter has. Let me switch out to the big camera. Those are the InDesign 2021 updates. What did you like the best? I'm interested to know. Drop down in the comments, what you thought your most favorite was, second-most favorite was. It really helps me to work out what needs to be in the new course, what needs to be upgraded, what people actually like versus what I think they like as a drop that down there. That is it. Also, I've got updates for all the other Adobe products, Photoshop, Illustrator, after fixed Premiere Pro, Adobe XD, check those out as well, but that's it for another year of updates. I will see you in another video. Bye now. 72. Adobe InDesign CC 2022 New Features & Updates!: Hi, everyone. In this video, we are going to cover some of the updates for Adobe InDesign 2022. The big upgrade for InDesign this year is the integration more better name of the CAPTCHA functionality. If you've used the Adobe app called Adobe Capture, then you would have seen some of this tech, but it's cool now that it's built into InDesign. What I mean by this is this image here, I can right-click it and say actually, can you extract from this image a bunch of different things? Let's do color themes. Look, it's pulled colors straight from the image. I've picked quite the colorful image that we made earlier, but look at this, awesome. What you can do is you can save it to your CC library, whichever one you've got open over here. It's given us the colorful options, but we can pick bright ones, and we can pick muted ones. You can see, it just picked five color swatches that work in a great combination. Deep colors. [LAUGHTER] You can also decide that actually I like this, but I need to move it around. You can copy them straight out of here. Copy the hexadecimal code and use that, or add them to your library. Once I've got it from the library, I can use it. Look. It's beautiful. [LAUGHTER] I had better plans for that. But, hey, you can pull colors from images, which is awesome. You can also pull shapes for images. The same thing again, right-click. Extract from image shapes. It's made a black and white version of it. It's going to make a vector graphic, and we use the eraser tool to tidy it up a little bit. How much detail I want? I want less. You can see how this would be potentially bit of a hand-drawn or some graphic that you're drawing with your hands. [LAUGHTER] Let's save it to the library and see what we get. I'm going to close it down. Look at this, I've got a victor shape that I can start using. Look at this, come on. Let's have a look. Illustrate a victory goodness without having to leave InDesign. It's actually using the power of that Capture App. If you haven't used the app, iPhone, Android, look for Adobe Capture. It does a lot of this stuff as well in your mobile, so you can be taken photos and stuff. [NOISE] Fancy. One of the probably more useful options either than pulling colors from it, is I'm going to show you a different method of getting to that capture panel. Instead of right-clicking an image and going into here, you can actually have nothing selected. Go to your CC libraries, go to the little plus button. There it is there, it's knew. It's been added to that. I'm going to get to the same place. I can drag my image then we can use straight in here. We can throw in now image directly. I can say, I don't want the colors, I want the type. Tell me what it is. This is the font picker. I'm going to pick this shape and I'm going to say find similar fonts. It's either going to pick similar or exact, but you know what that font is, you've used it before. Cooper, there's a couple other recommendations in here. Pretty close but that one's exactly. I'll save it to my library. It's handy for not just photographs of fonts, but even work that you've maybe outlined. You don't have the font or it's a logo from somebody else and you don't have all that workings of it. But you can see in here, now it's a character style. I can say bam. [LAUGHTER] Bump it up. [NOISE] Lovely. That is the main big integration upgrade for InDesign. Let's look at a couple more. The next is more of a change. It's worth noting because in the past, if you're an InDesign user, you'll know these guys are master pages. But from now on, they are going to be called parent pages. You will find the word master replaced with parent everywhere when referring to what you know as master pages. It's Adobe's effort to use more inclusive terminology. The note I've got from Adobe is that they're an inclusive company and they won't use words that make people feel unwelcome and hurt, so that's why it's changed. You'll see it change through InDesign and anywhere else in the Adobe products. For me, Premiere Pro has a lot of master fix and master tracks. They'll all get changed. You might have already noticed in Premiere Pro is now source track instead of master track. If you do notice any of those around and it used to be called master, that is why inclusive terminology. Next feature. The last small update for InDesign is on a Mac. Go to Preferences. InDesign, Preferences, and go down to user interface scaling. On a PC, it's under Edit, Preferences, user interface scaling. Now it's a small one and a big one, depending on what [LAUGHTER] different technology you're using or hardware you're using. You can change keys to the interface from small to large icons. If you need them to be bigger or smaller, you can do it in here. What used to be the problem is if you plugged in a monitor and a while you were working, it will just automatically gets the UI size. Now, you can go and manually pick it because often, it would be the wrong one or not often, sometimes. My friends, that is the updates for Adobe InDesign 2022. Onto the next video. 73. What To Do Once You’ve Finished You Advanced InDesign CC Training Course : Hey, you made it to the end. Well done. Not many people invest in their selves this much. Especially with something like Advanced, okay, you might be a capable user... but I'm hoping that this course is going to give you those... little tricks and tips just to go a bit faster... and get more out of your time. In terms of next steps... InDesign is no-- there's nothing really asked to go from here. There's some more kind of like nichey things to look at... but InDesign , working out, this is advanced stuff here. In terms of other advanced courses... you might look at Photoshop or Illustrator. Now, I'm working on those courses at the moment. At the time of this filming, they're not finished... but Advanced Photoshop and Advanced Illustrator... are definitely on my plan for the next kind of eight months. Check, they might be ready already. The other thing you might do is-- What other things you could do? It might be animating some of these graphics... so you might be a capable Graphic Designer. Maybe Motion Graphics might be the next step for you. I've got lots of courses with After Effects... for animating Motion Graphics... so check those out. You also might look at... maybe at some UI design. UI design, just basically Web and App design, the graphic side of it. I've got courses with-- UI Design with Photoshop, Illustrator, and XD. So check out any of those ones. You might also check out, maybe some fun end Web Design. Not just design side, or the UI side, the actual building of the site. I've got some HTML, and CSS building courses using Dreamweaver. So you might check those out. And now will be the time for a review. If you've enjoyed this class, or my style... leave me a review. Reviews really help me rank, and do well with courses... and lets me continue being a full time trainer, which I really enjoy. All right, this is the end. The awkward bit, I wave for a while, then we finish up... then, that's it, we're done. Hopefully, I'll see you in another course. I'll keep waving. Bye.